Vehicle Manual

__________________________________________________________________________________

Issue Date: January 2026

Revision Date: August 2026

NOTE: Carefully read, understand and follow the instructions provided in this manual, and keep it in a safe place for future reference. If you have any doubt whatsoever regarding the use or care of your vehicle, please visit your Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance or advice.

This Vehicle Manual should be considered as an integral part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle.

3 SEATS AND SAFETY

3.1 Important Safety Precautions

Always wear your seat belt

All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belt no matter how short the trip is, in order to minimize the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash. Failure to wear a seat belt significantly increases the risk of serious injury or fatality in an accident.

In an accident, an unbelted passenger be projectiled, and can cause serious injury to self or other passengers.

Pregnant women must also wear seat belts after consultation with the doctor for specific recommendations.

Airbag hazards

Airbags are critical safety devices, but they can pose hazards if mishandled or improperly used. Airbags are supplementary safety systems and are not a substitute for seat belts. Rapid deployment with significant force can cause injuries, especially to occupants seated too close, unbelted, or improperly positioned, including children and shorter adults.

Chemical exposure from deployment residues can irritate the skin, eyes, and respiratory system. To minimize hazards, always use seat belts, maintain proper seating positions, deactivate airbags during servicing, and follow safety protocols. Never place a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat unless the airbag is deactivated. Doing so can result in serious injury or death if the airbag deploys.

Driver distraction

Driver distraction occurs when a driver’s attention is diverted from the primary task of operating the vehicle, compromising safety. It can stem from visual distractions like looking at a phone, manual distractions such as adjusting controls, or cognitive distractions like daydreaming or conversing.

Common sources include mobile devices, CID systems, eating, and external events. Driver distraction can lead to loss of vehicle control, collisions, serious injury, or death. Distracted driving increases the risk of accidents, as reaction times slow and situational awareness diminishes. To mitigate this risk, drivers should minimize in-vehicle distractions, use hands-free devices sparingly, and maintain focus on the road to ensure their safety and that of others.

Mahindra shall not be held liable for accidents resulting from driver distraction or failure to follow safe driving practices.

Control your speed

Controlling your speed is essential for safe driving, as excessive speed reduces reaction time, increases stopping distance, and magnifies the severity of collisions. Adhering to speed limits ensures better vehicle control, especially in adverse weather, heavy traffic, or around curves and intersections. Driving at a safe and appropriate speed helps accommodate unexpected hazards, such as pedestrians or sudden stops, and improves fuel efficiency. Always adjust your speed based on road conditions, visibility, and traffic flow to protect yourself, passengers, and others on the road.

Unauthorized modifications to seats, seat belts, airbags, or child restraint systems may compromise safety. Mahindra shall not be held liable for injuries or damages resulting from improper alterations or misuse. Always follow this Owner’s Manual and consult a Authorized Mahindra Service Center before modifying safety components. Carefully review the terms of your warranty for exclusions as contained in the Warranty and Service Information Guide.

The images in this Owner’s Manual are representative and may vary depending on the vehicle model, software version, and specifications.

Always take into account the road conditions, weather conditions, vehicle’s speed in order to prevent accidents.

Turn ‘ON’ the side indicators at least 30 meter before taking a turn or changing the lane.

Decelerate to a safe speed before taking turn. Do not apply brakes during cornering.

When overtaking other vehicles, watch out for the oncoming vehicle.

Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.

If your vehicle is equipped with CID / navigation system, set and make changes to your travel route only when the vehicle is parked.

If your car gets flooded and has soaked carpeting or water on the flooring, you should not try to start the vehicle, we recommend to kindly contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Even with the presence of airbags, it is essential for the driver and passengers to wear seat belts at all times to reduce the risk and severity of injuries in the event of a collision.

Safe driving depends on a combination of attentive driving habits, following traffic rules and signals, properly maintaining vehicle condition, and being aware of your surrounding situations based on the traffic, weather and road conditions.

3.2 Seats

Vehicle seats are designed to provide comfort, support, and safety for occupants during travel. Modern seats are ergonomically engineered to reduce fatigue and include adjustable features like seat height, lumbar support, and reclining angles to accommodate various body types and preferences. Seats have integrated safety systems such as seat belts and airbags, with headrests positioned to reduce the risk of whiplash in collisions.

They also have advanced features like seat ventilation, USB charging and BYOD docking.

Sitting in Correct Position

Follow the tips below for a comfortable and safe journey:

•

Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine pressed against the seat back.

•

The driver and front passenger seat head restraint has 4 positions. Adjust it as close as possible to the above specified position, with the top of the head restraint even with the top of your head.

•

Maintain at least a 25 cm distance from the centre of the steering wheel to your chest.

•

The top curve of the steering wheel should align with your chin for ideal road visibility.

•

Adjust your seat and seat back angle such that your wrists rest on the steering wheel.

•

Ensure your legs are in bent position while fully depressing the brake and accelerator pedals.

The seat should be adjusted while still maintaining control of the foot pedals (able to fully depress the brake and accelerator pedals), steering wheel (rest the wrists on the steering wheel) and your view of the instrument panel controls.

Never adjust the driver’s seat while the vehicle is in motion. The seat movement may be more than expected and can cause the driver to unintentionally operate the accelerator or brake, or turn the steering wheel, causing loss of control of the vehicle, an accident or serious personal injury. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is stationary.

Never put objects under the seats. They may interfere with the seat-lock mechanism or unexpectedly activate the seat position adjusting lever, causing the seat to suddenly move, resulting in loss of control of the vehicle, an accident or serious personal injury.

While adjusting the seat, do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts. This may lead to injuries.

3.2.1 Manual - Front (If Equipped)

Front Seat Slide

To adjust the seat position, locate the seat slide lever beneath the seat. Pull and hold the lever upward to unlock the seat. Slide the seat forward or backward to your desired position while keeping the lever engaged. Once positioned, release the lever to lock the seat securely in place. Always ensure the seat is properly locked before driving.

While adjusting the seat, ensure the latch fully engages on both sides of the fore-aft adjustment track rails and that the seat is firmly locked in the desired position. Failure to properly secure the seat could result in unintended movement during a sudden stop or collision, potentially causing injury. After adjusting, push and pull the seat to confirm it is securely locked before driving.

Front Seat Recline

To adjust the seat back angle, lean forward slightly and lift the seat back adjustment lever. While holding the lever, lean back to set the seatback to your desired angle. Once adjusted, release the lever and ensure it returns to its original position, locking the seat back securely in place. Always confirm the seat back is locked before driving to ensure safety.

Seat belts offer maximum protection during frontal or rear collisions when occupants are seated upright and positioned well back in their seats.

If you are reclined while wearing a seat belt, the lap belt may slide past your hips and exert restraint forces on the abdomen, increasing the risk of internal injuries in a collision. Additionally, the shoulder strap may press against your neck, causing discomfort or injury.

The more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of serious injury in a collision.

The front seat-back should never be fully reclined while the vehicle is in motion, as doing so may increase the risk of injuries.

When returning the rear-reclined seat back to its upright position, make sure you support the seat back while operating the lever.

Front Seat Height Adjustment (If Equipped)

The driver’s seat height can be adjusted using the height adjust handle.

To raise the seat, lift the handle repeatedly until the desired height is reached.

To lower the seat, push the handle downward in a similar manner.

Do not adjust the seat height while the vehicle is moving.

3.2.2 Power Seat- Front (If Equipped)

Power Seat with Memory (Driver Side only) (If Equipped):

The power seat switches are provided on the driver door panel.

Power seat provides advanced 6-way electrical adjustments for the driver seat.

It is equipped with electrically-operated power slider, power recliner and power height adjustment mechanisms. The shape of the switches guide you to the function it has been assigned. During vehicle running, Power seat movement is not allowed for short duration considering user safety. If you need further seat movement, release and press the switch once again.

Memory Functions (Driver Side only) (If Equipped)

The driver seat is equipped with a memory function, which allows you to save and recall seat and rearview mirror settings for up to three different drivers. The memory function is operated by a button located on the driver’s side door.

This system makes sure you have enough room to get in and out of the driver’s seat by sliding the driver’s seat back.

Driver Seat and ORVM Memory Setting (If Equipped)

1. Turn Ignition ON.

2. Adjust the Seat to your desired position.

3. Adjust the ORVM to your desired position.

4. Short Press the M button followed by desired memory button assigning (1, 2 or 3).

5. Preferred seating and ORVM position is stored in memory, and you will get chime confirmation from DID.

6. To transform the seat into saved memory position in dynamic condition, long press the desired memory position switch.

If ORVM adjustment is skipped and memory switches are pressed ORVM position at that instance of time will be saved. The ORVM can be positioned by the user and stored in the same switch separately.

•

The driver seat always move to its most rearward point of travel regardless of the current position.

•

The final seat position will not be always the same when using easy access function. There will be some differences within the acceptable range depending on the occupant’s weight and vehicle power supply status. This is completely normal and not a fault.

•

Make sure that the parking brake is applied before adjusting the seat position or operating easy access function so that the vehicle cannot move.

•

Do not operate seat memory switch or other switch while the easy access function is activated as it can cause malfunctioning of the easy access function.

•

If the outside rearview mirror control switch is operated while setting up the driver seat and outside rearview mirror position, the memory setting will be cancelled.

•

If you do not press any memory switch within 5 second, after pressing the driver seat position memory switch, the memory setting will be cancelled.

Refer switches chapter under Convenience 1 for detailed ORVM features.

Restoring Seat and ORVM Position

In Ignition ON condition, user needs to press and hold any restore button (1, 2 or 3) shall take the Seat and ORVM to previously stored memory location and you will get acoustic confirmation (chime) from DID.

In Ignition OFF condition, user needs to short pressing/press and hold any restore button (1, 2 or 3) shall take the Seat to previously stored memory location. During memory restore operation, pressing any seat switch shall stop ongoing seat movement.

During memory restore operation, pressing any seat/ORVM switch shall stop ongoing seat/ORVM movement.

The ORVM cannot be independently recalled while the seat is in its stored position.

The ORVM can be recalled only when the ignition is ON.

Driver Seat Lumbar Adjustment (If Equipped)

The driver’s seat features lumbar adjustment to provide additional support for the lower back. The lumbar contour can be adjusted using the adjusting knob located on the outer side of the seat cushion.

Turn the knob to increase or decrease the amount of support, allowing you to find a comfortable position for your lower back while driving.

Properly adjusted lumbar support is essential for providing adequate back support, especially during long journeys.

Do not apply force or rotate the lumbar adjustment knob beyond its extreme stop positions in either direction. Forcing the knob may damage the adjustment mechanism or affect its functionality.

3.2.3 Second Row Seats

The second row seat has a 60:40 split configuration/captain seat with a foldable armrest.

60:40 Seat

Captain Seat

Loading luggage on the seats is dangerous. The luggage can become a projectile that could hit and injure passengers in a sudden stop or collision. Luggage should always be kept on the floor.

To avoid serious injury, do not sit on or place objects on a folded seat back while the vehicle is moving.

Second Row Seat Recline

60:40 Seat

Captain Seat

To change the second-row seat back angle, lean forward slightly while raising the recline lever on the side of the seat cushion. Then, lean back to the desired position and release the recline lever to secure the seat in place.

Ensure the recline lever returns to its original position, and confirm that the seat back is securely locked in place by gently rocking it forward and backward. This ensures the seat is properly secured for safe use.

When returning the rear-reclined seat back to its upright position, ensure you support the seat back with one hand while operating the recline lever with the other.

Don’t fold the rear seat back in forward direction with rear outboard seat belt inserted in web guide condition. It may severely damage seat belt webbing and rear seat back fabric, also guide might break.

Don’t fold the rear seat back in forward direction with any of rear seat belts tongue in engaged with seat belt buckle condition. It may damage the seat belt mechanism, webbing and functionality of belt system. In such abuse conditions OEM is not responsible to claim part replacement under warranty.

Second Row Seat Folding (Third Row Seat Entry/Exit Access)

Entry Access

The second row 40P/Captain seat can be tumbled forward to provide access to the Third Row Seat.

60:40 Seat - (If Equipped)

Captain Seat - Entry Access

•

Operate the lever on the side of the seat. This lever actuates the one-touch fold and tumble mechanism of the 40P/captain seat.

60/40 Seat - Exit Access

•

While occupying the 3rd row seat, Operate the lever on the back of the 2nd row 40P seat to actuate the one-touch fold and tumble mechanism of the 40P seat.

Type 1 (If Equipped)

Type 2 (If Equipped)

Captain Seat - Exit Access

•

To tumble the second row 40P/Captain seat while sitting on the third row seat, pull the lever behind the 40P /captain backrest.

•

In order to use the 2nd row seat to load cargo, first tumble the seat as explained above. Then, push the seat downward of the vehicle until the two latches underneath the seat lock onto the floor.

•

To tumble the seat from the back folded (cargo) condition, first make the seat back upright. Then, operate the one-touch fold and tumble lever.

The seat tumble mechanism cannot be operated when the seat is in the folded position.

Return the seat back to its upright position in one continuous motion to securely lock the seat and in turn avoiding seat flipping forward suddenly leading to injuries.

If this happens, release the seat lock by pulling the lever and repeat the procedure.

Be cautious when placing your hands around the seat anchors. You could pinch your hands or fingers between the seat anchor and the seat. Hold the edge of the seat when lowering it into place. Never place your hands between the seat anchor and the seat.

To avoid personal injury keep legs away from the seat anchor when re-latching the seat back to the fold position.

Second Row Seat Folding (For Luggage)

The 2nd Row 60P seat back can be folded to load cargo on top of it. Operate the lever on the side of the 60P seat. This lever actuates the backrest fold mechanism. Release the lever once the backrest has folded completely.

To bring the seat back to upright position and push the seat back until it locks into the desired reclining position.

Second Row Armrest – 60:40 Seat (If Equipped)

Second row 60P seat features armrest with cup holder.

•

To open the armrest, simply pull on the tab given at the top of the armrest (as shown).

•

When armrest is not required, push back the armrest into the 60P backrest.

Second Row Captain Seat arm rest fold and unfold (If Equipped)

While folding the seat back ensure arm rest is in unfold condition.

3.2.4 Power Seat Adjustment (Co-Driver Side only) (If Equipped)

Co-driver seat is equipped with 6-way power seat. Use the switch to adjust the seat position.

3.2.5 Third Row Seats

Access to or exit from third row seat is possible by completely folding the second row seat. Second row seat features 60:40 split configuration. Second row 40P seat can be tumbled to gain access to third row seat.

Refer to the previous sections for details regarding folding of second row seats.

Third Row Seat Folding

To fold the third row seat, unlock the seat back by pulling the lever on the rear of the seat back outwards. Then push the seat back forward to fold the seat.

Similarly, lower the other half of third row seat to get a completely flat surface. Both the second row and third row seats can be folded flat to maximise the luggage space.

To Fold

To Open

To open the seat back, pull on the lever to unlock the backrest and use the same lever to lift the backrest upward till it locks at the rear most position. When loading bigger pieces of luggage behind the third row seat, the backrest can be locked at a more upright position using the same lever. There are 6 locking positions at 2 degree interval each. This provides seating space for the 3rd row occupant as well as provides a slightly increased volume for storing luggage.

3.2.6 Seats Features

•

Ventilation Seats - Driver and Co-driver (If Equipped)

The active ventilation fans blows air to the occupant contact area with seat inserts through small vent holes on the surface of the seat cushions and seat backs.

You can use the seat ventilation whenever you feel excessive heat or sweating in contact surfaces between occupant and seat.

Ventilation Seats

Seat Ventilation is a special feature with an additional air circulation of the driver and co-driver seats.

It ventilates the seat temperature for comfortable driving.

Driver and co-driver seat ventilation control can be accessed under:

1. CID footer and

2. Climate Control application.

•

Ventilation Seats - Second Row (If Equipped)

Ventilation seat feature is provided on the extreme right and left seats in 60:40 configuration and both captain seats (as equipped) for second row seats.

To adjust the seat ventilation level from OFF >> 1 >> 2 >> 3 >> OFF, which is indicated by LED illumination, press the switch provided on the edges of seat lap for right and left seat.

•

The ventilated seat uses the interior air for ventilation. Make sure that it is used together with the air conditioner.

•

The ventilated seat is not a cooling/heating seat which blows out cold air from it.

•

Don’t put your hand in the bottom of the cushion when the ventilated seat is in operation. Otherwise, the running ventilation fan may cause you to be frightened or injured.

•

If there is any problem with the seat ventilation system, Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further assistance.

•

Do not place any sharp or heavy object on the passenger seat as this could damage the ventilation system by cracking the seat upholstery.

•

If any liquid spills, clean it up right away. Wait until the seat is dry before using the air ventilation feature. The performance of the seat ventilation system may be impacted by liquid contact.

•

Do not use the ventilated seat in the following situations:

–

The seat is not occupied.

–

There are objects on the seat, such as a child seat, newspapers, plastic bags.

•

Never use a solvent to clean the seats, including petrol, paint thinner, benzene, alcohol or alcohol-based products.

•

The battery can be discharged if the seat ventilation system is used for a long time with the ignition mode ON and without engine running.

•

In above condition, the ventilated seat will operate for a short period of time and will be turned off for better functionality of ventilation fan.

•

If small vent holes on the surface of the seat cushions and seatbacks are clogged with dust and dirt, the air flow from the ventilated seat may weaken. In this case, clean the seat surface by the vacuum cleaner.

•

Seat Ventilation Control:

The Seat Ventilation Setting accessible through CID climate application.

•

Go to Climate app in CID.

•

Enable the driver and co-driver seat ventilation feature based on the requirement.

Once enable the seat ventilation, user will be able to modify the airflow with three different level. The default level will be OFF.

For every short press on the seat ventilation icon, the levels shall be changed by one step to another step like Level 3 →Level 2 → Level 1 → OFF →Level 1 → Level 2 →Level 3→ Level 2 →Level 3 → OFF.

Long press on the seat ventilation icon, to turn it OFF.

Again, a short press on the same icon will enable the feature with Last stored Level.

•

Easy Entry and Easy Exit

Driver seat is equipped with easy entry and exit function. This helps user to enter and exit the vehicle by moving the seat backwards and downwards automatically in Ignition OFF and driver door open conditions. This can be enabled or disabled through the CID.

In Easy Entry and Easy Exit function, when the door is closed, seat will go back to the same position as it was before opening the door.

Activation and deactivation:

To activation and deactivation Easy Entry And Easy Exit following the below

Go to Setting→ Vehicle Setting→ Convenience→Easy Entr y& Easy Exit in CID (Enable or Disable )
Easy Entry and Easy exit feature by taping sliding bar.

•

Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is stationary, otherwise there is a risk of accident. The seat should be adjusted so that the brake/ clutch pedal can be pressed fully.

•

Be cautious when adjusting the seat, you may suffer injuries without paying proper attention while adjusting seat.

•

Driver side electric seat can be adjusted in ignition off also, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle, as there is a risk of injury!

•

Power seats will be operated even when the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position. However, to prevent battery discharge, we suggest that you adjust your seats when the engine is running.

•

Do not forcibly operate any power adjustment switch if the seat comes in contact with any other object and cannot be adjusted anymore.

•

If the power seats are not operational, the seats should be checked and fixed before driving.

•

Easy Entry/Exit function once enabled, remains active until it is disabled. Be cautious during this operation as the rear seat passenger could get injured.

•

Do not put any luggage/water bottles below driver seat as they can obstruct power seat movement or damage seat mechanism/motor.

•

Do not remove vehicle battery while seat is in motion.

Ergo Switch/Lever — Co-Driver Seat (If Equipped)

Power Ergo Switch (Boss Mode)

Co-driver seat is equipped with a power ergo switch. It enables second row LH seat occupant to slide and tilt the backrest of the co-driver seat forward/backward.

Ergo Lever (Manual)

Co-Driver Seat is equipped with an Ergo lever. This lever enables you to move the unoccupied co-driver seat forward, in order to increase the leg room behind the co-driver seat.

In order to do this, while seated on the driver seat/2nd row seat, operate the Ergo lever located on the backrest of the co-driver seat and push the seat forward manually.

Be cautious when adjusting the co-driver seat using power ergo switch/manual ergo lever, as the co-driver seat passenger may suffer injuries without paying proper attention.

Operate the ergo switch /lever with caution for co-driver leg room, as excess adjustment may lead to an injury.

3.3 Head Restraint

The head restraint comprises the padded portion which contacts your head and is inserted/locked in receptacles on the top of the seat back. Vehicle seats are equipped with head restraints which are vertically adjustable. The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the event of rear collision.

Always align top of the head restraint with the top of your head or as close to it as possible. To raise the head restraint, pull the restraint up.

To lower the head restraint, press the lock knob and push the head restraint down. The head restraint can be pulled out completely by depressing the locking button while pulling the restraint out. Align the head restraint shafts over the holes on the seat top and push the restraint straight down till you hear the lock click. Keep the seat back as upright as possible so the headrest is behind, not beneath, and almost touching your head.

Never drive with the head restraints not properly adjusted, head restraints removed or inserted in a flipped condition. With no support behind your head, your neck could be seriously injured in a collision.

Head restraints are provided for the front row and second row outboard & 3rd row occupants only.

3.4 Seat Belt

3.4.1 General Warnings and Instructions

At least once each month, inspect the seat belt webbing for any cuts, tears, or other signs of wear (such as fraying along the edges). Also inspect the anchors, retractors, and buckles to be sure they are tight and operational.

•

All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belt no matter how short the trip in order to minimize the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash. In an accident, an un-belted passenger becomes a projectile, and can cause serious injury to himself or another passenger.

•

In a rollover crash, an un-belted person is significantly more likely prone to Injury than a person wearing a seat belt

•

In order to be properly buckled, you must always sit up straight and keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part must be worn low and tight across your hips, just touching the top of your thighs. While fastening the seat belt, the shoulder strap of the seat belt must pass over your chest and top of your shoulder. It must never touch your neck, face, the side of your shoulder, arm, or pass under your arm. The belt must always be flat against your body and not twisted in any way. Nothing, such as an arm rest, a pocketbook, or any external objects should be between you and the seat belt. Improperly worn of a seat belt will reduce the protection in an accident.

•

Seat belts should be adjusted as tightly as possible, consistent with comfort to properly secure the wearer in the seat.

•

The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for adults must be properly used and maintained.

•

For usage of adult seat belt to secure children, refer to section of manual for child seat positions and use a child restraint systems.

•

Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is in motion. Passenger who does not wear the seat belts will be under a high risk of thrown against the vehicle inside hard parts, against other occupants or out of the vehicle during emergency stop or collision.

•

Do not use any accessories on seat belts or modify in any way the seat belt system. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

•

An accident or emergency stop, can damage your seat belt system, even if the accident is “minor”. Please have your Authorized Mahindra Service Center inspect the seat belt system after an accident.

•

Please be aware that any unsecured item in your vehicle, such as your pet, unsecured child restraint system, a laptop or mobile phones, can become a projectile in the event of an accident or sudden stop, causing injuries to occupants in the vehicle.

Never use a damaged seat belt system. A damaged seat belt will not provide protection in an accident, resulting in serious injury.

•

Seat belt systems are prone to abuse. They are not indestructible. They must be handled with care to avoid damage.

•

Keep the belts clean and dry. Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and webbings are soiled. If they need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners. These chemicals will severely weaken the belts.

•

Retractors in 3-point type seat belts retract the seat belts when not in use. The inertia lock and coil spring allow the belts to remain comfortable on users during normal driving. During accidents or abrupt stops, inertia locks restrict the sudden forward movement of the wearer.

Prevention of seat belt slow retraction:

a. Check if there any twist on in-board or out-board side of safety belt.

b. Check if dust accumulated on outer parts such as Webbing, D-Loop, Tongue stopper and Tongue.

c. Remove the dust from D-Loop, Webbing, Tongue & Tongue stopper by compressed air or air blower.

d. Use clean and lint free cloth and hand gloves for cleaning safety belt parts D-Loop, Webbing, Tongue & Tongue stopper. Do not use any chemicals and cleaning fluids could damage the seat belt assembly.

e. Inspect the Webbing for retraction performance. Safety belt assembly cleaning required if seat belt retraction becomes very slow due to dust and soil accumulation on safety belt assembly, then below cleaning procedure to be followed:

1. Appropriate Procedure of disassembly of all pyrotechnic devices to be followed for pretensioner seat belt. The Battery terminal to be removed before disassembly of pretensioner, otherwise there will be error codes registered in Airbag ECU and Airbag ECU will show malfunction.

2. Open Pillar trims and take out Seat belt assembly on bench by carefully disassembly of connector and Lap Pretensioner/ Anchor wire assembly (If Equipped). Kindly follow correct safety belt pretensioner handling procedure in case of pretensioner safety belts. Use clean and lint free cloth and hand gloves for cleaning safety belt assembly. Do not use any chemicals and cleaning fluids could damage the Seat belt webbing and other parts.

3. If seat belt movement is sticky due to dust accumulation. Then please contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for help in cleaning.

4. In case of soiling on the belt, use a mild soap solution consisting of 2 tablespoons of natural soap to 1 liter of lukewarm water.

5. Care to be taken to prevent contact of soap water with Pretensioner.

6. Clean dust accumulated on D-Loop, Webbing and overall assembly by close inspection of D-Loop and Webbing using lint free cloth.

7. After cleaning safety belt they should be dried by lint free dry cloth.

8. After cleaning kindly inspect Webbing movement through D-Loop slot for any sticky movement of webbing.

9. Assemble the safety belt using correct torque. Re-assemble all trim parts.

10. Inspect the Webbing for retraction performance.

Seat Belts - Patients: Persons with serious medical conditions should also wear a seat belt. Consult your doctor for specific recommendations before travel.

Seat Belts - Pregnant Women: Pregnant women must also wear seat belts. Consult your doctor for specific recommendations.

The lap belt should be worn snugly and as low as possible over the hips. The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder, but never across the stomach area. When worn properly, the seat belt will protect both the mother and the foetus in an accident or emergency stop.

A pregnant woman should never wear the seat belt across the stomach area. This could lead to serious injuries to the foetus and/or the pregnant mother.

Never wear twisted seat belts. Excessive forces will be transferred from the belt to the wearer, in a collision, resulting in serious personal injury.

Each seat belt is meant for use by one person only. Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. The seat belt will not be able to absorb the impact forces properly leading to serious injuries.

Never wear a belt around a child being carried on the occupant’s lap. This could lead to serious injuries.

Seat Belt Usage is Necessary to:

•

Reduce the possibility of being out from your vehicle during an accident.

•

Reduce the possibility of injuries to upper body, lower body and legs during an accident.

•

Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle.

Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the vehicle seat belts. The lap portion should be snug fastened on the hips and as low as possible and the shoulder belt should be rout across the child’s shoulder, not across neck or face. If you are unable to position the belt across the child’s shoulder, the child should be seated in a booster seat. Frequently check the seat belt to be sure it remains snug and in position. A squirming child could cause the seat belt to come out of position.

3.4.2 Seat Belt Configuration

To protect you and your passengers in the event of an accident, it is highly recommended that the seat belts should be used by all occupants inside of your vehicle.

Seat Belt Types with respect to Location
Seat Location	Seat Belt Type
Driver Seat	Seat belt with Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL), & Anchor Pretensioner
Co-Driver Seat	Seat belt with Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL)
2nd Row LH (40P)	Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR)
2nd Row RH (60P)	Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR) for outboard and center occupant
2nd Row Captain Seat LH / RH	Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR)
3rd Row LH / RH	Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR)

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR): The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) allows the driver seat belt to freely extend and retract with occupant movement, yet locks the belt during a sudden stop or upon impact.

Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL): A pretensioner is designed to retract some of the webbing of a seat belt the instant a collision occurs, tightening the seat belt to restrain occupants quickly and reducing the amount they are thrown forward in a moderate or severe frontal crash.

Load limiters help protect occupants from seat belt-inflicted injury. In the event of a crash, the pretensioner restrains the occupant until certain amount of force is applied. At this point the load limiter releases the webbing gradually so as not to exert too much force on the chest of the occupant.

3.4.3 Seat Belt Pretensioner

In the event of a crash being detected, the belt pretensioner locks the seat belt by drawing back the seat belts on the driver’s and passenger’s torso and pelvis to prevent the driver and passenger being thrown forward. The seat belt pretensioner combined with the seat belt and airbag further increases safety.

This vehicle is provided with a anchor pretensioner for driver seat (in the sill board area) and is used to help to protect occupant in the sever crash events.

Its activation through Airbag ECU is signalled by pulling down of the metallic cable and removes slack in seat belt.

To obtain the highest degree of protection from the action of the pretensioning device, wear the seat belt on shoulder keeping it firmly close to the chest and bottom part of the seat belt on pelvis.

In case of side impact collisions, front air bags are not inflated, but seat belt pretensioners located in the same position with impact direction will be deployed together with side air bag. Deployed seat belt pretensioners cannot be deployed again. Have the deployed seat belt pretensioners replaced by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Operation of pretensioner

When a severe frontal impact occurs, seat belt pretensioners pull back the seat belts immediately to restrain the occupants to their seats.

Operation of load limiter

After frontal collision, the load limiter releases the seat belt to prevent the occupant from being injured due to belt force.

Fastening the seat belt

Even if seat belts are not worn, the air bag will deploy in case of impact, collision triggered. In addition, airbags can protect occupants when the occupants are wearing their seat belts. Airbags may cause injuries to occupants if they do not wear or inappropriately use their seat belts.

•

Before driving, all occupants should fasten their seat belts. If not, the occupants can seriously be injured in a collision or sudden manoeuvring of the vehicle.

•

Sometimes you may have to apply strong force to pull the webbing out of the retract.

•

Each seat belt should be used by only one occupant at a time.

•

Seat belts and airbag’s can significantly minimise possible injury to occupants. But they cannot perfectly protect occupants from fatal collisions or injury.

•

Modifications and improper maintenance for the safety systems could cause serious injury. The safety systems including seat belts should be checked and repaired by only a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

•

An infant or small child should always be restrained in an infant or child restraint.

3.4.4 Fastening the Seat Belt

Adjust the seat as needed, sit up straight and well back in the seat. To fasten your seat belt, pull the webbing out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. An audible “click” would be heard when the tab locks into the buckle. Pull up on the shoulder strap to tighten the lap belt across your hips. The seat belt retractor will pull in any slack in the shoulder strap. A slow and easy motion will allow the belt to extend and let you move your body around freely.

Periodically check the seat belt as you ride to be sure it remains snug and in position. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock (restrict) if you try to lean forward too quickly.

If the driver or co-driver seat belt is not fastened when the ignition is switched ON, the seat belt warning lamp illuminates and chimes beat will turn till seat belt fastened. Refer “Warning Lamps” in the “Driver Information Display (DID)” chapter for further details.

3.4.5 Seat Belt Release

To release the belt, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract. If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.

Never insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent from properly latching the tongue and may cause damage to the buckle mechanism, thereby making the seat belt ineffective in an accident, resulting in serious personal injury.

3.4.6 Driver and Passenger Seat Belt Reminder Indication (If Equipped)

The driver, co-driver and front facing rear passenger seat belt reminder warning symbol lamp will blink in DID if driver doesn’t wear the seat belt and will be continuous until belt is buckled.

Chime will be activated when vehicle travels more than 25 km/h of speed while vehicle is in motion which will be ON for 95 second for front seat belt and 35 second for front facing rear seat belt.

3.4.7 Passenger Occupant Detection System (PODS) & Seat Belt Reminder Indication

PODS detects the presence of occupant in the front passenger and front facing rear seating locations.

If Occupant is present on front passenger and front facing rear passenger seats and not wearing the seat belt, Seat belt reminder warning symbol lamp will glow on the center fascia switch provided in vehicle instrument panel and will be continuous until the seat belt is buckled.

It should be noted that the PODS require a minimum weight hence children may not be detected by PODS. Along with this warning symbol, a Chime in DID will be ON for 95 second for front seat belt reminder and 35 second for front facing rear seat belt reminder.

Do keep in mind that after market seat covers also may deteriorate the detection senor performance, don’t use the non recommended/non authorized seat covers.

Seat belt reminder warning lamp for passenger seat may glow in case of child is present in passenger seat.

Strong advice not to carry children in front seat without child restraint seat. Also do not use adult seat belt which is designed to harness person taller than 140 cm Always ensure Passenger Airbag is turn OFF before you carry child on passenger seat. We strongly urge that children should be in middle row using the child seats with the ISO FIX.

Captain Seat (If Equipped)	60:40 Seat (If Equipped)

3.4.8 Seat Belt Height Adjuster

You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor for maximum comfort and safety of both front seats. If the height of the seat belt is too near your neck, you will not be getting the most effective protection.

The shoulder portion of the belt should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest to the door and not your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster to an appropriate position while pressing the height adjuster button. Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into the position.

Adjust the shoulder belt height sitting well back in the seat. Do not adjust the seat belt height while vehicle is in motion.

3.5 Child Restraint System (CRS)

How to use the ISOFIX Lower Latch Anchor/ISOFIX Rods

1. ISOFIX Marking gjkkllool 2. Latch Anchor/ISOFIX Rod

•

The ISOFIX lower latch anchors (rods) are located in rear seats bottom position. Their locations are shown in the illustration.

•

Insert the child restraint attachments into the ISOFIX lower latch anchors (rods) until it clicks. Refer Child seat installation manual.

•

Do not use the seat belt for installing the ISOFIX child restraint.

ISOFIX system is a standardized method of fitting child seats that eliminates the need to use the standard adult Seat belt to secure the seat in the vehicle. This enables a much more secure and positive location with the added benefit of easier and quicker installation.

•

When using the “ISOFIX” lower latch system (rod), all unused vehicle rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be latched securely in their seat belt buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted behind the child restraint to prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of un-retracted seat belts. Unlatched metal latch plates or tabs may allow the child to reach the un-retracted seat belts which may result in strangulation and a serious injury or death to the child in the child restraint

•

Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

How to use the Top Tether/Rear Anchor

Type 1 (If Equipped)	Type 2 (If Equipped)

Type 3 (If Equipped)	Type 4 (If Equipped)

There are top tether rods/rear anchors on the seat base / back side of the second row seats.

1. Remove the headrest from the rear row seat.

2. Place the child restraint on the rear row seat.

3. Connect the tether connector in child restraint to the top tether rod/ rear anchor. Securely tighten the child restraint by adjusting the webbing of the child restraint system (CRS) tether connector. Follow the clear instructions provide in the CRS manual.

•

The top-tether/ rear anchor is the supplemental device to secure the child restraint system after engaging it by the ISOFIX rod/lower latches. Therefore, do not secure the child restraint system only with the seat back anchors. The increased load may cause the hooks or anchors to break, causing serious injury or death.

•

If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle and a child is not properly restrained in the child restraint, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. Always follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installation.

•

Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are Firmly latched to the ISOFIX rod/lower latches. In this case, you can hear the “click” sound/ latch indications provided on seat.

•

Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an unexpected personal injury.

•

Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints.

•

The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct top tether rod/rear anchor provided on seat back.

•

Don’t put the top tether strap over the head restraint of rear row seat which is not the correct methods and may cause risk.

•

Rock the child restraint to check if it is securely installed. Refer to instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.

•

Do not install the child restraint of such size if it hinders the operations of front seat which may cause problem to front occupants.

Table of Information on Child Restraint Systems (CRS) using the Seat Belt

Mass group	Restraint Device Figure	Seating position (Second row 60P-40P / Bench Seat)							Mounting method of vehicle
		Passenger Seat		2nd Row OB		2nd Centre	3rd Row
		Activated front Passenger Airbag	Deactivated front Passenger Airbag	LH	RH	2nd Centre	LH	RH
Group 0 Up to 10 kg	Rear Facing Child Seat	X	U	U	U	U	X	X	3 - Point Seat Belt
Group 0+ Up to 13 kg	Rear Facing Child Seat	X	U	U	U	U	X	X	3 - Point Seat Belt
Group I 9 to 18 kg	Forward Facing Child Seat	U	X	U	U	U	X	X	3 - Point Seat Belt
Group II 15 to 25 kg	Booster Seat	U	X	U	U	U	X	X	3 - Point Seat Belt
Group III 22 to 36 kg	Booster Seat	U	X	U	U	U	X	X	3 - Point Seat Belt

Mass group	Restraint Device Figure	Seating position (Second row Captain seat)							Mounting method of vehicle
		Passenger Seat		2nd Row OB		2nd Centre	3rd Row
		Activated front Passenger Airbag	Deactivated front Passenger Airbag	LH	RH	2nd Centre	LH	RH
Group 0 Up to 10 kg	Rear Facing Child Seat	X	U	U	U	X	X	X	3 - Point Seat Belt
Group 0+ Up to 13 kg	Rear Facing Child Seat	X	U	U	U	X	X	X	3 - Point Seat Belt
Group I 9 to 18 kg	Forward Facing Child Seat	U	X	U	U	X	X	X	3 - Point Seat Belt
Group II 15 to 25 kg	Booster Seat	U	X	U	U	X	X	X	3 - Point Seat Belt
Group III 22 to 36 kg	Booster Seat	U	X	U	U	X	X	X	3 - Point Seat Belt

Key of letters to be used above:

U = Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.

UF = Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.

L = Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These restraints may be of the “specific vehicle”, “restricted” or “semi-universal” categories.

B = Built-in restraint approved for this mass group.

X = Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.

Table of Information on Child Restraint Systems (CRS) using ISOFIX & Top Tether

Mass group	Restraint Device Figure	Seating position						Mounting method of vehicle
		1st Row	2nd Row OB		2nd Centre	3rd Row
		LH	LH	RH	2nd Centre	LH	RH
Group 0 Up to 10 kg	Rear Facing Child Seat	X	IU	IU	X	X	X	ISOFIX & Top Tether
Group 0+ Up to 13 kg	Rear Facing Child Seat	X	IU	IU	X	X	X	ISOFIX & Top Tether
Group I 9 to 18 kg	Forward Facing Child Seat	X	IU/IUF	IU/IUF	X	X	X	ISOFIX & Top Tether
Group II 15 to 25 kg	Booster Seat	X	IUF	IUF	X	X	X	ISOFIX & Top Tether
Group III 22 to 36 kg	Booster Seat	X	IUF	IUF	X	X	X	ISOFIX & Top Tether

Key of letters be inserted in the above table.

IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this mass group.

IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS). These CRS may be are those of the ‘specific vehicle’, ‘restricted’ or ‘semi-universal’ categories.

IU: Suitable for using rearward facing child restraint system with ISOFIX and Top-tether (or) ISOFIX Base with Support leg.

X: Seat position not suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class.

Table of Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various ISOFIX Positions

Table of Vehicle Handbook Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various ISOFIX Positions

Mass Group	Size Class	Fixture	Vehicle ISOFIX Positions
Mass Group	Size Class	Fixture	Front Passenger	Rear Outboard	Rear Center
Carrycot	F	ISO/L1	X	X	X
Carrycot	G	ISO/L2	X	X	X
Group 0: up to 10 kg	E	ISO/R1	X	IL	X
Group 0+: up to 13 kg	E	ISO/R1	X	IL	X
	D	ISO/R2	X	IL	X
	C	ISO/R3	X	IL	X
Group I (9 to 18 kg)	D	ISO/R2	X	IL	X
	C	ISO/R3	X	IL	X
	B	ISO/F2	X	IUF/IL	X
	B1	ISO/F2X	X	IUF/IL	X
	A	ISO/F3	X	IUF/IL	X
Group II (15 to 25 kg)			X	IL	X
Group III (22 to 36 kg)			X	IL	X

Key of letters be inserted in the above table.

IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this mass group.

IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS). These CRS may be are those of the ‘specific vehicle’, ‘restricted’ or ‘semi-universal’ categories.

IU: Suitable for using rearward facing child restraint system with ISOFIX and Top-tether (or) ISOFIX Base with Support leg.

X: Seat position not suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class.

A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 720 mm).

B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 650 mm).

B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface Shape Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 650 mm).

C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System.

D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System.

E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing Child Restraint System.

F -ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot).

G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot).

Use the manufacturer recommended Child Restraint System (CRS) and locations to fit in vehicle. Please read the installation instructions provided in manual carefully before use.

Table of Vehicle Handbook information i-Size Child Restraint Systems for installation in various Seating Positions

Restraint device figure	Front Passenger (With ON/OFF Switch)		Second row out board	Second row Center	Third row
	With PAB ON	With PAB OFF
i-Size Child Restraint System	X	X	i-U	X	X

i-U: Suitable for i-Size “universal” Child Restraint System forward and rearward facing.

i-UF: Suitable for forward-facing i-Size “universal” Child Restraint System only.

X: Seating position not suitable for i-Size “universal” Child Restraint systems.

Recommended Child Seat to Use in Vehicle:

Mahindra & Mahindra recommends Britax DUALFIX PRO M i-Size child seats for up to 18 Kg children. These seats are available at Mahindra dealerships.
Mass Group	CRS Manufacturer	Model	Type	Installation in Vehicle	Attachment Method
Group 0 : up to 10 kg (0 to 9 months)	Britax Römer	DUALFIX PRO M	i-Size	Rearward facing	ISOFIX base frame with support leg
Group 0+ : up to 13 kg (0 to 2 years)	Britax Römer	DUALFIX PRO M	i-Size	Rearward facing	ISOFIX base frame with support leg
Group I : 9 to 18 kg (9 months to 4 years)	Britax Römer	DUALFIX PRO M	i-Size	Rearward facing	ISOFIX base frame with support leg

Anchorage Location : Child restraint anchor fittings are installed at the points as shown in the figure.

Type 1 (If Equipped)	Type 2 (If Equipped)

Type 3 (If Equipped)	Type 4 (If Equipped)

Top Tether /rear anchor location:
60:40 seat	Type 1: 2nd row outboard seat (RH & LH) at seat base
	Type-2: 2nd row outboard seat (RH & LH) at seat back
Captain seat	Type-3: 2nd row outboard seat (RH & LH) at seat base
	Type-4: 2nd row outboard seat (RH & LH) at seat back

Unrestrained infants and small children could be injured.

Never transport them unless they are properly restrained.

Use restrained system which meet safety standard.

Follow directions provided by the manufacturer.

Warning for Child Restraint

•

Use only the approved Child Restraint System (CRS) for better safety of your child.

•

Mahindra is not responsible for the personal injury and property damage due to the defect of child restraint system.

•

Use the proper type of child restraint system suitable for the weight and size for your baby.

•

Use the child restraint system at recommended seating location only and follow the instructions.

•

Child restraint has 5 categories based on the weight as below:

1	GROUP 0 : 0 ~ 10 kg	4	GROUP II : 15 ~ 25 kg
2	GROUP 0+ : 0 ~ 13 kg	5	GROUP III : 22 ~ 36 kg
3	GROUP I : 9 ~ 18 kg

•

Group 0 & 0+ : Rear-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat (use of ISOFIX with Base & Support Leg is recommended).

•

Group I: Forward-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat (use of ISOFIX & Top Tether is recommended).

•

Group II & III: Booster seat fitted on the rear seat with seat belt fastened. Always follow the installation procedure and use instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.

Cautions for ISOFIX Seat usage

•

The anchor provided on rear seat base back is the supplemental device to secure the child restraint system after engaging it by the lower latches. Therefore, do not secure the child restraint system only with the seat back anchors. The increased load may cause the hooks or anchors to break, causing serious injury or death.

•

Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are latched to the lower latches. In this case, you can hear the “click” sound and color indications.

•

The child restraint seat strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct seat back anchor provided on the rear seat base back side behind the seat carpet. Follow the instructions provided on the seat back for the details of anchor location.

•

Make sure that the child restraint system is firmly secured by rocking it in different directions.

•

Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an unexpected personal injury.

3.6 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) includes airbags, pre-tensioners and ECU. The airbags are designed to provide further protection to the vehicle occupants in addition to the primary protection provided by the seat belts and seat belt pre-tensioners.

The primary components of the system are the sensors which measure the crash severity. In the event of a significant frontal impact, the SRS airbags inflate to work in conjunction with the seat belts and help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s head/chest.

Seat belts are the primary restraint system in the vehicle. An airbag provides supplemental protection in addition to the seat belts.

All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts irrespective of presence of airbag to minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash.

Airbags are more effective in reducing injuries when the seat belts are worn.

Airbags

Your vehicle has the following airbags:

A: Knee Airbag for the driver (If Equipped)

B:Driver Airbag

C: Front Passenger Airbag

D: Two Side (seat) Impact Airbags (If Equipped)

E: Two Curtain Airbags (If Equipped)

3.6.1 Driver and Front Passenger Airbag

Your vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (Airbag) and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and front passenger seating positions. The indications of the system’s presence are the letters “SRS AIRBAG” embossed on the airbag pad cover in the steering wheel and the passenger’s side front panel pad above the glove box.

The SRS is designed to deploy the front airbag only when an impact is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less than ± 30° from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle.

Driver Airbag

Front Passenger Airbag

Front airbag are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear impact or rollover crashes. In addition, front airbag will not deploy in frontal crashes which are below the prescribed deployment threshold where risk of serious injuries is low.

Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the airbag and yourself. It cause injuries.

Usage of any protection film on the steering wheel, will affect the deployment of the driver airbag.

3.6.2 Knee Airbag (If Equipped)

The driver’s knee airbag is located on the dashboard under the steering wheel.

If the driver’s posture is improper while driving, the knee air bag might not protect the driver’s knee area when the airbag deployed.

3.6.3 Side Impact Airbag

Your vehicle is equipped with side impact airbag in both the front seats. The purpose of the airbag is to provide the vehicle’s driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection during side impacts or collisions.

The side impact airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. To minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash, every passenger must always wear their seat belt (see the chapter on Seat Belts in this manual). The airbags inflate very quickly with great force. Do not position any part of your body too close to airbag, you or especially children could be seriously injured/killed by a deploying airbag.

•

In the case of a side collision, the curtain airbag may be deployed together with the relevant side airbag on the side the collision occurs.

•

The side impact airbag is supplementary to the seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore, your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion. The airbags deploy only in certain side impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants.

•

For best protection from the side impact airbag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side impact airbag, all seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver’s hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The passengers arms and hands should be placed on their laps.

•

Do not use any accessory seat covers. Use of seat covers could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system.

•

Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side impact airbag.

•

Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the air bag and yourself.

•

Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the door and the seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplementary side impact airbag inflates.

Do not cover the front seats with anything. It hinders the air bag inflation.

An airbag is not designed to deploy in every type of crash. Depending on the type of accident or impact, the front airbags independently deploy thereby protecting the occupants. It is not necessary that ALL the airbags deploy during an accident.

3.6.4 Side Curtain Airbag

The side curtain air bags are contained between right above the front and rear doors and the end of the vehicle roof.

The Side Curtain air bags are located along sides of the roof rails on the A & B pillars. They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions. The curtain airbag are designed to deploy depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations, collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations.

•

In the case of a side collision, the side airbag may be deployed together with the relevant curtain airbag on the side the collision occurs.

•

In order for side and curtain airbag to provide the best protection, both front seat occupants and outboard rear occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belts properly fastened. Importantly, children should sit in a proper child restraint system in the rear seat.

•

When children are seated in the rear outboard seats, they must be seated in the proper child restraint system. Make sure to position the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible, and secure the child restraint system in a locked position.

•

Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors or place objects between the doors and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side and/or curtain airbag.

3.6.5 Passenger Airbag Activation/Deactivation

The passenger airbag activation and deactivation feature is accessible via the Center Information Display (CID) settings.

Navigate to CID Settings → Driver Display → Passenger Airbag, tap on the toggle button and confirm to activate and deactivate (not inflatable) the front passenger airbag.

If your select Airbag ON/OFF the following indicator will appear.

Passenger Airbag OFF Indicator

This Warning indicator glows on center fascia switch on IP when passenger airbag “OFF” position.

Passenger Airbag ON Indicator

This Warning indicator symbol glows on center fascia switch on IP when selecting the passenger airbag “ON” option to enable the passenger airbag.

3.6.6 Airbag System Malfunction Lamp

Airbags do not require any regular maintenance or service. The airbag system malfunction lamp illuminates when the ignition is ON, and it turns OFF after about two second as self check confirming normal operations of airbag system and malfunction lamp.

This lamp monitors airbag sensor assembly, airbag sensors, indicator lamp, seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources.

If either of the following conditions occur, there is a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pre-tensioner. Immediately contact your Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

•

The lamp does not glow when the ignition is switched ON or glows beyond six (6) second after switching the ignition ON.

•

The lamp comes ON at any other time, even briefly.

•

The lamp comes ON intermittently.

Never make any modifications to your vehicle which could affect the performance of airbag system. In particular, changes to the vehicle frame, bumpers, bull bar, front fenders, ride height, suspension, seat belts, interior trim, seats or steering wheel (especially covers, pads or other trim), could prevent proper deployment of the airbag. If you need to make any modifications to accommodate any disability you may have, please contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Never try to open or strike the airbag cover. If the airbag cover is cracked or damaged in any way, the airbag may not function as intended. Take the vehicle to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Even if the airbags do not deploy during an accident, take your vehicle to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for a thorough inspection of the airbag and seat belt systems, no matter how minor the accident. The airbag system could have been damaged, and may not work as intended in the future, resulting in serious injury.

3.6.7 Airbag Inflation/Deployment

The airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond the designed threshold level, the system triggers the airbag inflators. This initiates a chemical reaction which quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas.

Upon deployment, tear seams moulded directly into the pad covers separate under pressure from the expansion of the airbags. Further opening of the covers allows full inflation of the airbags. A fully inflated airbag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver’s or the passenger’s forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the airbag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to manoeuvre or operate other controls.

Deployment of the airbags happen in a millisecond, producing a loud noise releasing a ‘white smoke’ and residue along with a non-toxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue with soap and water as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation. Exit the vehicle as soon as possible after the accident.

Airbag deployment may cause windshield to break.

•

Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area or wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent them from activating correctly, cause sudden operation of the system or disable the system, which could result in serious injury.

•

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after deployment. The airbags inflate only once.

•

Do not cover the steering wheel, instrument panel, seats with any object (e.g. dash panel covers, seat covers) which may prevent the airbags from inflating properly.

•

The airbags inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force of a deploying airbag can also cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant’s hands, arms, chest or head is in close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment. Sit straight and well back into the seat. Move your seat as far back as practical to allow room for airbag inflation, while still allowing you to properly operate/drive the vehicle.

The front passenger should never sit on the edge of the seat, stand near the glove compartment, rest feet or other parts of the body on the dashboard when the vehicle is moving.

The driver or front passenger who is too close to the steering wheel or dashboard can be seriously injured during airbag deployment.

•

The driver must sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

•

The front passenger must sit as far back as possible from the dashboard.

•

Sitting improperly or out of position can cause occupants to be shifted too close to a deploying airbag, strike the interior structure or be thrown from the vehicle resulting in serious injury.

•

Always sit upright with the seat back in an upright position, on the seat cushion centre with your seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and your feet on the floor.

•

All vehicle occupants must be properly restrained using the seat belts.

•

All infants and children must be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle in a child restraint seat and be properly restrained by seat belts.

•

Front airbags can injure occupants who are improperly positioned in the front seats.

•

Even with airbags, improperly belted and un-belted occupants can be severely injured when the airbag inflates. Always follow the precautions about seat belts, airbags and occupant safety contained in this manual.

•

Do not modify the front seats. Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system or side impact airbags.

•

Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring harnesses.

3.6.8 Child Restraint and Airbag

Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it.

In addition, do not place front-facing child restraints in the front passenger’s seat either. If the front passenger airbag inflates, it could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.

This is indicated also on stickers that are located at the following position. On the front passenger’s sun visor.

Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it!

Never put a child restraint in the front passenger’s seat. If the front passenger airbag inflates, it can cause serious or fatal injuries.

Never hold an infant or child on your lap. The infant or child could be seriously injured in the event of a crash. All infants and children should be properly restrained in appropriate child safety seats or seat belts in the rear seat.

Instal the child restraint system on the rear outboard seats, and securely lock the child restraint system in position with the help of ISOFIX.

Always Buckle Children (ABC) in the back seat. It is the safest place for children of any age to ride.

3.6.9 Airbag Deployment

Front Airbag

Front airbag are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front collision.

The images shown in this section are for illustrative purpose only. They may not look like your model/variant or vehicle.

Usage of any protection film on the steering wheel, will affect the deployment of the driver airbag.

3.6.10 Airbag Non-deployment

Impacts below a pre-determined threshold level may not cause the airbag to deploy in the following cases:

Collision with Utility Poles or Trees:

Airbags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated to one area and the full force of the impact is not delivered to the sensors.

Frontal Impact:

Frontal impact beyond 30° range from head-on to the vehicle.

Frontal Side Swipe Impact:

Frontal offset impact to the vehicle may not provide the deceleration force necessary for airbag deployment.

In an angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the airbags would not be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any airbags.

Under-ride Situations:

Running under a truck's tailgate may not provide the decelerations necessary for airbag deployment.

Airbags will not inflate in this “under-ride” situation where deceleration forces that are detected by sensors are significantly low.

Rear-end Collisions:

Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, where occupants are moved backward away from the airbags by the force of the impact. In this case, inflated airbags would not be able to provide any additional benefit.

Potholes or Stepped Surfaces:

Driving into a big pothole, stepped surface or hitting the far side of a hole/incline will not inflate the airbag.

Other collision scenarios where airbags may not deploy:

Impact with Animal (Cow, Horse, Deer, etc.)

Rollover:

Airbags will not inflate in rollover accidents where airbag deployment would not provide protection to the occupants. However, side impact and curtain airbags may inflate only when severe side impact causes rollover.

Side airbags and side curtain airbags may inflate in a strong impact.

Side airbags and side curtain airbags may inflate even in a frontal collision, if there is a strong impact to the lateral direction.

A frontal collision occurs when the front ends of two vehicles collide.

When a vehicle hits a curb or bump.

When a vehicle experiences a hard landing or fall.

Side airbags and side curtain airbags may not inflate

In the event of a side impact to the vehicle body, excluding the passenger compartment, several areas of the vehicle are typically affected.

When a vehicle is impacted from the side at an oblique angle.

When a vehicle is impacted from the side by a high-hood vehicle.

When a vehicle is impacted from the side by a motorcycle or bicycle.

3.6.11 Airbag Service

Airbag Replacement: Self-servicing or tampering with the airbag system is dangerous. An airbag could accidentally deploy causing serious injuries, or will not deploy when there is a need. Always take your vehicle to an Authorized Mahindra Service Centre for inspection and repairs.

Removing SRS Related Parts: We do not recommend removing the instrument panel, steering wheel, seats or airbag related parts or sensors by any individual or garages which are not recommended. Airbags could accidentally activate and cause serious injuries, or they may not deploy when there is a need. Visit a Authorized Mahindra Service Center if these parts must be removed.

Airbag Disposal: Improper disposal of an airbag or a vehicle with live airbags can be extremely dangerous. Approach a Authorized Mahindra Service Center to do these jobs.

Airbag Repair: If the front airbag cover or instrument panel airbag cover shows signs of damage or having been removed, the vehicle should be towed to the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center for repair. Do not attempt to self repair or reinstall the cover.

Airbag Maintenance: For cleaning the airbag covers/areas, use only a soft dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the airbag covers and proper deployment of the system.

In case the customer either tries to self-service the airbag systems or tamper with the air bag systems. Mahindra, including its directors, officers or key managerial personal, do not carry any liability arising due to such actions of the customers.

4 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)

4.1 DID Overview

Driver Information Display (DID) theme changes according to the selected drive mode.

4.1.1 Speedometer

The speedometer indicates actual vehicle speed in km/h.

Its display unit can be changed through Center information display (CID) settings.

Refer CID section for more details.

The vehicle speedometer is affected by size of the tyres used.
If customer uses non-genuine/ modified parts, they will not be covered under vehicles warranty and Manufacturer will not be liable for any damages arising out of use of such non-genuine/ modified parts.
If the size of the tyres are changed from those fitted at the factory, the speedometer might not display the correct speed and distance travelled.

4.1.2 Tachometer

The tachometer indicates engine speed in thousands of r/min (revolutions per minute). Each division is 1 000 r/min. Operating the engine at very high r/min may lead to excessive engine wear and low fuel economy. Maintain steady engine speed below 2 500 r/min and do not accelerate or decelerate abruptly.

Do not over-accelerate the engine during idling, this can cause severe engine damage and would be treated as abuse of the engine which is not covered by warranty.

Tacho red band range:

Gasoline 5 500 - 7 000 r/min

Diesel 5 000 - 7 000 r/min

4.1.3 Fuel Level Gauge

The fuel level gauge functions only when the ignition is switched ON. It gives the status of the fuel level in the fuel tank. F indicates the tank is full (57 +/- 2 liter), E indicates the tank is empty.

When the fuel level reaches the reserve, the last bar will be displayed and low fuel telltale will be ON (approx 12 liter). when the fuel tank is completely empty, last bar goes off from display and low fuel telltale will be blinking. The amount of fuel required to fill the tank up may be less than the specified tank capacity, as a small amount of reserve fuel always remains in the tank.

On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the fuel level may fluctuate or the last bar may flash earlier than usual. Always check the fuel level when the vehicle is on level road. If the last bar is still off and telltale is blinking even after filling sufficient fuel, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center as soon as possible.

When all the bars in the display starts blinking/flashing, contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center at the earliest.

It is highly recommended to start the fueling at ignition OFF condition and turn on the ignition only when fueling is finished to get correct fuel level.

IGN ON fuel filling may lead to inconsistency and can cause for DTE fluctuation.

4.1.4 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

The engine coolant temperature gauge functions only when the ignition is switched ON. It indicates the instantaneous engine coolant temperature. The coolant temperature varies with changes in weather, load on engine and driving pattern.

If the gauge moves beyond the normal operating range toward “H” mark. it indicates the engine overheating that may damage the engine. Allow engine to cool. In such situations switch OFF the AC and observe any improvements in the temperature gauge. If not, stop the vehicle and allow the engine to cool down. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir and top-up if required. If the engine is still overheating, contact your nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Never remove the Degassing tank cap when the engine is hot. The engine coolant is under pressure and could splash on to skin / eyes causing severe burns. Wait for the engine to cool down before adding coolant to the reservoir.

Do not continue driving the vehicle with an overheated engine. This will lead to damage of engine components and engine seizure.

4.1.5 Odometer

The odometer records and displays the total distance travelled in km. Odometer cannot be reset.

4.1.6 Outside Ambient Temperature

The outside ambient temperature will be displayed in top right corner of DID.

Its display unit can be changed through Center information display (CID) settings.

Refer CID section for more details.

4.1.7 Gear Information

Gear information shows the actual gear the vehicle is currently in.

Based on the various parameters, it will also provide an up shift / down shift recommendation for better fuel economy.

Incase of a fault or failure, the owner should take the vehicle to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

For reference of different gear position Refer “Starting and Driving” chapter.

4.1.8 Clock

The time on the clock is in sync with the Center Information Display (CID). Any change in Center Information Display (CID) will reflect on the DID.

Refer settings for changing clock timing under CID Setting chapter.

4.1.9 Drive Mode

Drive modes shall change driving characteristics by changing elements such as Engine power, Traction control, Climate control and Steering performance.

The vehicle has selectable drive modes like Zip, Zap, Zoom and Custom which have their own distinct pre-set configurations. The selection of drive mode is made via dedicated button or switches.

Refer Drive modes in the “Starting and Driving” chapter for further details.

4.2 DID Control Switches

The right side steering wheel switches are used to control the DID menus.

Type 1 (If Equipped)	Type 2 (If Equipped)

A: MENU Press MENU to toggle among cluster menus. B: UP Press UP to navigate up within the selected menu.	C: DOWN Press DOWN to navigate down within the selected menu. D: OK Press OK to select a option.

4.3 DID Screen Flow

DID Screen layouts can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel.

Use Enter button to select the required screen layout. DID will change into the selected layout.

4.3.1 Drive Info

Drive info can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering Wheel.

Use OK button to enter Drive info page.

4.3.2 Trip Meter

Current trip screen along with Two trip meters (A , B) are available with max range of 9999.9 km. These are available in drive info menu and can be accessed using UP/DOWN switch.

Trip meter can be reset by long press of OK. Resetting trip will reset distance and drive time associated with the particular trip. Current trip cannot be reset.

It is recommended to reset the trip meters when battery is disconnected and reconnected.

4.3.3 Drive Time

Drive Duration is the elapsed time from the start of this trip cycle.

Drive time is part of trip page. Drive time will reset along with trip reset.

4.3.4 Distance to Empty (DTE)

Distance to Empty is the approximate distance that can be covered with the available fuel.

4.3.5 Average Fuel Efficiency (AFE)

AFE is calculated based on the last AFE reset cycle.

AFE can be reset by long press of OK button in Steering wheel.

Additional options to change AFE reset to every ignition ON or after every fuel refill are present in the settings menu.

4.3.6 Instantaneous Fuel Economy (IFE)

Instantaneous Fuel Economy is calculated based on your current driving pattern. Higher value on display means vehicle is consuming less fuel, lower value on display implies it is consuming more fuel.

4.3.7 REGEN (If Applicable)

This page will appear only when vehicle is capable of Park regeneration (DPF telltale ON or Blinking) along with REGEN telltale.

Refer fuel emission control section for more details on Park regeneration.

4.4 Vehicle Info

Vehicle info can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel.

It displays data related to vehicle information like TPMS, Roll & Pitch and AWD Torque distribution.

Use OK button to enter Vehicle info page.

4.4.1 Tyre Pressure (If Equipped)

Tyre Pressure is an electronic system designed to monitor the air pressure inside pneumatic tyres.

This system will alert the driver if the tyre pressure falls below the low pressure or raises above high pressure warning limit for any reason. Including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tyre. The Tiretronics will continue to alert the driver and will not turn off untill the tyre pressure is inflated to the recommended pressure.

Refer Tiretronics chapter for more details.

4.4.2 Roll and Pitch (If Equipped)

This screen referring to seems to be displaying the Roll and Pitch angles of a vehicle. These angles are crucial for understanding the vehicle's orientation and movement dynamics.

4.4.3 AWD Torque Distribution (If Equipped)

This screen indicate the current AWD torque flow while driving.

4.4.4 DEF Level (If Applicable)

DID will display the amount of DEF present in the DEF tank.

4.5 Drive Assist (ADAS) (If Equipped)

Drive Assistance can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel switches.

Use OK button to enter Drive Assist page.

Drive assistance provides an ADAS oriented informative screen with real-time vehicle navigation.

4.6 Navigation

Navigation can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank. It displays data related to map view which is displayed in DID. Use OK button to enter Navigation page.

Full Screen Navigation

DID will display the full screen Navigation with input from Center information display (CID).

4.7 General Alerts

Display	Operating Conditions
	This alert is displayed when any doors are open and show the door identified as open.
	This alert is displayed when the check engine warning telltale is ON and engine is running.

Display	Operating Conditions
	This alert is displayed when engine temperature high telltale is ON and engine is running.
	This alert is displayed when an ABS related malfunction is detected.
	This alert is displayed when low brake fluid is detected and engine is running.
	This alert is displayed when the park lamp is ON and the ignition is turned OFF.
	This alert is displayed when low fuel warning telltale is ON or blinking and engine is running.
	This alert is displayed when the engine oil pressure warning telltale is ON and engine is running.
	This alert is displayed when either of driver or passenger (if occupied) seatbelt is unbuckled.
	This alert is displayed when water is detected in fuel filter and engine is running. It is applicable for the diesel variant only.
	This alert is displayed when passenger airbag is turned OFF.
	This alert is displayed when brake EBD related malfunction is detected.
	This alert is displayed when the ESP malfunction is detected and engine is running.
	This alert is displayed when EPS related malfunction is detected.
	This alert is displayed when Skyroof is left open at ignition off.
	The alert is displayed when ignition is off, driver door is open and the driver has forgotten their phone in the wireless charging tray.
	This alert is displayed when AWD system related malfunction is detected.
	This alert is displayed when Zip drive mode is activated.
	This alert is displayed when Zap drive mode is activated.
	This alert is displayed when Zoom drive mode is activated.
	This alert is displayed when Custom drive mode is activated.
	DID shall monitor some of the internal parameters and if any malfunction is detected it will display the “Contact Dealer” alert. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately when this alert is displayed in the DID.
	The alert is displayed when the driver becomes very drowsy and is not able to stay awake. The alert indicates the driver to take an immediate break.
	This alert is displayed when malfunction in Attention Assist system is detected.
	This alert is displayed when any front brake pad is detected as worn out and needs to be replaced.
	This alert is displayed when the Hill Descent Control function is not available because of a malfunction in the system.
	This alert is displayed when the Hill Hold Control function is not available because of a malfunction in the system.
	This alert is displayed when the vehicle is driven above 120 km/h.
	This alert is displayed when you try to move the vehicle and the park brake is still engaged.
	This alert is displayed 500 km before the scheduled service limit. To reset service remainder, please refer Maintenance chapter.
	This alert is displayed when a coin or metallic object is placed on the wireless charging tray and the phone is kept on the object leading to poor charging of phone. This will also be displayed if the phone is detected in a incorrect position on the charging tray. Adjust the phone to allow it to charge optimally.
	This alert is displayed when a NFC enabled card is placed on the wireless charging tray & a phone is placed on top of. Kindly remove the card to protect the card.
	This alert is displayed when the Skyroof is open and vehicle speed in high.
	Rain Sensor/Non Rain Sensor Variant: This alert will displayed when low wipe is ON for more than 10 second or high wipe is ON for more than 5 seconds in both RLS & Non RLS variants to close sunroof or power windows.

4.8 Partial Alerts

Display	Operating Conditions
	This message comes when auto light is turned OFF.
	This message comes when auto light is turned ON.
	This message comes when auto wiper is turned OFF.
	This message comes when auto wiper is turned ON.
	This message comes when cruise mode is turned ON.
	This message comes when cruise mode is turned OFF.
	This message comes when brake pedal is pressed when in cruise mode or if trying to activate cruise control when vehicle speed is below the cruise threshold.
	This message comes when cruise mode is ON and accelerator pedal is pressed to overtake.
	This message comes on when HDC function is enabled by pressing the HDC switch and the conditions for HDC are met. The brakes will then maintain the vehicle speed while dESPending the Hill.
	This message comes on when the Hill Descent Control is disabled manually by pressing the HDC Switch.
	This message comes on when the Hill Descent Control is enabled manually by pressing the HDC switch and is ready to control, but the conditions for HDC are not met yet.

4.9 PKE Alerts

Display	Conditions
	Key Inside the Vehicle alert notifies the driver that the key has been left inside the car.
	Key Not in Vehicle alert notifies the driver that the key is not detected inside the vehicle.
	Engine Start/Stop Switch Malfunction indicates a problem with the vehicle's Engine start/stop button, which may prevent the vehicle from starting or stopping as intended.
	Key Battery Low alert notifies the driver that the battery in the key is running low and may need to be replaced soon to ensure proper functionality.
	Press brake while pressing Start/Stop switch to start instructs the driver to press the brake pedal while also pressing the Start/Stop button to start the vehicle.

4.10 Steering Lock Alerts

Display	Conditions
	‘Turn Steering Wheel While Pressing Start/Stop Switch’ alert appears when the vehicle’s steering lock mechanism is engaged and needs to be disengaged before starting the vehicle.
	‘Steering Wheel Not Locked’ alert indicates that the vehicle’s steering wheel is not properly locked in place when the when the vehicle is turned off.
	If there is any malfunction in steering wheel locking mechanism this alert will be triggered.
	A warning will be displayed in the DID. If the steering wheel does not pair with PKE ECU. In this case, please contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center to check system.

4.11 Tyre Direction Monitoring System (TDMS)

Tyre direction monitoring system or TDMS assists you when vehicle has just started and you are about to move the vehicle. It tells you about the current direction in which tyres are aligned at very beginning of manoeuvring the vehicle. TDMS works only when vehicle speed is zero and parking brake engaged or when vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in neutral and clutch is not engaged.

<Level 5>

<Level 3>

<Level 0>

Operating Conditions

Tyre alignment is displayed in 6 levels (level 0 to level 5) depending on the alignment degree when the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position from “OFF” position.

Working conditions:

1. When vehicle speed is zero and parking brake engaged.

2. When vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in neutral and clutch is not engaged.

4.12 Driver Information Display telltale Overview

Few Tell Tales grouped in to same slot and this will be cyclic based on tell tale status.

Warning Lamp/Telltale	Lamp Pre-check	Lamp Status while Engine running	Action/Remarks
Left Turn Indicator	No	Slow or Fast Blinking	Indicates left turn lamp is blinking. Slow Blinking: Normal operation. Fast Blinking: One / more left turn lamp bulb has fused. Have the bulb replaced.
Right Turn Indicator	No	Slow or Fast Blinking	Indicates right turn lamp is blinking. Slow Blinking: Normal operation. Fast Blinking: One /more right turn lamp bulb has fused. Have the bulb replaced.
Park Lamp	No	Continuously ON	Indicates Parking Lamp is ON.
Front Fog Lamp Indicator*	No	Continuously Lamp ON	Indicates front fog lamp is ON.
Head Lamp High Beam	No	Continuously ON	Indicates Head lamp high beam is ON.
High Beam Boost*	No	Continuously ON	Indicates Auto headlamp booster is Active state when the vehicle speed crosses 80 km/h with high beam ON.
Door Ajar Warning telltale	No	Continuously ON	Indicates any doors, boot or hood are open
Immobiliser	No	Blinking	Slow Blinking: Vehicle is armed with the remote. Fast Blinking/Continuously ON: Indicates a system malfunction. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Airbag Warning Lamp	Yes	Continuously ON	Indicates malfunction of the airbag system. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Seat Belt Warning	No	Continuously ON	If telltale is not turning OFF even after fastening the seat belt, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.
Tiretronics*	Yes	Continuously ON or Blinking	Indicates low/high tyre pressure or possible malfunction in Tiretronics. Refer to Tiretronics section in Driver Information Display Wheels and Tyres chapter for further details.
Battery Charging System Warning telltale	No	Continuously ON	Indicates malfunction in charging system. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance
High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning telltale	No	Continuously ON or Blinking	Engine temperature very high. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately
Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning telltale	No	Continuously ON	Telltale will be ON in ignition ON But engine is OFF. In engine ON condition, it indicates engine oil pressure is low. Check oil level and top-up or contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance
Engine Start/Stop telltale	No	Continuously ON or Blinking	CONTINUOUSLY ON: Engine is in auto stop mode Blinking: Stop/Start is about to stop the engine FAST BLINKING: Stop/Start is inhibited due to unhealthy battery conditions
EPS Warning	After Pre-check Continuously ON till Engine Starts	Continuously ON	Indicates malfunction on Electronic Power steering system. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
ABS Warning	Yes	Continuously ON	Indicates malfunction of the ABS system. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
HHC Malfunction	No	Continuously ON	Indicates malfunction of Hill Hold Control. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
HDC Malfunction	No	Continuously ON	Indicates malfunction of Hill Descent Control. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
ESP OFF	Yes	Continuously ON	Indicates ESP OFF.
ESP Malfunction	Yes	Continuously ON or Blinking	Blinking: Indicates ESP has taken control of the vehicle stability. Continuously ON: Indicates a malfunction in the ESP system. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
EPB Malfunction*	Yes	Continuously ON	Indicates malfunction of Electric Parking Brake. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
EPB *	Yes	Continuously ON	Indicates EPB is engaged.
Park Brake / EBD / Low Brake Fluid Telltale / Front brake pad worn out*	Yes	Continuously ON	Either one of the below conditions: 1. Park Brake might be engaged. 2. Brake fluid level might be low. 3. There is a malfunction in brake EBD. Please contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Auto Vehicle Hold* (White)	No	Continuously ON	Indicates Auto Vehicle Hold in standby Mode.
Auto Vehicle Hold* (Green)	No	Continuously ON	Indicates Auto Vehicle Hold Active Mode.
Auto Vehicle Hold* (Amber)	No	Continuously ON	Indicates malfunction of Auto Vehicle Hold. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Auto Vehicle Hold* (Red)	No	Continuously ON	Indicates not Working/Fail State of Auto Vehicle Hold. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
AT Warning Lamp*	YES	Continuously ON or Blink	Telltale is used to indicate an AT fault. Telltale Continuous ON means AT Fault. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately if the MIL Lamp doesn’t turn off after an ignition reset. Blinking Telltale implies overheating of clutch due to abuse conditions. This is only to warn the customer and to prevent a clutch damage. Telltale will turn off once the clutch temperature becomes normal.
Low Fuel Warning telltale	No	Continuously ON/Blinking	Indicates fuel level has reached the reserve level. Refuel immediately
OBD telltale*	Yes	Continuously ON or Blinking	Telltale will be ON till engine starts. After engine starts, if is still ON there is a potential malfunction related to emission system, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately
Check Engine telltale	Yes	Continuously ON or Blinking	Indicates a potential malfunction in the EMS, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately
DPF Choke Indicator*	Yes	Continuously ON	If the DPF indicator is ON in the engine running condition then DPF regeneration has not happened. Follow the instructions mentioned in the “EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM”.
DEF Low / Malfunction Indicator*	Yes	Continuously ON	It indicates that either DEF Level is low or incorrect DEF has been filled or DEF Dosing is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions mentioned in the “EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM”.
Water-in-Fuel Warning telltale*	No	Continuously ON	Indicates water-in-fuel. Drain the water from filter or contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance
Glow Plug telltale*	No.	Continuously ON	Indicates glow plugs are active.
REGEN Indicator*	NO	ON/Blink	ON: Regeneration is required Blink: Regeneration is in progress.
AWD Malfunction*	No	Continuously ON	Indicates that there is a malfunction.
Cruise Control Indicator*	Yes	Continuously ON	Indicates vehicle is in Cruise mode.
Adaptive Cruise Control* (White)	No	Continuously ON	Indicates Adaptive cruise control system is in standby state.
Adaptive Cruise Control* (Green)	No	Continuously ON	Indicates Adaptive cruise control system is Active state.
Adaptive Cruise Control* (Amber)	No	Continuously ON	Indicates Adaptive cruise control system temporarily not available due to temporary abnormal condition. Check if radar is blocked and clean.
Adaptive Cruise Control* (Red)	No	Continuously ON	Indicates malfunction of Adaptive cruise control system. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Automatic Emergency Braking System Malfunction*	No	Continuously ON	Indicates temporary or permanent fault in Automatic Emergency braking system. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Automatic Emergency Braking System OFF*	No	Continuously ON	Indicates AEB system is turned off by user.
Lane Keep Assist System (LKAS) OFF*	No	Continuously ON	Indicates LKAS system is turned off by user.
Lane Keep Assist (LKA) System (White)*	No	Continuously ON	Indicates LKA system is in Standby state.
Lane Keep Assist (LKA) System (Green)*	No	Continuously ON or Blinking	Indicates LKA system is Active state Blinking: LKA system providing Warning to the user.
Lane Keep Assist (LKA) System (Amber)*	No	Continuously ON or Blinking	LKAS System fail/Malfunction. This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with LKAS system. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately. Blinking: Camera not calibrated properly.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) System (White)*	No	Continuously ON	Indicates LDW system is in Standby state.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) System (Green)*	No	Continuously ON or Blinking	Indicates LDW system is Active state. Blinking: LDW system providing Warning to the user.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) System (Amber)*	No	Continuously ON or Blinking	LDW system fail/Malfunction. This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with LDWS system. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately. Blinking: Camera not calibrated properly.
Smart Pilot Assist* (White)	No	Continuously ON	Indicates Smart Pilot Assist is in Standby state.
Smart Pilot Assist* (Green)	No	Continuously ON or Blinking	Indicates Smart Pilot Assist is Active state.
Smart Pilot Assist* (Amber)	No	Continuously ON	Smart Pilot Assist system fail/Malfunction. This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with SPA system. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Lane Centering Function (Green)*	No	Continuously ON	Lane Centering Function (Green) system is Active mode.
Lane Centering Function (White)*	No	Continuously ON	Lane Centering Function (White) system is in standby mode.
Lane Centering Function (Amber)*	No	Continuously ON	Lane Centering Function (Amber) system is Not Working/Fail state.
Steering Assist Indicator	No	Continuously ON	Steering Assist Indicator is indicates provided system is active. It will be display in DID.
Speed Limit Assist - Speed Up*	No	–	Indicates when the vehicle speed (ACC set speed) is low from the detected speed limit traffic signboard and assists the user to adjust the vehicle speed (ACC set speed) to match with the detected speed limit.
Speed Limit Assist - Speed Down*	No	–	Indicates when the vehicle speed (ACC set speed) is high from the detected speed limit traffic signboard and assists the user to adjust the vehicle speed (ACC set speed) to match with the detected speed limit.
High Beam Assist*	No	Continuously ON	Indicates high beam assist function is enabled/active.
Traffic Sign Recognition*	No	Continuously ON	Detected TSR specific sign will be displayed.

4.13 Warning Lamps in the DID

4.13.1 Turn Lamps

The turn lamp arrows in the DID flash showing the direction indicated by the turn signals. A sudden increase in the rate of flashing indicates failure of one or more of the lamp bulbs. Have them replaced as soon as possible.

4.13.2 Park Lamp

The Park lamp indicator illuminates whenever park lamp is switched ON through combination switch.When the ignition is switched OFF and the park lamp is ON with the driver’s door open, an alert will be displayed with audible chime.

4.13.3 Front Fog Lamp (If Equipped)

The front fog lamp telltale indicates the status of the front fog lamp. The front fog lamp can be switched ON only when the parking lamp is ON.

Fog lamp will turn ON, if fitted in the vehicle.

4.13.4 Head lamp High Beam

The headlamp high beam telltale illuminates whenever the headlamps are switched ON to high beam or when the head lamp flash is used.

4.13.5 High Beam Boost (If Equipped)

Telltale remains OFF when ignition is turned ON.

Telltale turns ON when high beam booster turns ON.

4.13.6 Door Ajar Warning Lamp

The door ajar warning lamp illuminates when any of the doors including the hood and back door are open during ignition ON. The buzzer chimes when the vehicle speed more than 2 km/h. The lamp and chime goes OFF when all the doors are closed properly.

4.13.7 Immobilizer

Immobilizer Lamp flashes intermittently (few second frequency) once the ignition is switched OFF and the vehicle security system is armed (when locked using the RKE).

Fast blinking indicates a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

4.13.8 Airbag Warning Lamp

If the lamp remains ON continuously or flash intermittently, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

Following conditions indicate airbag malfunction:

•

Lamp fails to go OFF after engine is started.

•

Lamp does not illuminate at all.

•

Illuminates while driving.

Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately when the airbag warning lamp indicates a system malfunction. The airbag may not deploy when needed, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly or unnecessarily, which may result in personal injury.

4.13.9 Seat Belt Warning Lamp

The seat belt warning lamp illuminates and the buzzer chimes reminding the driver to fasten the seat belt when the ignition is ON and vehicle running condition. The lamp will continue to illuminate till the driver fastens the seat belt properly.

4.13.10 Tiretronics (If Equipped)

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION : Tiretronics lamp Blink for approx. 90 second & then Continuous ON.

SYSTEM WARNINGS: Tiretronics lamp Continuous ON.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION: System fail to function normally due to system failure/Sensor failure.

SYSTEM WARNING: Indicates Low/High Tyre pressure, High Temperature, Air Leakage.

4.13.11 Battery Charging System Warning Lamp

The battery charging system warning lamp illuminates when the battery is not being charged or when there is a malfunction in the alternator.

This lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes out as soon as the engine is started. If the lamp continues to remain ON even after starting the engine, it is an indication that the battery is not being charged or there is a malfunction in the alternator. Check the alternator drive belt for looseness/breakage. If the drive belt is okay, switch OFF all unnecessary electrical equipment and recheck. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further assistance.

4.13.12 High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning

The high engine coolant temperature warning lamp flashes when the coolant temperature is above 113 °C and will be continuously ON with buzzer alert when the temperature reaches 115 °C.

Do not continue driving the vehicle with an overheated engine. This may result in engine damage, which will not be covered by the limited warranty.

4.13.13 Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning

The low engine oil pressure warning lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF when the engine is started. If the lamp remains ON even after starting the engine, or illuminates while driving, stop immediately, check the oil level after 2-3 minute. If low, add engine oil to the “MAX” level and check status. If problem persists, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

Operating the vehicle with the low oil pressure warning lamp ON could cause sudden unexpected engine failure and loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Do not run the engine with low oil pressure warning indicator ON. This may result in engine damage, which will not be covered by the limited warranty.

4.13.14 Engine Start/Stop

The Engine Start/Stop lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 second. The Engine Start/Stop lamp flashes when the vehicle/engine is about to stop through the Engine Start/Stop System. The lamp illuminates continuously when the vehicle/engine has been switched OFF by the Engine Stop/Start System. On restarting the vehicle / engine again by using the clutch/key, the lamp goes out.

4.13.15 EPS Warning Lamp

The lamp Indicates malfunction on Electric Power steering system. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

When EPS is failed. vehicle can still be driven with increase in steering effort.

4.13.16 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Malfunction Lamp

If the ABS malfunction lamp is ON when driving ABS will not operate. But the brake system will still operate conventionally. In this condition, the wheels can lock during severe braking. Have the vehicle checked by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center as soon as possible.

However, if ABS malfunction lamp and brake warning lamp are simultaneously glowing, there is a severe malfunction in the ABS. Operate the vehicle with extreme care and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

if ABS malfunction lamp and parking brake warning lamp are simultaneously ON, there is a severe malfunction in the ABS. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

In this case, the ABS function is not available, but the conventional brake system is properly working.

4.13.17 HDC Malfunction

The lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and goes off after about 4 second. HDC malfunction warning lamp indicates malfunction in HDC system. Contact nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Authorized Mahindra Service Centre.

4.13.18 HHC Malfunction

HHC Malfunction Lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and then goes off after about 4 seconds. if there is any malfunction in hill hold control system of the vehicle.

There are chances of vehicle rolling down when starting on a hill. No assistance will be available from ESP system.

If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

4.13.19 ESP OFF Lamp

The ESP OFF lamp illuminates when the ESP has been switched OFF manually.

This lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and then goes off after about 4 second. Pressing and holding the ESP OFF switch (for more than 3 second) turns on the indicator lamp indicating that the ESP function is deactivated.

4.13.20 ESP Malfunction Lamp

While driving, if the ESP Malfunction lamp blinks, it indicates that ESP has taken control of the vehicle stability. If the lamp remains ON, it indicates the malfunction in the ESP System. Contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Authorized Mahindra Service Center

4.13.21 Electronic Parking Brake Lamp (If Equipped)

The lamp illuminates when Electronic Parking brake is engaged

•

Check if the Electric parking brake is engaged. If yes, disengage it.

4.13.22 Electric Parking Brake Malfunction (EPB) (If Equipped)

The EPB Lamp illuminates, when there is a malfunction in EBP. The lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is turned ON and then goes off after about 4 second.

If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

If you must park the vehicle with faulty EPB, safely pull over and stop the vehicle on a flat surface and shift the gear selector lever to the P position.

4.13.23 Park Brake / EBD / Low Brake Fluid Telltale / Front brake pad worn out (If Equipped)

The lamp illuminates when Parking brake is engaged or when brake fluid level is low or there is malfunction in EBD. If the lamp illuminates while driving, do the following:

A fault with EBD is indicated by illumination of the brake as well as ABS warning lamps.

•

Check if the parking brake/ Electric parking brake is engaged. If yes, disengage it.

•

Check if brake fluid level is low. If yes, top-up brake fluid to the required level.

•

Check if front brake pad is worn out. If yes, replace the front brake pads.

Clean the top of the brake fluid reservoir before removing the cap. Make sure no dirt, impurities or other items fall into the reservoir. Do not leave the cap off for more than a few minutes. Any contaminants, impurities or moisture in the brake fluid can affect brake operation, resulting in an accident.

If the brake warning lamp comes ON while driving, the brake system might not be working properly. The pedal might be harder to operate or might go closer to the floor and it can take longer to stop. Pull off the road carefully and stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center for checks or repairs.

Driving the vehicle with the brake warning lamp ON or when you suspect brake trouble is very dangerous and could result in serious injuries. Have your vehicle towed to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

When the EBD system is not functioning the vehicle could be unstable during the hard braking. Therefore you must pay attention to the driving conditions while this warning light.

4.13.24 Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) (If Equipped)

The AVH Lamp illuminates, there is a malfunction in AVH.

	There is a malfunction in AVH
	AVH is in Standby mode
	AVH is in Active mode
	AVH is in Not Working/Fail State

•

When the AUTO HOLD switch is operated, the AUTO HOLD system will be switched to READY mode and the “AUTO HOLD” indicator on the DID will be illuminated in white.

•

Operating the AUTO HOLD switch again turns off the indicator and deactivates the AUTO HOLD system.

If the yellow AUTO HOLD warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

4.13.25 AT Warning Lamp (If Equipped)

•

This warning lamp turns ON when the ignition switch is turned ON and it goes OFF when the engine is started.

•

If the lamp stays ON or comes ON while driving, some of the Transmission control components including sensors and devices may be malfunctioning.

•

If the Indicator lamp is blinking continuously, reduce the vehicle speed until the lamp stops blinking. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center as soon as possible.

4.13.26 Low Fuel Warning

When the fuel level in the fuel tank falls below the reserve limit, the low fuel warning lamp is illuminated. Refuel sufficiently and the lamp goes out. If the lamp continues to remain ON even after refuelling, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

4.13.27 OBD Check Lamp

The OBD check lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and remains ON till the engine is started indicating normal status. If the lamp remains ON, it indicates a potential malfunction.

There may be a malfunction in:

•

The fuel management system

•

The emission control system

•

Systems which affect emissions

Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

4.13.28 Check Engine

The check engine lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes out in 3 second indicating normal status. The lamp blinks or illuminates continuously if there is a fault in the engine management system. Switch OFF the engine immediately. Contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center for necessary repairs.

4.13.29 DPF choke Indicator Lamp (If Applicable)

If the DPF indicator is ON in the engine running condition then DPF regeneration has not happened. Follow the instructions mentioned in the “EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM”.

4.13.30 DEF Indicator Lamp (If Applicable)

If the DEF indicator is ON in the engine running condition then DEF Level is low or incorrect DEF has been filled or DEF Dosing is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions mentioned in the ‘EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM’.

4.13.31 Regen Indicator Lamp (If Applicable)

if it is continuously ON, It indicates the DPF Manual Regeneration is required. It will blink when Manual regeneration is in progress. Follow the instructions mentioned in the ‘EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM’.

4.13.32 Water-in-Fuel Warning (If Equipped)

The water-in-Fuel warning lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 second The lamp illuminates when the accumulation of water in the fuel filter reaches the maximum permissible limit. The fuel filter needs to be drained. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Do not continue driving the vehicle with the Water-in-Fuel Warning Lamp ON. This may result in fuel pump / other fuel system component damage, which will not be covered by the limited warranty.

4.13.33 Glow Plug Indicator (If Equipped)

Glow plug indicator illuminates when the ignition is turned ON and Glow plug is activated. It automatically goes OFF when the glow plug reaches the required temperature. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center if the glow plug lamp does not illuminate with ignition ON or illuminates while driving.

4.13.34 All Wheel Drive Malfunction (AWD) (If Equipped)

The warning light illuminates on the display when AWD system is in Malfunction

4.13.35 Cruise Indicator (If Equipped)

The lamp indicates the status of the cruise mode. Lamp ON indicates the vehicle is in cruise mode by pressing the SET+ button on the steering wheel switch bank.

Blinking indicates that the accelerator pedal is pressed when in cruise mode allowing for an overtake.

When CRUISE OFF button in the steering wheel switch bank is pressed, cruise mode is deactivated and the lamp goes OFF indicating that the vehicle is not in cruise mode.

If the lamp does not illuminate when the vehicle is in cruise mode or does not go OFF when the vehicle is out of cruise mode, there is a possible malfunction in the lamp or the cruise control system. Have the vehicle checked by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

4.13.36 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (If Equipped)

Indicates Adaptive cruise control system temporarily not available due to temporary abnormal condition.

	ACC system is in Standby state
	ACC system is Active state
	ACC system temporarily not available due to temporary abnormal condition
	ACC system is Not Working/Fail State

The warning light illuminates When the radar/camera sensor or cover is blocked with dirt or snow.

•

Check the radar sensor and cover and clean them by using a soft cloth.

•

Check if there is foreign matter on the front camera lens.

If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further assistance.

Indicates permanent failure of Adaptive cruise control system. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

4.13.37 Automatic Emergency Braking System OFF (If Equipped)

The warning light illuminates on the DID, when user turns OFF the AEB system, even if front collision warning system is enabled. If the warning light remains ON when the AEB is activated, we recommend you to have the system checked by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further assistance

4.13.38 Automatic Emergency Braking Warning / Malfunction Lamp (If Equipped)

This warning lamp Indicates temporary or permanent fault in Automatic Emergency braking system.

The warning light illuminates When the radar/camera sensor or cover is blocked with dirt /snow or if there is permanent failure.

•

Check the radar sensor and cover and clean them by using a soft cloth.

•

Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.

•

If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further assistance.

4.13.39 LDW System Warning Lamp (If Equipped)

If there is a problem with the LDW system, a message (Lane Departure Warning unavailable) will appear for a few seconds. If the problem continues the LDWS failure indicator (yellow) will illuminate. We recommend you to contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further assistance.

	LDW system is in Standby mode
	LDW system is Active state
	LDW system is Not Working/Fail state

When there is a problem with the system, do one of the following:

•

Check if the system is affected by the weather. (e.g. fog, heavy rain, etc.)

•

Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.

•

If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further assistance.

LDW System Warning Lamp with blinking:

If the Front Camera (FCM) is not calibrated properly, means this warning lamp blinks continuously. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

4.13.40 LKA System Warning Lamp (If Equipped)

If there is a problem with the LKAS system, a message (Lane Keep Assist unavailable) will appear for a few seconds. If the problem continues the LKAS failure indicator (yellow) will illuminates. We recommend you to Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further assistance.

	LKA system is in Standby state
	LKA system is Active
	LKA system is Not Working/Fail state

When there is a problem with the system, do one of the following:

•

Check if the system is affected by the weather (e.g. fog, heavy rain, etc.).

•

Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.

•

If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further assistance.

LKA System Warning Lamp with blinking:

If the Front Camera (FCM) is not calibrated properly, this warning lamp blinks continuously. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

4.13.41 Lane Keep Assist System (LKAS) OFF (If Equipped)

The Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) can be turned off by pressing the MAIN or LKAS button on the steering wheel. You can also change the LKAS setting to turn the suspended beep on or off.

4.13.42 Smart Pilot Assist (If Equipped)

The warning light illuminates on the LCD display when SPA system is in fail/Malfunction

	SPA system is in Standby state
	SPA system is Active state
	SPA system is in Not Working/Fail state

The warning light illuminates When the radar sensor/Camera sensor or cover is blocked with dirt or snow or if there is permanent failure.

•

Check the radar sensor and cover and clean them by using a soft cloth.

•

Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.

If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further assistance.

4.13.43 Lane Centering Function (If Equipped)

The LCF Lamp illuminates, there is a malfunction in LCF.

	LCF is in Active mode
	LCF is in Standby mode
	LCF is in Not Working/Fail State

4.13.44 Steering Assist Indicator (If Equipped)

It Indicates the position of steering with in the Lane. When the system is fully engaged, the LKAS icon and lane lines will turn green. LKAS is a driver-assist feature that helps keep a vehicle centred in a lane by providing steering input and alerts if the vehicle starts to drift. It uses a windshield-mounted camera to detect road markings. The camera must be operational and any dirt or object must be cleaned or removed.

4.13.45 ACC Speed Up (If Equipped)

Indicates when the vehicle speed (ACC set speed) is high from the detected speed limit traffic signboard and assists the user to adjust the vehicle speed (ACC set speed) to match with the detected speed limit.

4.13.46 ACC Speed Down (If Equipped)

Indicates when the vehicle speed (ACC set speed) is low from the detected speed limit traffic signboard and assists the user to adjust the vehicle speed (ACC set speed) to match with the detected speed limit.

4.13.47 High Beam Assist Lamp (If Equipped)

This warning light illuminates when the driver sets HBA ON/OFF via DID and Auto Light Switch to ON and Head Lamp Switch to High.

•

Check if the system is affected by the weather (e.g. fog, heavy rain, etc).

•

Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.

If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further assistance.

4.13.48 Traffic Sign Recognition (If Equipped)

Traffic Signs can be detected and displayed in the DID to indicate the driver about the road limits.

It’s displaying even when featuring not enabled or identify by the system are available on the road contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Once a traffic sign is in detection range, it displays in the DID and remains for 5 seconds on the DID. After the traffic sign is crossed, it greys out.

Verify Displayed Information: Ensure the detected traffic sign matches the actual road conditions; occasional misreads can occur due to weather, poor sign visibility, or system limitations. Do Not Solely Rely on the System: Always stay alert to road conditions and signs, as the system may not detect every sign or might misinterpret them.

5 CENTER INFORMATION DISPLAY (CID)

The Center Information display is equipped with a 12.3” touch screen TFT display.

It displays information about Media (AM/FM, USB, Bluetooth music & etc.,), Navigation, Vehicle controls & Settings

Display Overview

A	Time	E	Home
B	e-SIM Network Signal	F	Temperature
C	Notification	G	Tiles
D	Settings

•

Once the home button is selected, the home screen will appear on the CID.

5.1 User Controls – Intelli Command Center (ICC)

ICC is combination of Joystick and switches for easy ergonomic access for the driver and co-driver.

It has 4 shortcut keys and a central rotary knob.

A	Climate Control	D	My Vehicle
B	Rotary Knob	E	Enter/OK
C	Home/Back	F	Volume Control

Climate Control: Press the climate control button and use the knob to modify the climate setting.

Volume: Press the volume control button to adjust the volume using the ICC knob clockwise or anti-clockwise.

My vehicle : Press the my vehicle button to open the my vehicle apps, to use the knob to select the required functions.

Home/Back: Press the Home/Back Button to navigate to the home screen.

Rotary Knob: A rotary knob can indeed rotate clockwise and anti-clockwise. Also, it can move in other directions, such as up/down and left/right.

Enter/OK: Can select and enter the required options.

5.2 Steering Wheel Controls – LH Side

The steering wheel also houses switches to control the main audio functions.

Audio Operation can be controlled by Steering wheel switch mounted on the left side of the steering wheel.

A: Enter

B: Mode (Audio Sources)

C: Navigate any list by pressing up/down

A: Enter Press the ‘Enter’ on the steering wheel to select options.

B: Mode To change the mode, press the button repeatedly (FM, AM, Hard Drive, Alexa, USB, Bluetooth, Ganna, and Amazon Music).

C: UP/DOWN Press the seek button ‘UP’ / ‘DOWN’ moves to next / previous track of MP3 and video playing.

5.3 Home Screen

Home Screen Details

Home Screen shows all the media, phone, navigation, 3rd party application options.

Home Screen is the main screen for the user to interact with the Infotainment System

•

Home Screen will be displayed on pressing the Home icon or Home button

•

It also allows the user to have split screen menus.

•

The tiles in the XUV 7X0 Home screen can be rearranged based on the user preference

The Tiles in home screen are as follow

Radio Tile

Phone Tile

Music Tile

Navigation Tile

Android Auto Tile

Apple Carplay Tile

Applications Tile

Branded Audio Settings Tile

Performance Tile

•

Features which are available in CID is known as tile.

5.3.1 Radio Tile

•

The Radio tile allows quick access to radio features and the Radio menu.

•

tap on the radio tile to open the full screen Radio player.

•

When Radio is playing, station name & frequency will be shown in Radio Tile

•

User can set favourite FM channels by using favourite icon.

Shortcut icon in Radio: Shortcut icon in Radio tile is used to

Change to previous station

Change to next station

Mute/Unmute Station

5.3.2 Music Tile

•

Tap on Music tile to open media player for playing the desired music

•

Current playing audio name will be displayed in the tile

•

To change a song, press the next/ previous buttons.

•

To pause music, press pause button

•

Music can be played from various sources like USB, My Drive, iPod and Bluetooth.

EQUALIZER:

By selecting the equalizer icon, Audio settings will be opened.

User can adjust the Bass, Mid, Treble & Sub-woofer.

Shortcut icon in Music Tile: Shortcut icon in media tile is used to

Change next/previous audio track

Stop button is used to stop/play the music

5.3.3 Phone Tile

•

The phone tile shows the details of the phone that is currently connected with Bluetooth.

•

If no phone is currently paired, it will give a quick option to go to the device pairing screen in the settings menu.

•

Connected device name will be displayed at the bottom of the phone tile.

•

Tap on the Phone tile to enter phone screen.

After opening the phone application below features can be accessed.

Recent call list:

It displays the recent call list from the user’s connected mobile device.

Contacts

Contacts displays a list of available contacts from the user’s mobile device.

Dial

The dialpad can be used to manually dial phone numbers.

SMS

SMS messages received on the user’s mobile device will be displayed under the SMS tab.

Quick dial

Favorites contacts can be seen in quick dial

Shortcut icon in Phone

Recent shortcut opens up the Recent call history of the connected device

Device shortcut opens up the infotainment connected device list

Contact shortcut opens up the connected devices conatcts

5.3.4 Apple Carplay Tile

•

Apple CarPlay seamlessly integrates iPhone with Mahindra's CID, prioritizing safety by projecting key functions onto the vehicle system.

•

Users can control applications like Music, Navigation, Phone calls, and Google search via touch, steering wheel controls, or voice, enhancing XUV 7X0's driving experience with intuitive interfaces and speech recognition, ensuring safer interaction while driving.

Connecting to Apple CarPlay

•

Enable Bluetooth in your mobile.

•

Pair the mobile Bluetooth with XUV 7X0, then Apple CarPlay will connect automatically.

•

Press Apple CarPlay to enable the CarPlay.

Features

•

User can find some in-build apps in Apple CarPlay. Using the apps, user can do the following things,

•

Make call to their contacts by using phone books.

•

Access Navigation system to find the desired location.

•

Play Music by using in-build mobile app.

•

Use Siri voice assistance (Apple phone user)

Shortcut icon in Apple CarPlay

Music

Music icon in Apple CarPlay tile can be used to access Apple CarPlay default music player.

Shortcut icon is enabled only when Apple CarPlay is connected to CID

Phone

Phone icon in Apple CarPlay tile can be used to access the Apple Phone book

Navigation

Navigation icon in Apple CarPlay tile can be used to access the CarPlay default Navigation application.

5.3.5 Android Auto Tile

•

Android Auto brings out the best of in-car infotainment technology by linking the user’s Android™ device with the Mahindra entertainment system.

•

Android Auto focuses on safety & it allows the user to access, and control select applications of Android phone, using various inputs on the vehicle such as touch, steering wheel controls and voice.

•

Android apps can control Music, Navigation and Phone call and it enhances the XUV 7X0 driving experience by stay focused on the road with simple, intuitive interfaces, integrated steering wheel controls and Voice recognition.

•

To experience Android Auto, the user must have a latest android device supporting Android Auto.

•

Android auto is supported at bottom bezel USB port. Also, Android Auto can be connected wirelessly without using USB cable.

Both Bluetooth and Wi-Fi must be turned ON to connect wireless Android Auto.

Android Auto Connection

Android Auto can be connected automatically in XUV 7X0 in 2-ways.

•

Wired Connection

•

Wireless Connection

Wired connection

Connect the phone using your charging cable to the vehicle file transfer socket and press Android Auto.

Wireless connection

Below screen will appear in XUV 7X0 CID on clicking Android Auto for first time.

Click Android auto option near your device to enable Android auto.

Android device must be connected to vehicle CID through Bluetooth before connecting android auto.

Features of Android Auto

•

User can be able to find in-build apps in CID.

•

By using the apps, user can make call to their contacts by using phone books.

•

Navigation system can be accessed to find the desired location.

•

Music can be played by using in build mobile app.

•

In build Google voice assistance in CID.

•

Using Mahindra icon, user can be able to switch from Android Auto to vehicle home screen.

Short cut icon in Android Auto

Shortcut icon is enabled only when Android Auto is connected to CID.

•

Shortcut icon in Android Auto tile is used to access - Music, Phone book and Navigation.

MUSIC

On clicking the phone shortcut, it takes to android auto call list.

PHONE BOOK

On clicking the music shortcut, it takes to android auto default music player.

NAVIGATION

On clicking the navigation shortcut of android auto, opens android auto default navigation i.e., Google maps

5.3.6 Navigation Tile

Navigation in XUV 7X0 is powered by MAPPLS AUTO

If any route is currently set up for navigation, tile will show the turn-by-turn directions.

MAPPLS auto will work only if Adrenox subscription is Active.

Shortcut icon in Navigation

Shortcut icon in Navigation is used for the following purpose

While enabling the Navigation icon, CID will take user directly to mappls home screen.

User can switch ON/OFF the navigation guide voice by using mute button.

While enabling the favorite icon, CID will take user directly to Navigation screen.

Mappls auto Features

My Maps

The following information will be available as part of widgets in Mappls Auto.

Modes

Visual Traffic

Layers

Modes

By using the "Modes" option, users can change the ambiance or theme of the MAPPLS Auto

Visual Traffic

Visual Traffic in MAPPLS Auto provides real-time visual representations of traffic conditions on maps, helps users to make decisions based on current traffic conditions.

My Layers

My Layers in MAPPLS Auto allow users to customize and organize map information according to their preferences (Like sets the home location, Work location, etc.

GPS

GPS in MAPPLS Auto enables precise and real-time location tracking for accurate navigation and route guidance.

Search Near Option

By selecting "Search Near," users can view nearby locations such as post offices, banks, spas, toilets, hospitals, EV charging stations, and transportation facilities, etc.,

Account Profile

Account Profile in MAPPLS Auto personalizes the user experience by allowing them to customize the settings and can modify My saves.

My Saves

Choose the "My Saves" option to set both the home and work address.

Settings

User can select the settings option & use the below listed option in settings.

Units

Users can switch the unit from kilometers per hour (Km/h) to miles per hour (Miles/Hr).

Navigation Settings

By using these settings, users can exclude tolls, highways, and ferries from the navigation route.

Lane Guidance

Lane guidance provides a clear view of the upcoming complex intersection, helping users anticipate lane changes.

Junction View

This displays a realistic 3D representation of a highway intersection, featuring highlighted lanes and exits for a clear view ahead.

Navigation Voice

Users can switch the voice language to English or Hindi.

Visual Alerts

Traffic, safety, and road construction voice alerts will be provided.

Feedback

User can provide feedback by using the below option.

5.3.7 Branded Audio Settings Tile

On clicking the Branded Audio settings tile opens up CID audio settings.

Shortcuts In Branded Audio Settings Tile:

Equalizer:

On clicking the equalizer icon opens up the equalizer setting.

Sound Field Position:

On clicking the icon opens up the vehicles sound field position adjustment setting.

5.3.8 Performance Tile

•

Performance tile displays various information regarding vehicle dynamics like Engine Power and Torque, Digital speed, Tachometer, Compass, and Altimeter.

•

It has 4 subdivisions namely, On Road, Off Road, Lap Timer and Custom.

On Road:

•

It contains Tyre Direction, Compass and G-Force meter.

•

G-Force Meter measures the magnitude and direction of acceleration of the XUV 7X0.

•

Compass will display the geographical direction.

•

Tyre direction shows the vehicles wheel position.

Vehicle Info:

•

It contains Engine performance, Compass, G-Force meter, Roll and Pitch and Tyre direction

•

Engine performance displays live data of vehicle power, torque and engine temperature

•

G-Force Meter measures the magnitude and direction of acceleration of the XUV 7X0.

•

Compass will help in the geographical direction.

•

Roll & Pitch Angle graphical representation will show the front-to-back axis and side-to-side axis

•

Tyre direction shows the vehicle wheel position

Lap Timer:

•

It contains Lap timer and previous lap details.

•

User can access Lap Info menu for creating Time Laps of various journeys.

•

User can actively measure their driving timings using this feature.

5.3.9 Application Tile

The Applications tile allows the user to open all available 3rd party applications.

Tap on the Applications tile to open the app drawer.

It has quick options to open News, Music & weather apps.

5.4 Widget

•

Widgets will provide quick information to the user, and it will be available in left corner of the Home screen.

•

The widgets display will be fixed in the left corner of the home screen.

•

The following information will be available as part of widgets

Clock

Gallery

Weather

NEWS

Travel Explorer

5.4.1 Clock Widget

•

Clock widget displays Time in selected type.

•

Tap on the clock widget to open settings to change the clock type.

5.4.2 Gallery Widget

•

Gallery Widget displays photos/videos available in MyDrive

•

User can tap on the gallery Widget to open gallery application

5.4.3 Weather Widget

•

Weather Widget displays weather information based on vehicles location

•

Tap on the weather widget to open weather application

5.4.4 News Widget

•

User can know the day-to-day news using India Today app by selecting the NEWS widget.

5.4.5 Calender Widget

•

User can fix the Events, Journey Planner, Checklist, Schedule Destination & Pickup Remainder by using calendar.

5.5 Quick Access Drawer (QAD) Functionality

•

The Quick Access Drawer can be opened by dragging the screen from up to down.

•

Quick Access Drawer gives the user a swift way to access handy features like Volume control, Ask Mahindra, Roadside Assistance, Valet Mode, Notifications, Help, Radio, Apple CarPlay, Android Auto, My Drive, USB, Bluetooth, iPod, and video.

5.5.1 Volume Control Slider

User can increase, decrease, or mute the volume by using Volume Control Slider.

5.5.2 SOS

If there is any emergency, user can access the SOS

By enabling SOS in infotainment, a call will be triggered automatically from your Scorpio N to 108 Ambulance Services for Medical Assistance

5.5.3 Ask Mahindra

By using the Ask Mahindra icon, a call will be triggered automatically from your XUV7XO to Mahindra Support Centre It can be used for:

•

Explanation on features and functions in the car.

•

Assisting customers with guiding them to nearest workshop

Some CID features may not work when the Ask Mahindra call is in progress.

5.5.4 Roadside Assistance (RSA)

•

If any abnormal condition is observed in vehicle, user can access RSA.

•

By tapping on RSA icon in QAD, a call will be triggered automatically to Mahindra Roadside Assistance team.

5.5.5 Valet Mode

It’s useful when user parks the vehicle in a predefined location or while giving the vehicle to valet parking. The default PIN to access the Valet mode will be 1234.

•

Once the Valet Mode is enabled,

CID will not be accessible,

The vehicle speed will not go beyond 80 Km/h,

Geofencing alert will be triggered to the user's mobile when an unknown person drives the vehicle over 5 Km.

•

Above conditions are not applicable, if user disables the valet mode.

•

Don’t activate the valet mode during vehicle service.

5.5.6 Notification

•

User mobile should be paired with XUV7XO via Bluetooth.

•

Notification received on mobile will be viewed in CID by clicking the notification icon along with vehicle specific alerts and notifcations.

5.5.7 Radio Shortcut

•

On tapping radio shortcut radio app will be opened

5.5.8 Apple CarPlay Shortcut

•

It’s a shortcut to open media player with source as Apple CarPlay.

5.5.9 Android Auto Shortcut

•

It’s a shortcut to open media player with source as Android Auto.

5.5.10 My Drive Shortcut

•

By using USB device, favorite songs can be stored in MyDrive

•

It’s a shortcut to open media player with source as MyDrive.

5.5.11 USB Shortcut

•

It’s a shortcut to open media player with source as USB device.

User can access music, video & Photos by USB device.

On clicking USB in quick access drawer opens media player with contents from USB.

5.5.12 Bluetooth Shortcut

•

It’s a shortcut to open media player with source as Bluetooth.

Once Mobile Bluetooth is paired with vehicle CID, user can play desired songs.

By selecting the equalizer icon, Audio settings will be opened.

User can adjust the Bass, Mid, Treble & Subwoofer.

5.5.13 Video

•

When USB device is connected in Media Port, then user can play Videos.

•

In App drawer, select Gallery option & select the video in gallery. Video will play automatically.

•

User can see the video in parking condition.

5.6 App Drawer

Center Information Display (CID) Applications

The Center Information Display (CID) has many applications (apps) that will be helpful for your convenience.

All apps are categorized under the Vehicle apps, Media and Entertainment and Communication.

Applications in CID
Alexa	Fun&Work
Ambient Light*	Gallery
App Store	Groove Me*
Climate Control	My Drive Manager
Connected Apps	My SUV
Documents	Owners Manual
Drive Modes*	Software Update
Driver Assistance*	Surround View System*
Ecosense*	* If Equipped

The apps can be selected by referring the below image.

5.6.1 Alexa

Alexa can be integrated into vehicle CID through this application.

•

Click on the “Sign-in” button.

•

Wait for the QR code to be generated.

•

Scan the QR code with your mobile and sign in using your Amazon account. Make sure you create an account at https://www.amazon.in/ before scanning.

For more Details refer Alexa under “Connectivity and Entertainment” chapter.

5.6.2 Ambient Light (If Equipped)

Ambient lighting enhances the interior aesthetic of the vehicle by providing soft, customizable illumination. It creates a relaxing and premium atmosphere, especially during low light conditions or night time driving.

The ambient lighting system offers multiple color options for personalization, with lights integrated into key areas such as the door panels and dashboard, enhancing the vehicle’s interior ambiance.

To open application go to App drawer and click on Ambient Light icon.

Mood

The ambient light settings offer various themes under the “Mood” option, allowing users to select preset themes or customize colors based on their preferences for a personalized experience.

The ambient light features six preset light settings: Drive mode, Summer, Spring, Monsoon, Autumn, and Winter.

The ambient light intensity can be adjusted manually using the slider.

Custom

In custom mode user can customize ambient light available in the vehicle based upon 3 sections namely Dashboard, Front door, Rear door .

Using this option user can apply custom color and light intensity setting to dashboard ambient light.

Using this option user can apply custom color and light intensity setting to front door ambient light.

Using this option user can apply custom color and light intensity setting to rear door ambient light.

Using ‘Sync All’ all ambient light color can be synced to single color or dual color based on user preference.

If the ambient lighting feature has the potential to trigger light-induced epileptic or other seizures in susceptible individuals, it should be used with caution.

5.6.3 App Store

App store allows user to update and install all 3rd party applications and system applications.

App Store feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

5.6.4 Climate Control

Climate control feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

For more Details refer “Heating, Ventilation And Air-Conditioning System (HVAC)” chapter.

5.6.5 Documents

User can store the important files like License, Aadhar card, Pan card, Voter I’d , etc., in pdf format

Documents application can be accessed through the App drawer.

1. My Drive Documents: In this folder user can store the important details like License, Aadhar Card, Pan Card, etc.. in digital format.

2. USB Documents: Connect the pen drive in file transfer socket and then user can access important files which are available in pen drive.

5.6.6 Drive Modes (If Equipped)

Drive modes feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

For more Details refer “Starting and Driving” chapter.

5.6.7 Driver Assistance (If Equipped)

Driver Assistance feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

For more Details refer “Advanced Driver Assistance System” chapter.

5.6.8 Fun and Work

Fun and Work feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

5.6.9 Gallery

Gallery feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

User can save photos & videos in the Gallery by inserting USB device in Media Port. Also, user can copy the photos & videos in MyDrive Photos and MyDrive videos.

Use can select MyDrive Photos, see the list of Photos and select to see it in full screen.

Similarly, user can play the video in CID.

As a safety measure, there are some limitations to play the video in CID.

User can see the video in parking condition

During driving, user can see the video in CID up to 20 km/h speed.

5.6.10 GrooveMe (If Equipped)

GrooveMe displays a exterior and interior light show along with the selected music.

The user can directly access GrooveMe from any media source (Tuner, MyDrive, USB media, Bluetooth) by playing the soundtrack of their choice and directly clicking on the GrooveMe icon present on the media screens.

The user can also start the music in a connected Android Auto/ CarPlay device OR in any streaming application (like Youtube) and then start the GrooveMe show from the Native application in the app drawer.

Pre-Condition to start GrooveMe

The vehicle should be in engine ON condition.

Vehicle should be in PARK mode and Vehicle speed should be 0 km/h.

No call (BT / AA / CP / E-call / RSA) should be in active state.

RVC / SVS screen should NOT be enabled

No Active alert should be present in DID

Battery charging lamp indication should be in ON state.

In case any of the pre condition is not met then the following Pre-condition checklist page shall be displayed to the user for information.

Through App Drawer

1. Start Show – The user has the choice to directly start the GrooveMe show in case any media source is already active in the background.

Once the show is started the animation will be displayed in CID.

Groove Me animation will not be visible when Media source is a video playing through Youtube.

2. Schedule Show

The user can schedule the show within the next 24 hours from the current time wherein they can set the show time and a selection of 3 songs as per their preference from the available soundtracks (My Drive songs). Once the scheduled time is reached a countdown will start notifying the user that the show is about to start.

The scheduled show can be aborted before starting or can be stopped while playing.

GrooveMe Settings

Choice of light show – User has the choice for selecting the Light settings for Only Interior /Only Exterior/Both Interior and Exterior Lamps

1. Interior light show – Using this setting the user selects that only the interior lamps like the interior reading lamps and the ambient lights will be glowing and syncing as per the user selected soundtrack beats.

2. Exterior light show – Using this setting the user selects that only the exterior lamps of the vehicle like the front headlamps, fog lamps, rear lamps and indicators will be glowing and syncing as per the user selected soundtrack beats.

3. Interior and Exterior light show – This setting enables the user to select all the lights and lamps in the vehicle to sync to the music beats

5.6.11 My Drive Manager

My Drive Manager feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

Insert USB device in Media Port & open the My Drive Manager then user can copy required songs, videos, photos, and documents to the CID.

Select required file from USB device & by using copy (highlighted) option, user can store the required details from USB to the CID.

Delete content option is used to remove the unwanted files in the CID.

User can store max 1.9 GB data in CID.

5.6.12 Ecosense (If Equipped)

Ecosense displays an Eco score based on users driving habit categorized under 4 topics namely Speed, Gear, Idling and Acceleration.

Ecosense Summary contains a detailed trip summary on Trip Distance, Top Speed, Average Speed, Idle Time, Fuel Economy, Clutch Press, Brake Pres, Start-Stop mode duration, Gear Utilization, Aggressive Acceleration, Harsh Braking, Cruise Control Utilization.

Ecosense History Displays trip details on selecting the required trip.

Ecosense Tripchart creates a line chart based on each criterion across various journeys to provide a comprehensive user driving behavior.

5.6.13 My SUV Info

My SUV Info feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

In MySUV Info option, user can know the Vehicle Details and can store License & other certificates in digital format.

Vehicle Details

1. Vehicle Name	7. Number of cylinders
2. Color of the vehicle	8. Variant details
3. PUC (Pollution Under Control) Expiry Date	9. VIN Number
4. Last Service Date	10. Model
5. Engine Capacity	11. Make
6. Fuel Type	12. Insurance Expiry Date

My Documents:

In My Documents user can store the following details in digital format

1. Insurance	3. Registration Certificate (RC)
2. License	4. Pollution Under Control (PUC) certificates

5.6.14 Owners Manual

Owners Manual feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

By using Owner’s Manual option, user can see XUV7XO Owner's manual & CID manual.

5.6.15 Software Update

Software Update feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

User can find whether the software is latest or not by using below option.

5.6.16 Surround View (If Equipped)

Surround View feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

Refer Surround View System in the “Parking Assist System” chapter for further details.

5.7 Settings

5.7.1 Quick Settings

•

Settings option can be opened by clicking the gear icon in the home page.

•

Some user interaction level settings are provided up-front as Quick Settings on CID.

Touch Sound

•

Enabling the Touch Sound will provide a audio feedback, whenever user clicks on the CID screen.

Auto Software Update

•

When Auto software update is enabled, vehicles software updates will be auto download and installed.

Reset Home Layout

•

Home screen will be reverted to its default layout whenever user selects this option.

Camera Recordings

•

Secure 360 can be turned ON by enabling Camera recording toggle button.

5.7.2 General

Units Setting

•

User can select between UK (Metric), US (Imperial) or custom to display the units.(i.e., Km or miles)

Factory Reset

•

CID settings can be reverted to factory setting by performing factory reset.

Software Update

•

When Auto download update is enabled, vehicles software updates will be auto download and installed..

Feedback on Touch

•

Haptic touch feedbacks can be enabled through this setting.

5.7.3 Display Settings

Appearance

CID settings display brightness mode can be selected as Day, Night or Auto mode based on user preference.

Brightness

Brightness level of CID , PID, DID can be individually adjusted.

Screen Off and Screen saver

•

Screen saver can be turned with trigger timing varying from 2, 5 and 10 minute of screen inactivity.

Screen saver Theme

•

Screen saver can be configured with different themes available.

•

Choose any default screen saver or pick a photo from gallery for screen saver and tap on the confirm.

Screen Clean mode

•

Screen clean mode can be enabled while cleaning CID screen, when enabled Touch input will be disabled. In order to again gain touch function hold the exit button for 3 second.

Clock Type

•

User can select the digital or analog clock as per choice.

•

This will be reflected in home screen when CID goes OFF.

Home Layout

•

The Home Layout of CID and PID can be reset individually..

5.7.4 Driver Display Setting

User can see following features on XUV7XO by using access option.

Passenger Airbag

Passenger airbag can be turned On and OFF based on user preference.

Refer seats and safety for more details.

Driver Drowsiness

Driver drowsiness detection can be enabled and disabled

Refer Starting and driving for more details.

Tyre pressure

Tiretronics settings like tyre fill assist, TPMS auto learn can be turned ON and OFF.

Refer Starting and driving for more details.

Blind View Monitoring

Blind view monitoring feature can be enabled / disabled using this setting.

Refer Surround view camera under Starting and driving chapter for more details.

Sound

Audio chime sound volume, tone and welcome chime can be controlled using this setting.

Average Fuel Economy

AFE auto reset conditions can be altered based on user preference.

Refer AFE under Driver information display chapter for more details.

5.7.5 Audio Settings

3D immersive

Branded audio settings can be accessed under these settings.

Fully deep, wide and the gaze height sound stage for comfortable music listening while driving

One big sound stage, with immersive feeling just like watching artist performance at premium position

Immersive sound mode provides an experience to the listener to understand the sound and music coming from speakers, which will come from an multiple points.

Studio:

Studio mode provides an audio experience as if the audience is in a recording studio.

In this mode, the front high speakers are disabled to achieve a studio experience.

VenueScapes:

VenueScapes is an immersive sound technology or audio system designed to simulate the acoustics and ambiance of a speciﬁc venue or environment.

It creates a dynamic, spatial audio experience that replicates the feeling of being in a particular place, such as a concert hall, theater, or stadium, enhancing the listener’s sense of presence and realism.

XUV 7XO has 3 venuescape locations namely,

1. Boston Symphony Hall.

2. Royal Opera House, Mumbai.

3. Wembley Stadium – London.

Sound Field Position

•

User can adjust the sound balance according to their preferences.

•

Centre button: It is given to auto centre out the sound balance.

•

Cabin Focus: User can focus audio either to driver or else full cabin.

Equalizer

•

Equalizer is provided to adjust audio frequency settings according to user preferences. Additionally, subwoofer bass can also be adjusted here.

VNC+

•

VNC+ will adjust the loudness and quality of the music according to speed of the vehicle by removing the road noise.

Volume Settings

•

User can increase or decrease the volume for the Voice recognition (Alexa & Google Assistance), Notification, Phones, Media.

Default Audio Settings

•

By enabling the below settings, the Audio settings will be restored to the default settings.

5.7.6 Date and Time Setting

User can set the Date & Time by using this option.

Sync to GPS:

Date and Time can be sync with GPS, it can be manually enabled or disabled by user

Time Zone:

By using this option user can manually select their required time zones

Set date manually:

Users can set the date manually according to their preferences.

User can fix the Date format either in DD/MM/YY or MM/ DD/YY format.

Set Time

User can set and fix the Time format either in 12 Hour or 24 Hour.

5.7.7 Vehicle Setting

Access

Using access settings various functions like Approach unlock, walkaway lock, Selective unlock can be enabled and disabled using this settings.

Refer open and closing chapter for more details.

Mirror

Various mirror related features like Auto unfold on door lock, Auto dip on reverse, Auto dimming IRVM can be enabled and disabled using this settings.

Refer Convenience chapter for more details.

Convenience

Various convenience features like Easy entry & easy exit, Front wireless charger, Rear wireless charger can be enabled and disabled using this settings.

Refer Convenience chapter for more details.

Light & illumination

Light features like Daytime running lamp. follow me home, headlight assist can be enabled and disabled using this settings..

Refer Convenience chapter for more details.

Service

Service mode can enabled and disabled using this settings.

5.7.8 Phone Setting

User can see following features on XUV7XO by using access option.

Bluetooth Setting

User can enable or disable Bluetooth connection according to need.

Bluetooth Device List

User can view the list of devices, already connected to vehicle CID.

Add Devices

By using this option, user can ﬁnd the nearby bluetooth enabled devices.

Bluetooth Discoverability

When BT Discoverability option is pressed, vehicle's Bluetooth device will be shown to nearby devices for 90 second.

Once any mobile device is connected, Bluetooth functionality are available

Ringtone

User can fix the ringtones for incoming calls

Phone SMS Settings

Settings related to connected devices SMS can be configured here.

5.7.9 WiFi Setting

User can see following features on XUV7XO by using access option.

Settings related to vehicles WiFi can be enabled and disabled through here.

Station mode enables user to connect vehcile with available Wi-Fi networks.

Users can enable data usage for devoces connected to vehicles Wi-Fi.

In-car experience can be turned ON/OFF,

Refer BYOD topic under Center Information Display chapter for more details.

5.7.10 Ecosense Setting

Ecosense trip meter can be resetted,

User can turn ON/OFF Ecosense vehicle location tracking,

Ecosense data syncying with mobile application can be enabled,

5.8 CID Maintenance

Display is a precise electrical product and the surface is covered with soft optical film/coating. Therefore user should take necessary precaution and care for cleaning the display visible surface.

Abuse loads should not be applied to the top or sides of the display for holding or any other purpose.

Cleaning the display area:

•

It is recommended to use soft and micro-fiber lint free cloth to clean the display visible surface.

•

Wipe gently. Do not rub, as the optical film is sensitive to scratch formation.

•

Be careful for scratch by hard matter like finger nail or steel wool.

•

Do not try to peel off the optical film or coating on the screen, since it is attached strongly.

•

Do not add another commercial optical film on to the display visible area.

•

Do not touch the screen with oily/dirty/wet moisturized fingers as the optical film is very sensitive to stains. Incase of such an event please clean with soft cloth immediately.

•

The display visible surface must not come in contact with sharp objects or regular day to day ornaments like finger rings, watches, bracelets, bangles, vehicle keys, etc.

•

When you find a scratch on the screen, do not wipe it strongly. Otherwise it will worsen.

•

Display surface is not so strong for chemical agent. Glass cleaner including alkali or acid, sunscreen must not be used. Alcoholic thinner, petrol, abrading agent must not be used. This may cause discoloration or strain.

•

Antiseptic solution must not be used for cleaning, since it is not pure alcohol. This may cause stains and/ or discoloration.

Display care: Your XUV7XO has an exquisite display integrated with high-end technology. To keep the display looking new and pristine, wipe the display with a clean soft cloth.

Continued usage of display with dust or dirt can create micro-scratches do not wipe dust or dirt with dry rough cloth or by hand.

6 PASSENGER INFORMATION DISPLAY (PID)

The Passenger Information display is equipped with a 12.3” touch screen TFT display.

It displays information about Media (AM/FM, USB, Bluetooth music & etc.,) & Settings

Display Overview

A	Time
B	Settings
C	Home

•

Once the home button is selected, the home screen will appear on the PID.

6.1 Home Screen

Home Screen Details

Home Screen shows all the media, phone, navigation, 3rd party application options.

Home Screen is the main screen for the user to interact with the Infotainment System

•

Home Screen will be displayed on pressing the Home icon or Home button

•

It also allows the user to have split screen menus.

The Tiles in home screen are as follow

Radio Tile

Music Tile

Branded Audio Settings Tile

Fun and Work Tile

•

Features which are available in CID is known as tile.

•

Refer Home screen topic under Center Information Display Chapter for more details.

6.2 Quick Access Drawer (QAD) Functionality

•

The Quick Access Drawer can be opened by dragging the screen from up to down.

•

Refer Quick Access Drawer (QAD) Functionality topic under Center Information Display Chapter for more details.

6.3 App Drawer – PID

Passenger Information Display (PID) Applications

The Passenger Information Display (PID) has many applications (apps) that will be helpful for your convenience.

Applications in CID
Documents	Fun&Work
MyDrive Manager	Gallery
SonyLiv

The apps can be selected by referring the below image.

6.3.1 Documents

User can store the important files like License, Aadhar card, Pan card, Voter I’d , etc., in pdf format

Documents application can be accessed through the App drawer.

1. My Drive Documents: In this folder user can store the important details like License, Aadhar Card, Pan Card, etc.. in digital format.

2. USB Documents: Connect the pen drive in file transfer socket and then user can access important files which are available in pen drive.

6.3.2 Fun and Work

Fun and Work feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

6.3.3 Gallery

Gallery feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

User can save photos & videos in the Gallery by inserting USB device in Media Port. Also, user can copy the photos & videos in MyDrive Photos and MyDrive videos.

Use can select USB Videos, see the list of Videos and select to see it in full screen.

Similarly, user can play the video in PID.

As a safety measure, there are some limitations to play the video in CID.

User can view the video while driving also.

6.3.4 My Drive Manager

My Drive Manager feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

Insert USB device in Media Port & open the My Drive Manager then user can copy required songs, videos, photos, and documents to the PID.

Select required file from USB device & by using copy (highlighted) option, user can store the required details from USB to the PID.

Delete content option is used to remove the unwanted files in the PID.

User can store max 1.9 GB data.

6.4 SonyLIV (If Equipped)

SonyLIV provides access to Dolby Vision supported content on the XUV 7XO, offering enhanced visual performance with improved brightness, contrast, and color representation.

SonyLIV with Dolby Vision is supported only through PID display

Claim SonyLIV Subscription

XUV 7XO AX7L is provided with free 1 yr SonyLIV subscription. It can be activated once per vehicle through KYC verified number and Adrenox application.

•

Open Adrenox application and navigate to subscription manager.

•

Tap on claim now to activate SonyLIV subscription.

Dolby vision premium subscription can be realized in SonyLIV Account page with subscription status as Premium,

SonyLIV content which supports Dolby vision and Dolby Atmos will be having respective badging in them.

The SonyLIV one year subscription can be activated only once per vehicle and will be linked to the KYC-verified mobile number.

If the user already holds an active premium subscription prior to this activation, the subscriptions will be stacked.

In case of deactivation, change of KYC‑registered mobile number, or ownership change, the subscription will remain locked to the initially claimed kYC-verified mobile number.

6.5 Settings

•

Settings option can be opened by clicking the gear icon in the home page.

•

Some user interaction level settings are provided up-front as Quick Settings on CID.

Refer Settings topic under Center Information Display Chapter for more details.

6.6 PID Maintenance

Display is a precise electrical product and the surface is covered with soft optical film/coating. Therefore user should take necessary precaution and care for cleaning the display visible surface.

Abuse loads should not be applied to the top or sides of the display for holding or any other purpose.

Cleaning the display area:

•

It is recommended to use soft and micro-fiber lint free cloth to clean the display visible surface.

•

Wipe gently. Do not rub, as the optical film is sensitive to scratch formation.

•

Be careful for scratch by hard matter like finger nail or steel wool.

•

Do not try to peel off the optical film or coating on the screen, since it is attached strongly.

•

Do not add another commercial optical film on to the display visible area.

•

Do not touch the screen with oily/dirty/wet moisturized fingers as the optical film is very sensitive to stains. Incase of such an event please clean with soft cloth immediately.

•

The display visible surface must not come in contact with sharp objects or regular day to day ornaments like finger rings, watches, bracelets, bangles, vehicle keys, etc.

•

When you find a scratch on the screen, do not wipe it strongly. Otherwise it will worsen.

•

Antiseptic solution must not be used for cleaning, since it is not pure alcohol. This may cause stains and/ or discoloration.

Display care: Your XUV7XO has an exquisite display integrated with high-end technology. To keep the display looking new and pristine, wipe the display with a clean soft cloth.

Continued usage of display with dust or dirt can create micro-scratches do not wipe dust or dirt with dry rough cloth or by hand.

6.7 Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) (If Equipped)

Using BYOD (Bring Your Own Device), passengers can connect their mobile or Tab (Android and iOS) and with the Adrenox app installed, to the PID.

Pre-conditions for establishing connection:

Vehicle’s WiFi hotspot must be enabled.

Mobile / Tab (BYOD device) must be connected with the vehicle’s hotspot.

BYOD device must have the Adrenox app installed.

Enable ‘In-Car Experience’ on the CID.

Climate app, Fun & Work app (features of PID) can be accessed in the BYOD device.

All the BYOD connection are established over WiFi protocol.

Two BYOD devices can be connected concurrently.

Theatre mode enables to cast the same screen in all devices. When vehicle is in driving condition, theater mode gets disabled for CID.

Connect to vehicles Hotspot:

•

Go to settings >> Wi-Fi settings >> Access Point

•

Enter the password to connect your device with vehicles Hotspot.

Enable In-car experience

•

Go to settings >> Wi-Fi settings >> In-car experience >> In-car experience via Mobile App.

•

Turn ON the toggle bar to enable BYOD function.

With Adrenox connect Account

•

Open Adrenox conect application on your mobile phone.

•

Click In-Car experience option.

Without Adrenox conect Account

•

Open Adrenox conect application on your mobile phone.

•

Click In-Car experience option.

After selecting the In-Car experience option, the screen directly enters the Climate control system.

6.7.1 Climate Controls

HVAC system can be access in the climate control screen.

A	Power ON/OFF	G	A/C (ON/OFF)
B	Seat Ventilation	H	SET Temperature
C	Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode	I	Blower speed level
D	Auto Mode	J	Blower Speed control
E	AQI Indicator	K	Rear A/C (ON/OFF)
F	Mode Selection

Power ON/OFF: Touch to turn on/off climate control system

Recirculation: Touch to toggle between fresh air mode and recirculation mode. In recirculation mode air inside the vehicle will recirculate instead of the outside air, which will help the vehicle cool faster. In fresh air mode, fresh air from outside the vehicle is sucked by the blower and utilized further to cool/hear the cabin.

Auto Mode: Touch to turn on/off auto mode. There are 3 auto modes - Auto 1 , Auto 2 and Auto 3. Each auto mode will have different blower speeds in the increasing order. i.e, Auto mode 1 will have lower blower speeds, Auto mode 2 will have medium blower speeds and Auto mode 3 will have higher blower speeds.

In these auto modes, based on the user set temperature, other modes are automatically adjusted to attain desired comfort inside the vehicle.

In extreme high/low ambient conditions, Blower speed will be set higher even in Auto 1 mode, to meet the requirements. Once the set temperature is attained in the cabin, blower speed will be reduced.

AQI Indicator: AQI indicator displays Air Quality Index value inside the cabin.

Mode Selection: Touch on the desired mode of face/foot to direct airflow towards face/upper body or foot/ lower body. This adjustment is available for both driver and co-driver shown on respective side in the climate control screen.

A/C: Touch to turn on/off air conditioning. Turning it off will allow only the blower to run with the existing temperature.

SET Temperature: Touching -/+ will decrease/increase temperature. This option is available on both driver and codriver side.

The driver and co‑driver HVAC temperature cannot be controlled separately.

Blower Speed Control: Touching -/+ will decrease/increase the blower speed between 1 to 8.

Rear A/C: Rear AC icon is used to turn ON/OFF the Rear AC blower.

Return to Mobile App

To return to the Adrenox connect home screen, simply tap on the ‘Return to Mobile App’ tab on the landing screen.

6.7.2 App Drawer

BYOD app drawer can be accessed from the BYOD landing screen.

The following options can be accessed through BYOD app drawer.

•

Screen Mirroring

6.7.3 Screen Mirroring

Screen mirroring option can be used to control your entire PID screen through connected BYOD device.

The PID screen mirroring will be enable after select the ‘screen mirroring option’ on your device and can be used to access the Quick Access Drawer (QAD) Functionality and following PID applications.

The Quick Access Drawer can be opened by dragging the screen from up to down. (NOTE: For more details, refer CID chapter)

•

Documents

•

Fun&Work

•

Gallery

•

MyDrive Manager

•

Vivaldi Browser

Fun&Work

Fun and Work app can be accessed through the application drawer.

Fun and work consists of all 3rd party entertainment and communication applications.

User must have a valid account of respective applications to access the contents.

Data network from inbuilt E-sim will be used for the content streaming function, Wi-Fi connection can also be used to access it.

For more details, refer CID chapter.

Gallery

Gallery app can be accessed through the application drawer.

The gallery application allows the user to view photos and videos stored on the hard drive and connected USB devices.

For more details, refer CID chapter.

MyDrive Manager

MyDrive Manager can be accessed through the application drawer.

The entire Files can be manage by this application.

For more details, refer CID chapter.

Setting

Vehicle Settings can be accessed throught Media player settings.

for more details on vehicle settings, please refer CID chapter.

User can access only PID screen setting.

Screen Mirror Refresh

If you’re facing any lagging issue while using screen mirroring feature, just touch the ‘refresh icon’ which is located at top right corner.

If you want to turn OFF the screen mirroring feature, just touch the ‘close icon’ which is located at top right corner.

6.7.4 Theatre mode

Through theatre mode user can cast his video across CID, PID and 2 connected BYOD devices.

It can be triggered through media player playing in any of the vehicle display or connected BYOD displays.

If Theatre mode is triggered from CID display it will turn OFF the media play back when vehicle Gear lever is shifted to R or D mode..

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

Your Vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all applicable emission regulations.

There are three emission control system which are as follows.

Crankcase emission control system

Evaporative emission control system

Exhaust emission control system

To ensure optimal functioning of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your vehicle inspected and maintained by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Emission Control Systems for Petrol vehicles

It is a highly effective system that controls exhaust emissions from an engine. It is crucial for meeting emission standards specified by law.

Your vehicle is equipped with a three-way catalytic converter (TWC) for meeting BS VI emission norms.

For optimal functioning of the emission control system, it is mandatory to get your vehicle inspected and maintained by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center. The maintenance schedule in owner’s manual should be followed.
In addition, it is important to use the correct grade of fuel, confirming IS 2796:2017 BS VI specification.

Three-Way Catalytic Converter (TWC)

It is an exhaust after treatment component that is designed to convert carbon monoxide (CO), hydrocarbons (HC), nitrogen oxides (NOx) into carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen (N) and water (H2O).

Emission Control System for Diesel vehicles

The emission control system is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions from the engine and crucial for meeting emission norms specified by law.
Your vehicle is equipped with the following emission control systems for meeting BS VI emission norms.

Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC)

Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

To ensure optimal functioning of the emission control systems, it is mandatory to get your vehicle inspected and maintained by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center. The maintenance schedule in the Warranty & Service Information Guide need to be followed.

Use Automotive Diesel fuel confirming to IS 1460:2025 specification (Having Sulphur less than 10 mg/kg).

7.1 Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC)

Diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC) is an after-treatment component that is designed to convert carbon monoxide (CO) and hydrocarbons (HC) into carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O).

7.2 Selective Catalytic Reduction(SCR)

Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) is a advanced active emission control technology system that injects a liquid-reducing agent through a special catalyst into the exhaust stream of a diesel engine. The reductant is called as Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF). The DEF sets off a chemical reaction that converts nitrogen oxides into nitrogen and water which is then expelled through the vehicle tailpipe.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) MaxiCLEAN

To enable the SCR system to work efficiently and to ensure emission compliance, it is recommended to use MaxiCLEAN DEF meeting IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification.

Replenishing DEF is part of regular maintenance service. DEF consumption is highly dependent on driving conditions/pattern and it may be necessary to refill the DEF reservoir in-between the scheduled service if need be, You are advised to monitor DEF Indicator Tell Tale and symbols/text messages displayed on the DID.

MaxiCLEAN DEF is available at all the Authorized Mahindra Service Center in packs of variable capacities. Individual DEF Packs may have specific filler neck, for filling DEF in the vehicle. While refilling DEF, take care to avoid spillage on your body or outer panels of the vehicle to avoid any stains or inconvenience.

It is unlawful to tamper with or remove any component of the after-treatment system. It is strongly recommended not to use DEF which does not meet the above specification. Further, this may lead to emission non-compliance and warranty getting void.

•

Use Genuine DEF MaxiCLEAN always.

•

Incase of non-availability of the above mentioned MaxiCLEAN Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) complying to IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification can be used.

•

Never attempt to use agricultural grade urea mixed with water. Agricultural grade urea does not meet the necessary specifications and the after treatment system of your vehicle may be damaged.

•

Total DEF quantity inside the DEF Tank should never exceed 20 liter. Overfilling may result in system/component failure.

•

DEF quality and purity can be ensured only if it is stored as per recommendations. Hence ensure to store DEF in a cool, dry place.

•

Do not add urea to DEF and do not dilute with water. This may cause damage to the after treatment system.

•

While refilling DEF be careful not to allow any foreign particles, liquids, wiping paper/clothing fibers or lint to get inside the system. These may clog or damage the system.

•

While refilling DEF, use only the pipe supplied with the MaxiCLEAN. Do not use any funnel or container. Any contamination with Diesel or oils will cause malfunction of the after treatment system.

•

If DEF accidently spill over vehicle components or metal surfaces, rinse with water or wipe off with sponge and water. DEF residues will corrode the components, metal surfaces and painted body panels.

•

DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the diesel fuel tank. If DEF is mixed with the diesel fuel, engine/fuel system could get damaged.

•

In such a case, do not start the engine and immediately contact nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

Contamination/ Incorrect DEF: If incorrect or contaminated fluid is filled inside DEF Tank, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center to determine the appropriate repair procedure.

Handling of DEF

•

Ensure that DEF does not come into contact with skin, eyes, or clothing.

•

Keep DEF out of the reach of children.

•

In case if any part of the body comes in contact with DEF, clean affected area immediately with plenty of water.

•

If DEF comes in contact with eyes, flush with plenty of water immediately and seek medical help.

•

If DEF is swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water, drink plenty of water immediately and seek medical help.

•

Refrain from storing DEF refill containers inside the vehicle. Ammonia vapors may escape from the container which have a pungent odor and are particularly irritating to the skin, mucous membranes and eyes. Inhaling ammonia vapors may cause irritation to the eyes, nose and throat, as well as cough.

•

When opening the DEF filler cap, ammonia vapors may escape. Therefore ensure to refill DEF in a well- ventilated area only.

•

If Diesel Exhaust Fluid is spilled on metal surfaces rinse and clean immediately with water. Failure to do so may leave permanent corrosive stains on the metal surfaces which cannot be removed.

DEF Operating Condition: DEF will freeze at -11 °C (12.2 °F). This is a natural phenomenon. The DEF system in the vehicle is designed considering this and does not require any external heating or additives to avoid freezing.

The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) system purges to prevent damage from freezing. Do NOT disconnect battery power within 20 minute of switching the ignition key off. Failure to comply may result in vehicle or property damage.

Refilling DEF: Your Vehicle DEF Filler Neck is located beside the Fuel filler Neck. The DEF storage tank is located under the body.

Following below are the steps to refill the DEF:

1. Park the vehicle on level ground and switch OFF the ignition.

2. Press the key fob unlock button and Press the fuel lid gently once to open.

3. Rotate the DEF filler cap in anti-clockwise direction and remove.

4. Fill DEF from the Container Pack. Each container pack has a unique mouth and filling provision. Ensure utilizing the same to avoid spillage. Example. 10 Liter Pack provided with filler tube.

5. Fill DEF as required. Maximum Storage capacity is 20 liter. Minimum quantity to be filled is 6.0 liter.

6. Rinse with water or use sponge wetted with water to clean the components/surfaces in case the DEF spills over.

7. Put the DEF filler cap back in its place and tighten in the clock wise direction, then close the fuel lid shut.

8. Switch the ignition ON

9. Verify that there is no warning regarding DEF low level. If the DEF Level Low warning is still appearing, check if enough quantity is filled, If still problem persist contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

10. DEF is being monitored through iSmart tool during regular service at Authorized Mahindra Service Center and the required quantity will be filled accordingly.

It is highly recommended to DEF filling always at Ignition off condition only

7.2.1 SCR Alerts

Introduction

DEF telltale will turn ON and an error message with code will be displayed on the DID screen due to any of the following reasons:

•

DEF level low

•

Incorrect DEF detected

•

DEF dosing malfunction

It is unlawful to tamper with or remove any component of the after-treatment system. It is strongly recommended not to use DEF which does not meet the specification. Further, this may lead to emission non-compliance and warranty getting void.

7.2.2 DEF Level Indication

When DEF level in the tank falls below pre-defined values, warnings are flashed in stages as explained below:

Irrespective of the warning stages, once DEF level is low, a minimum of 6.0 liter of DEF needs to be filled. If the warnings continue even after refill, contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

E31	E32	E33

E34	E35

In absence of DEF level low warning, refilling is not recommended.

Total DEF quantity inside the DEF Tank should never be more than 20 liter. Overfilling may result in system/component failure. Only a Authorized Mahindra Service Center will be able to correctly determine the quantity of DEF present inside the tank. Hence if you are refilling the DEF yourself, fill only 6.0 liter in case the DEF Low level warning is flashed.

If the DEF warning lamp turns on due to the DEF level, refill the DEF tank. Failure to refill may cause engine start restriction.

7.2.3 DEF Quality

If SCR system detects the quality of DEF inside the tank is not meeting IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification, warnings will be flashed in stages as explained below:

E11	E12	E13

E14	E15

If the DEF warning lamp turns on due to the DEF quality, visit the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center to have this repaired. Failure to repair the system may cause the engine start restriction.

7.2.4 DEF Dosing Malfunction

If SCR system detects any malfunction due to failures in components or tampering, warnings are flashed in stages as explained below:

E21	E22	E23

E24	E25

If the DEF telltale turns on due to dosing malfunction, visit an Authorized Mahindra Service Center to have this repaired. Failure to repair the system may cause engine start restriction.

7.3 Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

The Diesel particulate filter (DPF) is an integral part of the vehicle exhaust gas emission reduction systems and it removes the soot (Particulate matter) from the exhaust gas. Unlike a disposable air filter, the DPF is a regenerative filter. Regeneration is triggered automatically according to vehicle driving conditions which burns the accumulated particles/soot from the DPF. The process is called as DPF Active Regeneration.

However, if the vehicle continues to be driven in the below conditions the accumulated soot may not be automatically removed because of low exhaust gas temperatures.

1. Heavy traffic driving conditions, especially in the city

2. Frequent short trips

3. Low speed for a long time

When more than a certain amount of soot gets deposited, the DPF telltale turns ON along with the DPF clogged alert.

If the DPF telltale turns ON when driving the vehicle, it indicates that the DPF regeneration has not occurred successfully. At this moment, we suggest DPF regeneration must be done as mentioned below:

Take the vehicle to an empty stretch of road/highway and drive for 20 – 30 minute @ speeds above 60 km/h until the telltale turns off.

•

Follow speed limits & traffic regulations as defined by local jurisdiction while driving.

If the DPF telltale starts blinking, perform DPF park regeneration following the below procedure.

If the OBD telltale is ON and DPF telltale blinking. Stop the vehicle and contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

Continuous driving with DPF telltale blinking may lead to failure of exhaust system components.

DPF Park Regeneration

DPF park regeneration is the procedure to start a DPF regeneration when the vehicle is stationary from the DID. Follow the below steps to perform Park Regeneration. The DPF park regeneration is only possible when the REGEN telltale is ON in the DID.

•

Park the vehicle safely in a well ventilated levelled open space and free of any flammable material.

•

Shift the gear lever to Neutral with the engine running and apply the parking brake.

•

Access the Drive info menu in the DID and press the down button to go to the REGEN screen, REGEN screen will appear only when the REGEN telltale is ON.

•

REGEN screen will go OFF if REGEN telltale turns OFF.

•

When in the REGEN screen of the drive info menu, long Press OK button on the steering wheel or the driver side switch bank to start park regeneration.

•

Once regeneration starts, “In Progress” text will appear below REGEN. The engine idle speed will increase indicating regeneration has started.

•

Park Regeneration can take up to 30 minute to complete. Once completed the REGEN telltale in the DID will turn OFF. The engines idling speed also returns to normal.

•

To abort the Park regeneration in case of any emergency, turn OFF the ignition or press any of the Accelerator, Brake or Clutch Pedals.

•

If the Park Regeneration gets aborted by itself or does not start, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

•

During the regeneration process, ensure not to park the vehicle close to any flammable materials as you may observe hot emission gases from exhaust pipe.

•

To avoid burns and personal injury, keep yourself away from exhaust system.

Park Regeneration process will not start if CHECK ENGINE LAMP or OBD are ON in the DID. Take your vehicle to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

When Park regeneration is happening do not press the Accelerator, Brake, Clutch pedals or change the gear from Neutral or Park as this will abort the regeneration process.

For Diesel Vehicles

Use Automotive Diesel fuel confirming to IS 1460:2025 specification (Having Sulphur less than 10 mg/kg (PPM)). Information regarding the diesel fuel quality filled shall be available with the concerned fuel retail outlet.

7.4 SCR and DPF Related Telltales and Alerts

For other regional languages, kindly refer the Annexure chapter at the end of this manual.

Do’s & Don’ts

Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)

•

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) complying to IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification can be used.

•

Never attempt to use agricultural grade urea mixed with water. Agricultural grade urea does not meet the necessary specifications and the after-treatment system of your vehicle may be damaged.

•

Do not add urea to DEF and do not dilute with water. This may cause damage to the treatment system.

•

Total DEF quantity inside the DEF tank should never exceed 20 liter. Overfilling may result in system/component failure.

•

While refilling DEF inside tank be careful not to allow any foreign particles, liquids, wiping paper/clothing fibers or lint to get inside the system. These may clog or damage the system.

•

DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the diesel fuel tank. If DEF is mixed with the diesel fuel, engine/fuel system could get damaged.

•

If DEF is spilled over vehicle components and metal surfaces, rinse with water or wipe off with sponge and water. DEF residues will corrode the components and metal surfaces, painted body panels

•

Do not refill the DEF with Engine ON or ignition ON state.

•

When opening the DEF filler cap, ammonia vapors may escape. Refill DEF in a well - ventilated area only.

•

Ensure that DEF does not come into contact with skin, eyes, or clothing.

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

During the regeneration process, ensure not to park the vehicle near any flammable materials as you may observe hot emission gases from exhaust pipe.

To avoid burns & personal injury, keep yourself away from exhaust system.

Follow speed limits & traffic regulations as defined by local jurisdiction while driving.

8 OPENING AND CLOSING THE VEHICLE

8.1 Smart Key Remote

Smart Key Remote System enables you to enter or exit your vehicle without the need to manually lock/unlock the doors.

You can lock/unlock and start/stop the vehicle, lock/unlock the tailgate, enable remote cooling using the key fob. To do this, you only need to carry the key fob with you.

A: Lock

B: Unlock

C: Tailgate Release

D: Remote Cooling*

E: LED

The key fob also includes an emergency key blade, which allows access to a mechanical key for emergency situations, as when the PKE battery is low.

•

While locking and unlocking the vehicle passively, the distance between the smart key and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).

•

To prevent relay attacks, store your key fob in an RFID blocking pouch when not in use.

•

Do not leave the key fob inside the vehicle, as it may lead to unintended unlocking or theft.

•

Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off RF waves.

•

Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard or bonnet under direct sunlight.

•

Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an ultrasonic washer.

•

The key fob can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity.

Never leave the key fob in the vehicle when children are present.

Avoid placing key fobs on top of the wireless charger.

A child could accidentally start the vehicle, activate power windows or other controls, or even move the vehicle, potentially causing injury to bystanders or passengers.

Leaving the key fob inside the vehicle may allow unauthorized access, potentially leading to vehicle theft or unintended vehicle operation. Any damages or losses resulting from failure to secure the key fob properly will not be covered under your warranty.

8.1.1 Remote Key LED Indication

LED present on remote would be indicating the user about the remote lock / unlock / tailgate button input.

8.1.2 To Lock and Arm the Vehicle with RKE

Press the LOCK button on the key fob for locking and arming the vehicle.

Hazard lamps flash once - If all the doors in the vehicle are locked and armed successfully using key fob.

Hazard lamps flash five times along with an alarm - If any of the doors (including bonnet) in the vehicle are open.

If alarm is in mute condition only the hazard lamps will flash. To activate alarm, press lock and unlock button together. Now both Hazard lamps flash and alarm will work.

8.1.3 Unlock and Disarm the Vehicle with RKE

Press the UNLOCK button on the key fob to unlock doors and disarm the vehicle.

Hazard lamps flash twice

If there was no theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.

Front DRL & Tail lamps flash twice (If equipped)

If there was no theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.

Hazard lamps flash four times along with an alarm

If there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.

Upon the remote lock, if any of the doors are not closed properly or left open, the hazard lamps will flash 5 times to indicate the same.

If the driver door unlock is enabled through CID, pressing the unlock button on the key fob once will only unlock the driver door. To unlock all doors, press the unlock button on the key fob again.

8.1.4 Remote Cooling (If Equipped)

XUV 7X0 is equipped with a remote cooling function that can be activated using the key fob. This feature allows you to cool down the interior of the vehicle remotely, which can be especially useful in hot weather.

Press the remote cooling button on the key fob. The vehicle’s cooling system will activate and begin lowering the cabin temperature.

This remote cooling system is designed for added comfort, allowing the vehicle to reach a more comfortable temperature before you enter.

8.1.5 Walk Away Locking (WAL) and Approach Unlock (If Equipped)

Walk Away Locking (WAL):

Vehicle will lock automatically when user is having valid key fob and leaving a defined area around the vehicle.

When all doors, bonnet and tailgate are closed and latched, and user is leaving the vehicle with valid key fob within 2 - 3 meter radius of the vehicle then all the doors will get locked automatically.

User can Enable/Disable WAL function from CID, Settings >> Vehicle Settings>> Access >> Walk away locking (Enable/Disable).

For smooth functioning of Walk Away Locking Ensure the below:

•

Walk away lock is enabled through CID.

•

All the doors including Bonnet & Tail gate are closed properly.

•

Ensure the vehicle is not parked near a transformer or beneath high-voltage electrical cables, as these may interfere with key fob communication

•

Don't use any aftermarket key fob cover.

Approach Unlock:

Vehicle will unlock automatically when user is having valid key fob and approaching a defined area around the vehicle.

When all doors, bonnet and tailgate are closed and lock state, and user is approaching the vehicle with valid key fob within 1 meter radius of the driver or co-driver side door, then vehicle will unlock automatically.

User can Enable/Disable approach unlock function from CID, Settings >> Vehicle Settings>> Access >> Approach unlock (Enable/Disable).

For smooth functioning of Approach unlock Ensure the below:

•

Approach unlock is enabled through CID.

•

Ensure whether the vehicle was in sleep condition for more than 2 days

•

Ensure whether the vehicle was previously not locked with a mechanical key blade.

•

Ensure the vehicle is not parked near a transformer or beneath high-voltage electrical cables, as these may interfere with key fob communication

•

Don't use any aftermarket key fob cover.

If vehicle is left unattended in lock state for more than 2 days then approach unlock will get disable.

If any one key fob is left inside the vehicle, the Walk Away Lock (WAL) and Approach Unlock feature may not activate. To ensure the vehicle is securely locked, please manually lock it using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) or Passive Locking feature.

Frequent use of features like “Approach Unlock” and “Walk-away Lock” can lead to faster battery drain in key fob. Battery depletion in the key fob due to normal wear and tear is not covered under the vehicle warranty. The user is responsible for maintaining and replacing the key fob battery as needed to ensure uninterrupted operation.

Once the Approach Unlock and Walk Away Lock features are enabled, ensure the key fob is not within the 4 meter proximity zone after the vehicle is locked, as this could prevent the vehicle from locking properly or cause it to unlock unintentionally.

The Approach Unlock and WAL features are convenience feature. but may not work under all conditions. If these functions fail, customers are responsible for locking or unlocking using alternative methods such as Passive, Remote, or Master actuators.

After enabling Approach Unlock and WAL, when a key fob is within a 3 meter range after locking the vehicle via passive or RKE, the key searching mechanism (indicated by the blinking light on the key fob) will deactivate after 2 minute to prolong battery life and disabling the feature Approach Unlock and WAL.

For the enhanced security, vehicle auto-disables “Approach Unlock” and “Walk-away Lock” after every 2 days of vehicle inactivity.

After the ignition is turned OFF and the doors are locked, and if the vehicle stays in sleep mode beyond 2 days, the Approach Unlock will not work. The feature can be activated by unlocking the vehicle using PKE/RKE, followed by opening and closing the door.

If the user moves in and out of the key detection zone (3 m) more than three times during an Approach Unlock event, both Approach Unlock and Walk-Away Lock will be disabled. The feature can be activated by unlocking the vehicle using PKE/RKE, followed by opening and closing the door.

If the user enters the approach unlock zone(1m) and is present within the 3m range without opening any doors, all doors will automatically relock after 15 seconds

If the user enters the key detection zone (3 m) during an Approach Unlock (SAU) event but remains outside the Approach Unlock zone (1 m) for more than 2 minutes, both WAL and SAU features will be disabled. The feature can be activated by unlocking the vehicle using PKE/RKE, followed by opening and closing the door

If the user stays inside the key detection zone (3 m) during an Walk-Away Lock action for more than 2 minutes, Doors will not get locked and both WAL and SAU features will be disabled. These features can be re-enabled by performing a PKE/RKE unlock, followed by opening and closing the door.

If the vehicle was previously locked using the mechanical key blade, the SAU feature will not work.

8.1.6 Remote Function

•

Auto Locking: All doors will get locked automatically when:

•

All doors are closed properly.

•

Vehicle speed is greater than 20 km/h.

Auto Locking ON DOOR OPEN: Once the auto lock has been activated, if any door is opened, then the auto lock will reactivate only if all doors are closed, the vehicle speed goes below 5 km/h and further crosses 20 km/h.

Auto Locking ON MASTER ACTUATOR UNLOCK: Once the auto lock has been activated, if any door is opened, then the auto lock will reactivate only if all doors are closed, the vehicle speed goes below 5 km/h and further crosses 20 km/h.

Auto Unlocking – Auto Unlock of all doors will happen in the following conditions:

•

When ignition is switched from ON to OFF, or

•

In the event of a crash.

Auto Re-locking: Auto re-lock of all doors will happen when:

•

No door status change for 45 second after unlocking the vehicle using RKE/PKE.

Search Function

Press the tailgate button on the keyfob, 2 times within 2 second to locate the vehicle in a parking lot. Search alarm can also bring attention to the vehicle and surrounding area, warning about an intruder or seek for help.

When the SEARCH function is ON, the hazard lamps flash along with an alarm for 30 second. In this mode:

•

Pressing any button on the keyfob again switches OFF the alarm.

•

Pressing the UNLOCK button switches OFF the alarm and disarms/unlocks all doors.

The search function works both during the Locked/Unlocked conditions of the vehicle.

8.1.7 Mute / Un-mute Function

The chirps can be muted / un-muted. Press the LOCK & UNLOCK buttons together for 3 second to toggle between MUTE/UN-MUTE mode.

Hazard lamps will flash once to indicate un-mute to mute condition. Hazard lamp and chirp will flash once to indicate Mute to un-mute.

In the un-muted condition, alarm chirps can be heard during Auto Re-lock (1 Chirp), RKE Lock when door open (5 Chirps) and RKE Unlock if there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period (4 Chirps).

In the mute condition, only hazard would flash and alarm chirps would not be audible.

8.1.8 Theft Detent Warning System

Arming of Vehicle: Once all the doors are closed and locked with remote by pressing lock button, theft detent warning system would get activated.

Theft Detent Trigger: If any one tries to manipulate the ignition or manually opens the doors or manually unlocks the doors. Theft detent warning system alarm gets activated by blinking the turn lamps and blowing burglar horn for 27 second. Once the alarm is triggered, it can be disabled by pressing unlock button on remote or switching on the ignition by using valid key.

The security system will be activated when the vehicle is locked using the PKE key fob. Locking the doors with the manual key will also activate the security system.

When the vehicle is armed by PKE, opening the door from the inside by operating the door inner handle or opening the door from the outside using the key will be treated as unauthorised activating the vehicle security alarm. If this occurs, the alarm can be disarmed by either pressing the ‘UNLOCK’ button on the PKE or turning ON the ignition followed by a successful authentication.

8.1.9 Remote Key Operating Range

Using key fob, you can lock/arm or unlock/disarm the vehicle from distances approx. 20 m.

If there is reduction in key fob detection range, please follow the steps below:

Check the distance: The remote key may be too far from the vehicle. Stand closer to the vehicle during rain or bad weather.

Check the location: Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signals. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the remote key higher, and try again. Moreover, closeness to a radio transmitter such as radio station tower, airport transmitter, mobile or CB radios may lead to reduction in range of key fob.

Check the Remote key battery: See battery replacement procedure, given later in this section.

If the key fob is still not working correctly, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

8.1.10 Remote Battery

Battery Specification

Battery Voltage	3 V
Battery Capacity	225 mAh
Battery Model No.	2032

Key Fob Battery Replacement

If the remote operation is inconsistent when any of the buttons are pressed, then it indicates that the remote battery is weak.

To replace the battery follow the below steps:

Use a small flat head screwdriver to open the battery cover.

Insert a small flat head screwdriver in to the battery secure cover and rotate it in anti-clockwise direction to open.

Gently pull out the battery out and discard it.

Insert new batteries of 3V type (Battery No. CR 2032). While fitting the new battery, ensure the positive side of the batteries face up. After inserting the new battery, reverse the opening procedure to close the battery cover.

While prying the Remote case, take care not to damage the battery.

Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.

Pull out the battery and discard the same. Insert new battery of same type. While fitting the new battery, ensure the positive side of the batteries face up. Align both the halves of the Remote casing and press to snap fit. Check operation of the Remote.

The Batteries are Lithium Ion batteries. They should be kept away from children.

This product contains a lithium button cell. If the button cell is swallowed, severe internal burns can occur within a mere two hours and lead to death.

Keep new or removed batteries away from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, discontinue use and keep away from children. If you think that batteries have been swallowed or stuck in any part of the body, seek medical help immediately.

8.1.11 Key Fob Tray

The Key fob is to be kept in the above shown key fob tray when the system requests, like in the case of the below error message in the DID.

This message is displayed only when the PKE system fails to detect the key fob which is inside the vehicle when the user is trying to Switch ON the ignition.

On pressing the Start/Stop switch 1st time with the key fob in the key fob tray below the armrest. The Start-stop switch LED will blink in red color, with the above error message will be displayed again in the DID.

In this case, if you press the Start/Stop switch again before the above error message in the DID goes away the 2nd time, the vehicle will start in Back-Up mode, if the Clutch(MT)/Brake(AT) pedal is pressed.

8.1.12 Smart key Alerts

Alert	Operating Conditions
	The warning will be triggered when the vehicle Ignition is in ON condition with the Brake pedal pressed & the user is pressing SSS to start Vehicle & Gear position is not in park or neutral. (If Equipped)
	The warning will be triggered when vehicle Ignition ON or Engine running condition, user is pressing SSS to turn OFF Vehicle & Gear position is not in park. (If Equipped)
	The warning will be triggered when Start Stop switch is Malfunction. Kindly contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
	The warning will be triggered when Key fob is not getting detected by the system. Users need to keep the key in the armrest Key fob Tray and then press the start/stop switch to turn ON the vehicle.
	The warning will be triggered when vehicle ignition in OFF condition. When user tries to lock the vehicle using driver door PKE trigger switch, but key is inside the vehicle.
	The warning will be triggered when vehicle is in cranked or in ignition ON condition, but key is not inside the vehicle.
	The warning will be triggered when Key Fob battery is Low.
	This is information to user In Ignition on to start Car by pressing Brake pedal along with SSS Press AT variant.
	This is information to user In Ignition on to start Car by pressing Clutch pedal along with SSS press MT variant.

8.1.13 If Smart Key fob is Lost

If you have lost the programmed PKE Key fob, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for procuring a new Smart Key.

While programming a new key set, you will have to submit all the keys available with you, to an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Please note that there is a limitation (max. 2 keys at a time) to the number of keys that can be ordered. The minimum timeframe required to supply the duplicate keys is 10 days after all the formalities are completed. Please contact the Authorized Mahindra Service Center to understand the formalities involved.

If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to deactivate the anti-theft devices or start the engine.

If the key is stolen or lost, communicate to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for de-activating the function of the lost or stolen key. This is essential to avoid unauthorized access using the misplaced key.

Only PKE transmitters programmed to your vehicle electronics can be used for remote locking and unlocking of your vehicle.

8.1.14 Key Fob Limitations

When the vehicle key fob is not working properly, it may be due to Radio Frequency (RF) interference caused by an external source like Transformer, Amateur Radio, etc, which emits power levels that is higher than the vehicle key fob. This interference may be resulting in RF signal not being received by system controller.

Customer may not get panic due to this non-function of key fob. After moving from the interference zone, key fob may start working properly.

If still key fob not working then contact a Authorized Mahindra Service center for assistance.

8.2 Doors

8.2.1 Flush Outer Door Handle

XUV7XO comes with the flush outer door handle. It comes with two types:

i). Manually operated ii). Electrically operated

i). Manually operated

•

Unlock the center locking with Smart key fob unlock button.

•

Push and pull the flush handle once and door handle will popup as shown below.

•

Pull the handle firmly outwards and open the door.

•

Door handle will return to the original position automatically when the handle is released after opening the door.

ii). Electrically operated

•

Unlock the center locking with Smart key fob unlock button.

•

Door handle will popup automatically as shown without touching the handle.

•

Push and pull the flush handle firmly outwards and open the door.

•

Door handle will return to its original position when the vehicle is locked by PKE key fob or the vehicle speed exceeds 7 km/h.

8.2.2 To Open a Door from Inside

Pull the door lever away from the door and push the door outward to open.

8.2.3 Locking / Unlocking Individual Doors from Inside

Pull the door lever away from the door and push the door outward to open.

A: Lock

B: Unlock

ndividual doors can be locked/unlocked from inside by the respective door lock tabs. Lift the lock tab outwards to unlock or press the tab inwards to lock that particular door.

Locking the driver door from inside activates the central locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle. Refer to Central Locking section for further details.

8.2.4 Manual Locking/Unlocking Doors from Outside

Push the handle slightly as shown in the image.

Pull the handle firmly outwards and grip & pull the handle further to gain access for the key.

The driver door can be manually locked/unlocked from outside by using conventional key. The key is bidirectional; you can insert it into the keyhole either way. Turn the key anti-clockwise to lock or clockwise to unlock the door.

Conventional lock is on driver door side only, No key lock set on codriver door.

For unlocking insert the key and rotate it in clockwise gently (don’t apply abusive load). Take out the key to return the handle to nominal position and pull back the handle to open the door.

For locking, Pull the handle and same time press the door with knee so that door is not getting unlatched (as handle goes to release mode) insert the key and rotate the key anti-clockwise gently. Take out the key and leave the handle to nominal position. Pull the handle once to ensure locking happen properly.

A keyhole is provided in the driver door, to lock/unlock the doors manually from outside. Locking the driver door from outside activates the central locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle. Refer to Central Locking section for further details.

8.2.5 Locking / Unlocking the Tailgate

Press the Tailgate release button for 1 second on the remote to unlock the tail door. The hazard lamp flash three times indicating the same.

Then press the tail gate release switch on the bottom of the tailgate within 45 second as shown in the illustration and pull tailgate to open.

To close the tailgate, lower the tailgate half way down and allow it fall on its own weight. The door will be locked automatically.

8.2.6 Smart Key — PKE Operations (If Equipped)

Locking the vehicle – Through Flush Handle (Electrical Handle)

1. Carry the Smart Key Fob.

2. Close all the doors.

3. Push the handle to lock the vehicle.

4. The hazard warning lights will blink once to indicate the locking (5 blinks and 5 chirps will be provided if engine bonnet is open while locking).

•

Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7 m from the outside door handle.

•

Vehicle can be locked centrally by pressing the door handle with the Smart key fob in the proximity (Smart key fob should be nearer to the triggered side). For E.g., locking/unlocking of the driver door is possible only if Smart Key is around the driver area.

•

Even after pressing the outside door handle button, if the doors do not lock, a chime is heard along with the hazard blinking for 5 times, then one of the following situations are possible reason:

–

Smart Key fob is left inside the vehicle

–

One of the doors not closed properly

•

On attempting to lock by pressing the button in door handle, an alert will displayed in DID, if the steering is not locked.

•

With the one Smart Key fob inside, on locking the vehicle using other key fob/2nd key fob, the key which is kept inside would get deactivated completely for the security of the vehicle. To make the key active again, the vehicle should be unlocked either using Smart Key or by pressing remote unlock using the other key fob with which previously the vehicle was locked.

•

On performing PKE passive lock with key fob in your possession in ignition ON state, "Key Not in Vehicle" alert will be triggered in DID along with chirp & hazard lamps flash for 5 times and vehicle will remain in unlock state.

•

On performing key fob remote lock with all doors closed in ignition ON state, no alert will be triggered and vehicle will remain in unlock state.

Unlocking the vehicle:

Carry the Smart key fob.

Press the button in the door handle.

All doors would unlock and Front DRL & tail lamps flash twice.

•

Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7 m from the outside driver door handle.

•

Vehicle can be unlocked centrally by pressing the door handle only when the key is in same side of the driver door handle is pressed.

Unlocking the Tail door alone:

1. Carry the Smart Key Fob

2. Press the trunk release button in the tail door and pull the tail door.

3. Tail door would unlock and hazard warning lights will blink 3 times.

4. On closing the door, tail door would get locked automatically.

•

Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7 m from the outside door handle. Tail door can be unlocked by pressing the button in the tail door only when the key is in range from the tail door.

8.3 Central Locking System

All doors of the vehicle can be simultaneously locked or unlocked from the driver door.

8.3.1 Central Locking/Unlocking All Doors from Outside

To manually lock/unlock all the doors from outside using the conventional key, turn the key anti-clockwise / clockwise respectively in the driver door keyhole.

If any door was unlocked or not closed completely when central locking activated. It will only get locked when the door is completely closed.

Central locking ALL the doors in the vehicle can also be done using the key fob. Refer the relevant sections in this chapter for more details.

8.3.2 Central Locking/Unlocking All Doors from Inside

Press the driver door lock tab down (A) to lock or lift the lock tab up (B) to unlock all doors simultaneously.

Anti-Lock Out

Master Actuator Lock at Door open (Except Driver Door) — If any door is opened and driver door is in closed condition:

•

Vehicle speed is below 7 km/h - On actuating master actuator lock manually, master actuator will get lock and unlock immediately for the first time. On actuating master actuator lock again, vehicle will get locked.

•

Vehicle speed above 7 km/h - On actuating master actuator lock manually, vehicle will get locked for the first time itself.

If driver door is open and master actuator lock is performed, vehicle will not get locked.

8.3.3 Child Safety Rear Door lock (If Equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with left and right-side child safety rear door locks. When the lock mechanism is engaged, the rear door(s) cannot be opened from the inside. The door(s) can only be opened from the outside.
To activate the child safety right rear door lock, push the lever down (A) till you hear a distinct click indicating the activation of the child lock.
To de-activate the child safety right rear door lock, pull the lever up (B) till you hear a distinct click indicating the deactivation of the child lock.

A: Activate/Lock

B: De-activate/Unlock

If the rear doors are not operable from inside, ensure that the child safety locks have been disabled.

Mahindra strongly recommends that the child safety rear door locks be used whenever there are children travelling in the rear seat.

8.4 Engine START/STOP Switch (SSS)

The engine can be started or stopped by pressing the Start Stop Switch (SSS), with the valid Smart Key Fob inside the vehicle.

Whenever the doors are opened or the door handle button is pressed, the engine start/stop Switch will be illuminated and will go off after few seconds.

Upon any fault identification by the system in the start/stop Switch (SSS), an alert would be provided in the DID for few seconds. Please visit the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately to rectify the problem.

Even with the failure in the start/stop Switch (SSS), vehicle's normal function may work which depends on the severity of the failure. Please visit the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center to rectify the problem immediately.

Engine start/stop Switch positions:

To operate the engine start /stop Switch (SSS)to its intended function, PKE key fob should be inside the vehicle.

OFF: To turn off the engine, stop the vehicle and press the engine start/stop Switch once. Status LED in the engine start /stop Switch goes OFF to indicate the OFF position.

If the Engine is not switching OFF after pressing the Engine Start Stop Switch (SSS) (One Press), then press and Hold start/stop Switch (SSS) for more than 5 second (Long press SSS) to switch OFF the engine. Contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center at the earliest.

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic anti-theft steering column lock. The steering wheel locks when the engine start/stop Switch is in OFF position to protect against the theft. The steering wheel locks automatically when the driver door is opened or 30 seconds after engine start stop Switch changes to OFF position. If the steering wheel is not locked properly when you open the driver door and on attempting to lock the vehicle, a warning chirp along with the hazard blinks thrice. Try locking the steering wheel again (by toggling Engine Start/Stop Switch). If the problem is not solved, we recommend to take the vehicle to nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

Ignition ON: To switch ON the ignition, press the engine start/stop Switch when the switch position is in OFF without depressing the clutch pedal and with the PKE Key Fob inside the vehicle. Status LED in the engine start/stop Switch will turn red to indicate the IGN ON position and the vehicle is ready for starting.

OFF	ON

Keeping the system in the ignition ON position for longer time (will be noticeable by the LED lamp of the SSS remaining ON) without engine running, can drain the battery. Switch OFF the system if engine is not to be started for long duration.

Vehicle ignition would not turn to ON position on any of the following conditions:

•

If the electronic steering lock is not getting unlocked.

•

A warning would be displayed in the DID screen for few seconds.

If the steering wheel doesn’t unlock properly, press the start/stop Switch while turning the steering wheel right/left to release the tension on the lock.

Still if you are not able to turn ON the IGN, please contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

•

When engine start/stop Switch is ON or engine is in running condition with vehicle at standstill and if any door is opened & closed, the system checks for the key fob.

If the key fob is not inside the vehicle, an alert in the DID is displayed along with hazard lamps flash & chirp for 5 times to indicate that key is not detected inside the vehicle.

Bring the Smart Key Fob inside the vehicle or keep the key in the detectable position whenever you are inside the vehicle.

Starting the vehicle

Manual Transmission: To start the engine, press the clutch and press the engine start/stop Switch once with the key inside the vehicle. The engine can be started from any position (OFF / ON) of the start/stop Switch.

Automatic Transmission: To start the engine, Gear Lever shall be in Park Position, press the Brake pedal and press the engine start/stop Switch once with the key inside the vehicle. The engine can be started from any position (OFF / ON) of the start/stop Switch.

Ensure the gear lever is in neutral/Park position before starting.

If engine start/stop switch is pressed without pressing the clutch (MT) / Brake (AT) pedal, engine will not start, and the vehicle power modes will change as follows: OFF→ ON →OFF→ ON.

If the engine start/stop switch is pressed from the OFF position directly, along with the clutch (MT) / Brake (AT) in depressed position, there may be a small delay in the engine cranking. This is normal and is not a fault.

Never press the engine start/stop switch while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This will result in the engine turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems. This may lead to loss of direction control and braking function, leading to an accident.

Even if the key fob is not there in the cabin. The engine will keep running, until it is switched off, after that it can not be restarted in absence of the key.

Before leaving the driver seat, always make sure engine start/stop switch is in OFF position and always take the PKE Key Fob with you. If the Ignition remains ON and the doors are locked. The central locking system will give 3 chirps and flashes to indicate. This can cause battery to be drained off.

BACK up Start: If the key fob battery is low, the key may not be detected on pressing SSS and SSS LED will be blinking in red color. In such a situation, press the start/stop Switch once while the status LED in the Switch is blinking Red and the below error message is displayed in the DID.

Now place the key fob in the key fob tray with the Clutch(MT)/Brake (AT) pedal pressed and then push the Start-Stop Switch twice to Start the engine.

On pressing the Start/Stop Switch 1st time with the key fob in the key fob tray below the armrest. The Start-stop Switch LED will blink in red color, with the above error message will be displayed again in the DID. In this case, if you press the Start/Stop Switch again vehicle will start in Back-Up mode, if the Clutch(MT)/Brake(AT) pedal is pressed.

Back-up Mode : When the key fob battery is critically low to detect the key fob inside the vehicle or the battery is dead or not available. This mode is triggered by the PKE to understand the condition to Switch ON ignition and to start the vehicle engine.

If key fob battery is detected low by the PKE system, an alert would be triggered. Change the battery by following the procedure as mentioned in the section for battery replacement.

Key fob battery low can be detected only if the key has been continuously used in the vehicle. Keeping the key outside the vehicle for longer duration and then using it with the drained battery cannot be detected.

8.5 Vehicle locking/Unlocking in an Emergency Situation

If the PKE Key Fob does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the doors by using the mechanical key:

Refer to Manual Locking/Unlocking Doors from Outside (Mechanical/Electrical Handle) section for more details.

It is strictly not advisable to leave the key fobs in the vehicle. Vehicle can be started by any unauthorized person.

A maximum of 2 Keys can be registered to a vehicle. If you lose a key, we strictly recommend to contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately to block the lost key and to get a new key.

The PKE Key Fob may not work if any of the following occurs:

•

If the vehicle is close to a radio station, airport, or an area where there is a possibility of large radio transmissions which can interfere with the normal operation of the PKE.

•

The PKE Key Fob is near a mobile or a cellular phone or some electronic gadgets like Laptop/Tablets. The signal from the PKE could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smart phone. Avoid placing the PKE and your electronic gadgets in the same trouser or jacket pocket or in the bag and maintain adequate distance between the two devices.

•

Another vehicle PKE key fob is being operated close to your vehicle.

•

PKE Key Fob kept inside the glove box or top bin in the instrument panel may not be detected sometimes. Keep the PKE Key Fob in the visible zone or in your pocket for getting it detected.

•

Keep the PKE key fob away from the water or any liquid. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

Make sure the vehicle ignition is in OFF state, whenever leaving the vehicle even with the key. By keeping the vehicle ignition in ON/ACC state will hamper the vehicle security.

Do not hand over the PKE Key Fob to any unauthorized person or service provider. Your vehicle security system may be compromised in doing so.

8.6 Engine Immobilizer System

An Engine Immobilizer System is a security system that prevents the vehicle from being operated by an unauthorized person. The Engine immobilizer prevents the engine from being started unless it recognizes signals from the correct coded key. When a wrong key is inserted or a theft attempt is detected, the alarm is set off, and the hazard lamps flash along with a siren.

The system is automatically activated when the key is removed from the ignition.

8.6.1 Features of the Immobilizer System:

•

Prevents the vehicle being started by anyone not in possession of the correct vehicle key.

•

The vehicle is automatically protected after the key is removed from the ignition/vehicle in PKE. At every ignition ON, if the vehicle does not recognize the correct key code, the engine check lamp will blink and security tell tale lamp will illuminate and the engine cannot be started.

•

The vehicle will not be protected until the key has been taken out of the ignition/vehicle in PKE.

If the engine check lamp flashes or remains continuously illuminated after the ignition being switched ON, there is a system malfunction. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

With the correct coded key in the vehicle and pressing the SSS ON, automatically recognizes and authenticates the system. It enables the engine to start.

In the event of the vehicle not starting with the correct key, switch off the ignition for a minimum of 1 minute and attempt to start the vehicle again.

Do not modify, remove or disassemble the engine immobilizer system. Any unauthorized changes or modifications can affect proper operation of the system and will void your warranty.

The security system will be activated when the vehicle is locked using the PKE key fob. Locking the doors with the manual key will also activate the security system.

Using the ignition key blade to open the diver door, when the vehicle was locked and armed with PKE key fob, in this condition if any of the door is opened which results in door switch status change will be treated as unauthorized by the system setting and this will trigger the alarm. Press the unlock button on the PKE key fob to off the alarm.

8.7 Opening and Closing the Bonnet

The bonnet release lever is in the driver side foot well area, below the instrument panel. To open bonnet follow the steps below:

1. Pull the lever below the driver side instrument panel to release the bonnet.

2. Lift the bonnet a little to access the safety latch holding the bonnet striker. This safety latch is located below the bonnet at the center.

3. Lift the safety latch and lift the bonnet.

4. bonnet is supported by a stay rod.

Be careful while opening the bonnet immediately after a drive; the engine compartment will be very hot.

Always double check to be sure that the bonnet is firmly latched before driving away. If it is not latched properly, the bonnet can open while the vehicle is being driven, causing a loss of visibility, resulting in an accident.

Do not move the vehicle with the bonnet in the raised position, as vision is obstructed.

To close the bonnet, follow the below steps:

Remove the stay rod supporting the bonnet by slightly lifting the bonnet.

Bring the bonnet near to its self-opening/closing position.

Now, push the bonnet to close and ensure the primary latch is engaged.

Before driving off, check bonnet is locked properly with primary latch fully engaged.

Bonnet Open Hazard - When the bonnet is open and vehicle is in unlock condition:

•

Hazard lamps flash continuously to alert the user that the bonnet is open.

•

Hazard DID telltale also flashes.

To stop the warning, do any one of the following:

•

Close the bonnet.

•

Press the hazard button TWICE.

•

Change the turn signal stalk position.

•

Drive the vehicle > 10 km/h.

8.8 Fuel-Lid Opening and Closing

Follow the below steps to open the Fuel lid:

1. Press the UNLOCK button on PKE.

2. Then press the fuel lid gently once to open.

Diesel

Diesel should be filled in diesel filler cap.

Petrol

Petrol should be filled in petrol filler cap.

Diesel should not be filled in blue (DEF) filler cap.

3. Turn the fuel cap anti-clockwise to open. Refuel and put the cap back in its place and tighten in the clockwise direction till three distinct clicks are heard. Close the fuel lid shut and press the fuel lid once again to make it flush with body.

Ensure the fuel cap and lid are securely closed before starting the vehicle.

Fuel filler lid cannot be released whenever the vehicle locked condition.

8.9 Manual Fuel Lid Override

Follow the below process to open the fuel lid manually in case of any issue in electrical circuits:

1. Press and Open the trim cover on Left side of luggage compartment.

2. Unhook and Pull the blue color knob as shown in the illustration to unlock the fuel lid manually.

3. Then press the fuel lid gently once to open.

4. Turn the fuel cap anti-clockwise to open. Refuel and put the cap back in its place and tighten in the clockwise direction till three distinct clicks are heard. Close the fuel lid shut and press the fuel lid once again to make it flush with body.

Ensure the fuel cap and lid are securely closed before starting the vehicle.

Do not pull the cable with high force or pull excessively as it may damage the locking mechanism.

8.10 Tailgate Safety Release Lever

Your vehicle is equipped with the tailgate emergency release lever located on the bottom of the tailgate. If someone is inadvertently locked in the luggage compartment, they can use the tailgate emergency release lever by using a screwdriver to open the tailgate from inside.

The tailgate can be opened by the following steps:

Insert the screwdriver into the hole.

Slide the screwdriver to the left side and hold it in same position to open the tail gate.

9 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS

9.1 Control Switches

The driver door switch bank is located on the driver door armrest / handle and controls and the various functions:

A	Right ORVM Select Switch
B	ORVM Fold / Unfold
C	Driver Door Window Switch
D	Rear Right Window Switch
E	Door Center Locking / Unlocking Switch
F	Power Windows Locking Switch
G	Rear Left Window Switch
H	Co–driver Door Window Switch
I	ORVM Adjustment Switch
J	Left ORVM Select Switch

9.1.1 Driver Door Power Window Switch

Power windows can be operated when the ignition is in “ON” position.

The driver can operate all the power windows in the vehicle through the driver door window switch on the driver door armrest / handle.

Other passengers in the vehicle can raise or lower their respective window glasses individually by using the separate switches provided on each of the door trim pads / armrests.

To lower / raise the window glass, press / lift the respective power window switch accordingly.

Do not operate the power windows frequently when the ignition is OFF. This will drain the vehicle battery.

If you operate the switches often during a short period of time, the system might become inoperable for a certain duration to prevent damage due to overheating. The system will return to normal functioning shortly. In such scenario, customer should wait for 1-2 minute and should not operate the switch during this period. After 2 minute user may operate the switch.

It is recommended to operate one window switch at a time.

Make sure heads, hands, arms or any other body parts or objects are out of the way before operating the power window. Body parts or objects may get caught causing injuries or vehicle damage.

Never use your body parts deliberately to test the anti-pinch function. The power window may reverse the direction but there is a risk of injury.

9.1.2 Power Window Lock Switch

The power window lock switch to enable or disable operation of rear passenger window switches.

To disable the rear passenger power windows, press the window lock switch down.

To revert to normal operation, press the window lock switch again.

9.1.3 Central Door Locking Switch

The driver can lock / unlock all the doors by pressing this switch as shown in the image.

9.1.4 Smart Power Window with Anti-Pinch

This is applicable for driver door only (If Equipped).

Smart power window is one of the significant safety features with the anti-pinch function, which automatically reverses the direction of glass if an obstruction is detected during the auto up mode.

This feature consists of three functions:

•

Auto UP

•

Auto DOWN

•

Anti-Pinch during Auto UP

Auto UP: Pull the power window switch up for a moment and release. The glass moves all the way up automatically. You do not need to hold the switch till the glass closes.

Auto DOWN: Press the power window switch down for a moment and release. The glass moves all the way down automatically. You do not need to hold the switch till the glass comes down.

Anti-Pinch during Auto UP (If Equipped): During auto UP if any obstacle is detected with the force value more than 100 N, The controller senses the load and reverses the direction of the glass from the point of pinch detection.

Driver door power window can be opened or closed through key fob also. Press key fob lock button for more than 1 second to close the power window. Press key fob unlock button more than 1 second to open the power window.

Thermal Protection is active for all modes of operation, and once activated, up movements are not allowed for 30 second, and down movements are allowed if the window is not stalled in either of the stall positions (top stall/bottom stall).

Thermal Protection is tuned for 16 cycles before 1st activation and inhibition duration is 30 second.

After 30 second thermal protection is de-activated, and the number of cycles available after inhibition is dependent on the idle duration. Right after thermal protection inhibition duration of 30 second, 2 cycles are available.

Do not disconnect the vehicle battery while the power window is in penetration.

Extended Power Window: After turning off the ignition, all the doors power windows can be operated for up to 3 minute.

9.2 Mirrors

9.2.1 IRVM - Manual Type (If Equipped)

The interior rear view mirror provides the rear view information to the driver through the rear windshield. It also assists during reversing. User can manually adjust the rearview mirror by pushing or pulling its adjusting lever to avoid blindness at night due to other vehicles behind you.

When you are not able to see the back of your vehicle at night, adjust the rearview mirror by holding the mirror body and pushing or pulling it to a desired angle so that you can secure a clear rear view.

9.2.2 IRVM - Auto Dimming (If Equipped)

The reflection rate of the inside rearview mirror can be automatically adjusted by the light intensity from a vehicle behind you by pressing the auto dimming IRVM ON/OFF option on CID screen.

Auto Dimming IRVM can be enabled or disabled from CID, select:

Settings >> Vehicle Settings >> Mirrors, Tap on the Auto Dimming IRVM toggle button to Enable/Disable.

•

Under the following conditions, auto dimming function may not operate properly.

•

When the rear vehicle’s head lamp is not beamed directly to the inside rearview mirror’s sensor.

•

When the rear window has a dark tinted glass.

•

When the gear selector lever is in the R position, auto dimming function will be cancelled to obtain the best rearview.

•

For your safety, never adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.

•

The electrolyte may come out when the mirror is broken. Do not allow it to contact your skin or eyes. If you accidentally get it in your eyes, flush with water and see your doctor.

•

For your safety, adjust the mirror before driving off the vehicle.

•

If front sensor is blocked /hide by sticker or object, auto dimming may enable in day time and visibility will be poor.

9.2.3 Manual ORVM (If Equipped)

Exterior Rear view mirror on both left and right sides provides the maximum side rear view information to the driver.

Both the ORVMs are hinged and can be manually folded or unfolded. This avoids hindrances in narrow areas and parking slots. Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support, while folding or unfolding.

Objects seen in convex mirrors are much closer than they appear. Do not overestimate the distance of the objects that you see in the mirrors.

9.2.4 Electric Adjustable ORVM (If Equipped)

The electric exterior mirror adjustment switch is located on the driver door trim/handle. The joystick on the switch can be used to select the left/right mirror and also to adjust the respective mirror.

ORVM Folding/Unfolding

Fold Function: To fold ORVM assembly, when the ignition is turned on, press the button once to fold the mirrors and press it again to unfold them.

ORVM folds automatically when:

•

The mirror is already unfold condition and the doors locked with the remote from outside the vehicle.

Unfold Function: To unfold the ORVM assembly, select the respective side switch (R or L), then press mirror fold switch to fold ORVM when the ignition is in ON condition.

ORVM unfolds automatically when:

•

Mirror is already in folded condition and ignition is turned ON.

9.2.5 ORVM Auto Dip on Reverse (If Equipped)

The Auto-Dip function in Outside Rear View Mirrors (ORVM) assists the driver in achieving a convenient mirror position while reversing the vehicle. whenever reverse gear is engaged, the ORVM will automatically tilt to the preset position. When the gear is shifted back to Drive or Park, the mirror will return back to its original position configured by the driver.

User can Enable/Disable Auto Dip on Reverse function from CID, Settings >> Vehicle Settings>> Mirror >> Auto Dip on Reverse (Enable/Disable).

ORVM Auto Dip on Reverse Manual Learning

•

Ensure Vehicle is at Parking / Drive mode incase of AT & Neutral gear incase of MT.

•

Ensure “Auto DIP on Reverse” is enabled in CID settings.

•

Set RH, LH Mirror at User Convenient position for Driving by selecting respective Switches on the Driver side switch bank.

•

Ensure Vehicle is in reverse gear.

•

Set RH, LH Mirror to the nearest ground close to Rear tire until bumper is visible for reversing through respective Switches on the Driver side switch bank.

9.3 Storage Compartments

9.3.1 Luggage Compartment (If Equipped)

For 7-seat configuration: Second row and third row can be folded for keeping bigger/large objects.

Fold down the third-row seats. (refer to “Folding the third-row seat” section)

Fold down the second-row seats. (refer to “Folding the second-row seat” section)

Now the bigger object can be placed with seat folded condition.

When you put the luggage on the folded seat, make sure that the luggage is placed firmly enough to avoid being shaken while driving. A shaky or improperly fixed luggage may injure the driver or passenger. Besides, ensure that the luggage does not obstruct the field of the rearview.

Do not sit on the folded seat because the seat belt and other safety devices would not be able to protect you. It may cause serious injury in case of an accident.

Luggage Net (If Equipped)

For 7-seat configuration: Second row and third row can be folded for keeping bigger/large objects.

To prevent items from shifting towards the rear quarter trim, you can use the 4 hooks located in the rear quarter trim to attach the luggage net.

Make sure the luggage net is securely attached to the hooks in the rear quarter trim.

Do not overstretch the luggage net. always keep your face and body out of the luggage net’s recoil path. Do not use the luggage net when the strap has visible signs of wear or damage.

9.3.2 Sun Glass Holder (If Equipped)

Roof mounted sunglass holder is an integral part of the front interior lamp.

Press the lid to release the latch and lower the holder. It is strategically positioned to be accessed easily by both the driver and front passenger.

Do not access the sunglass holder while you are driving. It may distract your concentration and could lead to an accident.

9.3.3 Glove Box/Tab Holder

Glove Box : The glove box is located on the left side of Instrument panel. To open the lid, gently press the unlock push button.

To close the glove box, raise the lid all the way up and gently press to lock the lid.

It is suggested to keep copies of all vehicle documents along with the Owner’s Manual Kit in the glove box for reference when needed.

To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, glove box Lid should be kept closed when the vehicle is in motion.

Glove Box Lamp (If Equipped): This lamp is located inside the glove box below the tab holder. It will get switched ON when glove box is opened and switch OFF when it is closed.

Tab Holder (If Equipped): Tab holder is available in glove box area. You can keep your tab and charge it inside the tab holder.

Do not use excessive force while closing the glove box.

Always shut the glove box door after use, as an open glove box can pose a serious risk there by potentially injuring a passenger in a crash even if they’re wearing a seat belt.

9.3.4 Console Storage

You can use the console storage below the arm rest in between driver and the passenger. To open the console storage press the knob in the front and lift up the lid. Devices with up to 10 inch screen size can be stored inside the console storage.

By pressing up the console knob, you can use the compartment in the console storage. The console storage can be used as an armrest for both the driver and the passenger.

Cooler — Air vents (If Equipped)

Cooler air vents are provided in the console storage. You can cool cans, small bottles, etc by opening the air vents. Turn the cooler clockwise to open the air vents, or anti-clockwise to close the air vents.

To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartment.

Do not store items that are damageable or cause noises since they can move around in the compartment while driving.

Do not store any flammable materials such as cigarette lighter in the console box or other space. In hot weather, they may explode and cause a fire.

Only sealed cans / bottles to be stored in the cooler. Any spilled beverage can damage the interior trim and electrical components / cooler.

9.3.5 Front Cup Holder/Rear Cup Holder and Armrest (If Equipped)

Front Cup Holder:


Type 1	Type 2

The cup holder located in the floor console between the front seats, It can be used for small cups or cans that are closed or have a lid.

Second row cup holder and armrest (If Equipped)

The Second Row 60P seat features an armrest with cup holder.

•

To open the armrest, simply pull on the tab given at the top of the armrest (as shown).

•

When armrest is not required, push back the armrest into the 60P backrest.

Third row cup holder and armrest (If Equipped)

The Cup holders are located on both the left and right-side trims.

Only sealed cups/cans with lid to be used in the cup holders.

Use caution when using the cup holders. A spilled beverage that is very hot can injure driver or passengers. Spilled liquids can also damage interior trim and electrical components. Any spilled beverage can also startle the driver and cause a loss of control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.

9.3.6 Bottle and Umbrella Holder

Bottle and Umbrella holders are located on both the front door lower trims. You can use them to store umbrella, maps, papers, small books, bottles, etc.

Only sealed/closed bottles are to be used in the bottle holders.

9.3.7 Seat Back/Magazine Pocket

The seat back pockets are located on the back of the front seats for holding lightweight papers/books/magazines, etc.

To avoid injury, do not place large or hard objects in the seat back pockets. Do not put more than 1 kg weight in seat back pockets.

9.4 Grip Handle and Coat Hook

Grip Handle: Foldable grip handles are provided above the front (passenger only) and second and Third row outboard seats.

Coat Hook: The second-row outboard passenger seats grip handles features a coat hook for hanging your coat, shirts, etc.

Hanging excess/bulky weight/items may cause breakage of the hook and inconvenience to the passengers. Hang light weight articles only.

9.5 Microphone (as applicable)

The microphone is located on the roof above driver side as shown in the image.

The microphone is used when talking on the phone. The person you are speaking to can be heard from the front speakers.

To use the hands-free system, you must pair your Bluetooth® phone to the system.

9.6 Sun Visor

Use the sun visor to shield the direct sunlight through the front or side windows. It is available on both driver and co-driver side.

To shield the sunlight through the windshield, pull it downward.

To shield the sunlight through the side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket and swing it to the side.

Adjusting the sun visor or using the mirror on the sun visor while driving may cause an accident by taking your attention away or blocking your view.

Adjust and use the sun visor when the vehicle is not in moving.

9.6.1 Vanity Mirror and Lamp (If Equipped)

Vanity mirror is in the sunvisor.

Swing the sunvisor down and slide the cover to open and close the vanity mirror.

Lamp above the sunvisor will be ON once you slide and open the vanity mirror.

Lamp will not illuminate if arm is not correctly locked in the sunvisor.

Do not adjust the sunvisor while the vehicle is in motion.

9.7 Sun Shade (if equipped)

Sun Shades are provided on both the rear door trim. The Sun Shades can be used for sideward shade, to reduce glare or to shut out direct rays of the sun.

Lift the Sun Shade by holding the handle and to block the glare of the sun and lock it over the slot provided.

9.8 Center Fascia Switch

Center fascia switches are located at the center of the Instrument Panel.

Sl. No.	Switches
A	Passenger Air Bag ON Indication
B	Passenger Air Bag OFF Indication
C	Display Off
D	Hazard Switch
E	SVS/ Rear Camera
F	Drive Mode*
* - If Equipped

9.9 Driver Side Switch Bank

Driver side switch bank is located on the instrument panel below the right-side AC air vents.

The following switches are available in the driver door switch bank:

A	ESP OFF
B	ESS OFF
C	HDC ON
D	FPAS Chime ON / OFF
E	SET/AWD
*-If Equipped

9.10 Intelli Command Center Switch (ICC)

Intelli Command Center Switch (ICC) is located on the centre console near the gear shift lever.

It is used to control the CID screen.

A	Climate Control	D	My Vehicle
B	Rotary Knob	E	Enter / OK
C	Home / Back	F	Volume Control

Climate Control: Press the climate control button and use the knob to modify the climate settings.

Volume: Press the volume control button to adjust the volume using the ICC knob clockwise or anti-clockwise.

My Vehicle: Press the my vehicle button to open the my vehicle app, to use the knob to select the required functions.

Home / Back: Press the Home/Back button to navigate to the home or previous screen.

Rotary Knob: A rotary knob can indeed rotate clockwise and anti-clockwise. Also, it can move in other directions, such as up / down and left / right.

Enter / OK: User can select (enable) and enter the required options.

9.11 Lamps

9.11.1 Interior Lamps

Interior lamps comprises of front/rear roof lamps, ambience lamps and ignition key ring illumination.

These lamps can be used for an illuminated entry.

In auto mode, the roof lamps (courtesy lamps) and ignition key ring illuminate when any of the doors are opened. Once all doors are closed, the interior lamps gets switched OFF.

Switches on Roof Console (If Equipped)

A: LHS reading lamp

B: Door/ Auto Mode

C: RHS reading lamp

Front Roof Lamp – Type 1

The front roof lamps are located in the roof console above the interior rearview mirror.

The roof lamp can be switched ON by pressing the switch ‘C’ (Refer Switches on Roof Console). Press the switch again to switch OFF the roof lamp. Also, the lamp goes off once the Lock button in RKE/PKE is pressed and the same will be ON again when unlock button on RKE/PKE is pressed.

Door Auto mode - Auto Mode will be active when Switch ‘B’ is in pressed position. In Auto Mode, the roof lamps will turn ON automatically when any of the doors are opened. The roof lamps will also turn OFF automatically after preset time once the doors are closed.

Reading Lamp – Reading Lamp switches ‘A’ and ‘C’ can be independently pressed for LH and RH lamps. Press the switch again for switching OFF.

Map Reading Lamp (If Equipped):

Map reading lamps are located on the both sides of the roof near the grab handle above the second-row seats.

Do not leave the roof/map reading lamp in permanent ON mode. This will drain your vehicle battery.

Front Roof Lamp – Type 2

The front roof lamp is in the roof console above the front seats. The courtesy lamp can be switched on using the middle switch (B) on the lamp.

A: The courtesy lamp remains permanently ON in this position.

B: The courtesy lamp remains in AUTO mode (If Equipped) in this position. The lamp remains ON as long as any one of the doors are open and switches OFF when all doors are closed properly.

C: The courtesy lamp remains permanently OFF in this position.

Centre Roof Lamp (If Equipped)

The center roof lamps can be switched ON by pressing the switch on it. To switch it OFF press the switch again.

In case, front roof lamp’s ‘AUTO’ mode is ON, the center roof lamp also goes ON/OFF when the opening and closing of any of the doors.

It cannot be switched off independently in auto mode.

9.11.2 Exterior Lamps

Lighting Control Stalk: The lighting control stalk is located on the right-hand side of the steering wheel and is a part of the combination switch.

It controls operations of parking lamps, head lamps, head lamp beam selection, high beam flashing, front/rear fog lamps and turn signals when the ignition switch is ON.

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to Position “OFF” to switch OFF all lamps.

i) Turn Signals

A: Turn Signal - Left xxxxx B: Turn Signal - Right

Taking a Right Turn:

•

Push the lighting control stalk clockwise to indicate a right turn. The DID arrow lamp pointing towards the right flashes along with the right side turn signal lamps (front, rear and ORVM) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards right.

After you have completed your right turn, the stalk will automatically return to the neutral position switching OFF turn indicator lamp.

Taking a Left Turn:

•

Push the lighting control stalk anti-clockwise to indicate a left turn. The DID arrow lamp pointing towards the left flashes along with the left side turn signal lamps (front, rear and ORVM) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards left.

•

After you have completed your left turn, the stalk will automatically return to the neutral position switching OFF turn indicator lamp.

If the turn signal lamps on the instrument panel flash faster than normal, there may be a possibility that one or more of the turn signal lamp bulbs have blown. Replace the blown bulb immediately.

Changing Lanes:

The system is equipped with One Touch Lane Indicator function which can be used to signal a lane change.

To signal a lane change, move the light control stalk clockwise or anti-clockwise to the limit point of free movement of the lever and release. The turn signals will flash three times and stop.

The turn signals will continue flashing as long as the lighting control stalk is held in the limit point of free movement.

ii) Parking Lamp ON

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise/downward aligning the “arrow” on the stalk 2nd position from the top position to switch ON the parking lamps.

The tail lamp, license plate lamp, instrument panel illumination lamps and all interior switches are also activated when the parking lamp is switched ON.

The Park lamps will be switched OFF automatically after opening the driver door. If a user still wants a park lamp they must turn OFF and turn ON manually.

Park Lamp Warning Buzzer

A warning buzzer sound will be provided if the park lamp is left ON with ignition OFF, as soon as driver door is opened.

iii) Head Lamp “AUTO” Function

Auto head lamp switches ON the head lamp based on the outside ambient light sensed by the RLS sensor. This is useful when travelling through tunnels or low light areas.

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise/upward aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to the 3rd position from top to switch ON Auto head lamp function.

•

Do not clean the sensor with detergent or wax.

•

On a foggy, snowy, rainy, or cloudy day, be sure to use manual mode. The turning on or off time of the lamps varies depending on the weather, season, or circumstances.

•

Any aftermarket sun-film or spray may cause the lighting system to malfunction.

•

When the switch is turned to the “AUTO” position, room, tail, and head lights might blink for a very short time. It is a normal phenomenon recognizing the automatic setting.

•

There may be a difference between ambient light intensity sensed by the RLS sensor and the human eye. Hence it is possible that during low light conditions, the head lamp is activated early as the RLS sensor senses it as low intensity. This is a normal behaviour.

iv) Head Lamp ON

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise aligning the “arrow” on 1st position from the top to switch ON the head lamps.

v) Head Lamp Low/High Beam

Switch ON the head lamp, and push the lighting control stalk down (away) from steering wheel to switch ON the head lamp high beam and lift/pull the lighting control stalk up again towards the steering wheel to switch ON the head lamp low beam. In head lamp high beam, the high beam tell-tale lamp in the DID illuminates indicating high beam option selected.

Low Beam

High Beam

Your vehicle head lamps are vented and moisture may be collected on the inside of the head lamp lens under certain climatic and geographical conditions. This moisture will evaporate once the head lamps have been switched ON for a few minute.

vi) Head Lamp Flash

Pull the lighting control stalk towards the steering wheel to instantaneously flash the head lamp high beam and Low beam.

Head Lamp Levelling System

When the vehicle is either fully or partially loaded, it may have an upward inclination disturbing the head lamp aiming. A correct head lamp setting provides good visibility to the driver with minimum inconvenience to other road users.

To properly aim the head lamp beam, use the head lamp levelling switch. This switch is located on the right side of the steering column shroud in the instrument panel. This switch has four positions marked as 0, 1, 2 and 3.

Switch Position	Vehicle Loading Condition
0	Driver/Driver with Front Passenger
1	Driver + Front passenger + Second row occupied
2	All seats occupied
3	All seats occupied with luggage OR Driver with luggage at extreme rear side

Select the suitable switch position depending on the pay loading condition as advised in the table.

The headlights can only be adjusted when the low beam is switched ON.

9.11.3 Auto Head Lamp Booster (If Equipped)

When the switch is in the Auto mode and high beam. Then when the vehicle speed crosses 80 km/h the high beam intensity and reach increases. The higher reach of the beam is helpful to have vision for the higher speed.

The booster will turn OFF automatically when vehicle speed comes below 75 km/h.

9.11.4 Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) / Rear Park Lamp (If Equipped)

To enable DRL/Rear Park Lamp: In daytime whenever the engine is in running condition and park lamp switch is in OFF position, DRL / Rear Park Lamp is enabled.

To disable DRL: Whenever the engine is in running condition and park lamp is ON, DRL will get switch to park mode.

If customer doesn’t want the DRL/Rear Park Lamp to be ON, he can disable through CID settings.

9.11.5 Cornering Lamp (If Equipped)

Cornering lamps are integrated in both the Fog lamps.

Respective side Cornering lamps turn ON when a sharp turn is taken.

They help in illuminating the road in the direction of turn.

The following conditions are to be met for the lamps to switch ON:

•

Ignition ON

•

Head lamp is ON

•

Sharp turn taken

9.11.6 Fog Lamps

Fog lamps (If Equipped) are to be used along with head lamp low beam, to improve the vision during foggy and misty conditions.

Front Fog Lamps ON

To switch ON the front fog lamps, first switch ON the parking lamps, rotate the inner rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise aligning the front fog lamp icon to the “arrow” on the inner fixed stalk as shown.

The front fog lamp indicator in the DID indicates the operation status.

Fog lamps will turn ON only if parking lamp is ON due to Park light input or Auto light input.

Fog Lamps OFF

Align the “marking” of inner rotary switch on the lighting control stalk to the “OFF” position on the inner fixed stalk as shown to switch OFF the fog lamps.

9.12 Hazard Warning Lamp

The hazard warning lamp switch is in the center bezel switch bank on the instrument panel.

Press this switch to turn ON the Hazard Warning Lamp. All the Turn Signal Lamps will start flashing. The DID turn indicator lamps also flash indicating the same. To turn OFF, push the switch again.

Use the hazard warning lamp when your vehicle is stationary or to warn other road users to be cautious while passing your vehicle.

The turn lamps will work when the hazard warning lamps are operational.

9.12.1 Auto Hazard Warning Lamp

Hazard lamps are turned on automatically during bonnet open in vehicle stationary condition.

Hazard lamps are turned on automatically for 10 second during panic braking condition to indicate following traffic.

Hazard lamps are turned on automatically in case of an unfortunate event of an accident where Airbags are deployed. In such a scenario, the hazard lamps will be on for 30 minute or it can be turned off by operating Hazard switch (Off to On) or Ignition reset (Ignition Off and On).

9.13 Follow-Me Home (FMH) with Rain Light Sensor (RLS)

This feature helps the driver and passengers to easily get out of the vehicle during poor light conditions. The head lamp low beam is turned ON for about 20 second, assisting the passengers to find their way unless cancelled by the UNLOCK signal from the RKE.

To enable FMH;

•

Ignition transition from ON to OFF.

•

Park lamp is OFF.

•

Ignition key is out.

•

Driver door open within 3 minute from KEY OUT.

•

Head lamp would turn ON only if the ambience light is found dark by the light sensor.

To extend FMH;

•

The first RKE/PKE LOCK command will be used for locking all doors.

•

Successive RKE/PKE LOCK commands will be used for toggling the current status of the head lamp low beam.

•

Each time FMH is extended the head lamp low beam will be kept/turned on for the next 20 second.

To disable FMH

•

Park lamp transition from OFF to ON.

•

Ignition off to any other state.

•

FMH ON 20 second expires.

•

FMH Max time is 3 minute expires.

With FMH mode ON, if the UNLOCK signal is received twice from RKE; the feature gets deactivated and cannot be extended further. Also, the doors are unlocked and vehicle is disarmed.

9.14 Follow-Me Home Lamp (FMH) Non RLS (If Equipped)

This feature helps the driver and passengers to easily get out of the vehicle during poor light conditions. The head lamp low beam is turned ON for about 20 second assisting the passengers to find their way. It will only work if prior to switching off the engine, the head lamp were ON for a predefined time.

To activate FMH:

•

Switch OFF the parking lamps.

•

Remove the ignition key.

•

FMH can be activated by pressing lock button in key fob twice. First press locks the vehicle and second press enables head lamp low beam for 20 second.

•

Pressing unlock button in key fob disables FMH feature and unlocks the vehicle.

To extend the FMH feature further for 20 second, press RKE LOCK button once. This FMH extension can be availed for maximum 3 minute from the first activation.

With FMH mode ON; First LOCK signal received from RKE will lock the doors and subsequent LOCK signal is used to toggle the head lamp ON and OFF.

To deactivate FMH:

•

Switch ON the parking lamps.

•

Switch the ignition key to either ACC or ON in position.

•

Press the RKE unlock/lock button once.

•

Head lamp switches ON for 20 second and switched OFF automatically.

With FMH mode ON, if UNLOCK signal is received twice from RKE; the feature gets deactivated and cannot be extended further. Also, the doors are unlocked, and vehicle disarmed.

9.15 Lead Me to Vehicle Lamp (LMV) (If Equipped)

LMV is the feature that will switch ON the head lamp for 20 second helping the passengers to reach the parked vehicle safely and comfortably at night.

LMV is activated:

•

Pressing the unlock button on the RKE two times.

LMV is de-activated:

•

Switch ON the parking lamps.

•

Switch the ignition key to either ACC or ON in position.

•

Press the RKE lock/unlock button once.

•

Head lamp switches ON for 20 second and switched OFF automatically.

To extend the LMV feature further for 20 second, press RKE UNLOCK button once. This LMV extension can be availed for maximum 3 minute from the first activation.

With LMV mode ON; first UNLOCK signal received from RKE will unlock the doors and subsequent UNLOCK signal is used to toggle the head lamp ON and OFF.

9.16 Remote Engine Start (If Equipped)

This feature enables the customer can remotely Start/Stop the vehicle engine using mobile application.

This feature is mainly used to switch on the car air conditioner remotely via Adrenox connect app. When the engine starts, the vehicle AC automatically turns ON (If DATC equipped). This feature is available in automatic transmission and manual transmission variants with EPB.

The following conditions must be met for a vehicle to be started remotely:

•

All doors including bonnet and tail door must be closed and locked.

•

Vehicle Automatic transmission should be in P (Park) OR Manual transmission (gear in neutral Position) with EPB applied.

•

Ignition must be in OFF position.

•

Sufficient Fuel and battery charge for the car to start.

9.17 Windshield Wipers

9.17.1 Wiper Control Stalk

A: Flick- Wipe (MIST)

B: Off

C: Intermittent (INT)/AUTO

D: Low Speed (LO)

E: High Speed (HI)

F: Rotary Switch

Wiper Off: The wipe function is OFF when the wiper control stalk is in neutral position (B).

Flick-Wipe (Mist): Push the wipe control stalk to position (A) for a flick-wipe, hold to operate the wipe continuously (simultaneously lift the wiper stalk towards the steering wheel to operate the wash). The stalk automatically comes back to position (B) when released.

Intermittent (INT) (If Equipped):Intermittent (INT) mode wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is pushed down to position (C). In the INT mode, the wiper operates on preset intervals. The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the wiper speed intensity rotary switch (F).

Auto Mode (If Equipped): Auto mode wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is pushed down to position C. In the AUTO mode, the wiper operates based on rain intensity.

The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the wiper speed intensity rotary switch (F).

When the ignition key is in the “ON” position, the wiper will automatically operate once if the wiper switch is turned from the “OFF” to the “AUTO” position.

Low Speed Wiping: Push the wipe control stalk down to the position (D) to operate the wiper at a fixed low speed.

High Speed Wiping: Push the wiper control stalk down to position (E) to operate the wiper at a fixed high speed.

9.17.2 Wipe/Wash

Pull/Lift the wiper control stalk towards the steering wheel from any position to activate wipe/wash function. Washer fluid from front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto the windshield. The wipers wipe the windshield 3 times after the washer spray is stopped. Hold the stalk in position for continuous spray of washer fluid.

When wiper is in OFF or Intermittent mode:

After completion of the wipe/wash cycle, wipers return to their bottom position.

If the wipers are in Intermittent mode and DWELL delay is less than or equal to 5 second, then the wiper will continue in the Intermittent mode.

If the wipers are in Intermittent mode, and DWELL delay is more than 5 second, then a further single wipe will be performed 5 second after the wash/wipe cycle. After the drip wipe (last wipe), wiper returns to normal Intermittent wipe.

The wipe/wash function can be activated only when the ignition is in “ON” position.

9.17.3 AUTO Wash (If Equipped)

When auto washer switch is pressed once, washer fluid from front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto the windshield for 2 second. The wipers wipe the windshield 4 time.

After that, again Washer fluid from front washer motor will turn ON for 1.5 second and the wipers wipe the windshield 3 time.

AUTO wash function will work only when the wiper switch is in OFF mode.

9.17.4 Rear Wiper-INT Mode

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the wiper control stalk to align the “arrow” on the stalk to the rear wipe “ON” position to operate the rear wiper in INT mode. In this mode, the wiper operates on preset intervals of 4 second.

9.17.5 Rear Wiper-ON Mode

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the wiper control stalk to align the “arrow” on the stalk to the rear wipe “ON” position to operate the rear wiper continuously.

9.17.6 Rear Wash

Push the wiper control stalk towards back side from any position to activate wipe/wash function. The rear windshield wash and wipe operates 3 to 4 times or as long as the stalk end is Push/Pull to the rear wash position. Wiping will continue for 3 times after releasing the stalk end switch.

If you switch OFF the ignition before switching OFF the wiper, the blades stop at random on the windshield. Switch ON the ignition and move wiper stalk to ‘MIST’ position to return the wipers to the park position, provided the wiper stalk is in OFF position.

Using a windshield washer in freezing temperatures could be dangerous. The washer fluid could freeze on the windshield, and block your vision resulting in an accident. If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 °C, use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection.

•

Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry. It may lead to scratches on the glass.

•

It is recommended not to use the wiper when the windshield glass is covered with debris, snow or leaves. Clean the glass before using the wiper to avoid damage to the wiper blades and glass.

•

Do not operate the windshield washer for more than 10 second or when the reservoir is empty.

9.17.7 Windshield Washer Jet - Front and Rear

There are two nozzles in the front plenum cover under the hood.

Always direct the washer jet to hit the middle of the windshield. This will enable the wiper blade to wipe the complete width of the windshield.

In the rear, one nozzle provided for the rear windshield wash.

Rear windshield washer fluid is supplied from front washer reservoir located in the Engine compartment.

9.18 Skyroof

A skyroof will make the driving experience more enjoyable by bringing light and sunshine into the vehicle.

It provides a real open air feeling along with pure driving fun, with fresh air, your driving experience automatically becomes significantly more relaxed. A skyroof allows air to flow evenly from above the driver, which is much quieter and less intrusive than wind blowing through a side window.

9.18.1 Controls and functions

Switch Position	Switch Press	Operation
1	Short Press	Sunshade Express Open
1	Long Press	Sunshade Manual Open
2	Short Press	Skyroof Express Open
2	Long Press	Skyroof Manual Open
3	Short Press	Skyroof Express Close
3	Long Press	Skyroof Manual Close
4	Short Press	Sunshade Express Close
4	Long Press	Sunshade Manual Close
0 & 5	—	Switch Home/Neutral Position
6	Short Press	Tilt Up
7	Short Press	Tilt Down

Toggle switch for the skyroof to operate. Home/Neutral position of the Switch (0) and (5). To operate the sliding skyroof and Rollo shade Pull or Push or Tilt the switch as shown in image, after every operation switch goes to Home position automatically.

User must switch ON the ignition to operate the skyroof.

9.18.2 Rollo Shade Open

Pull the switch to position (1) for rollo shade express (one touch) open. Manual (long press) open to stop at desired position.

9.18.3 Rollo Shade Close

Push the switch to position (4) to close rollo shade express (one touch) completely. Long press (Manual) to stop closing at desired position.

9.18.4 Skyroof Open

Pull the switch to position (2) for skyroof Eexpress (one touch) open. Long press (Manual) open to stop opening at desired position.

Skyroof Smart Open by Key Fob Unlock Button

•

Skyroof and rollo shade can be opened by long press unlock button.

•

Sunshade will be open followed by skyroof.

•

Skyroof / rollo shade movement can be stopped by pressing lock/unlock button during movement.

9.18.5 Skyroof Close

Push the switch to position (3) for skyroof express (one touch) close. Manual (long press) close to stop at desired position.

Skyroof Smart Close by Key fob Lock button

•

Skyroof and rollo shade can be close by long press lock button.

•

Skyroof will be closed followed by rollo shade.

•

Skyroof / rollo shade movement can be stop by pressing lock/unlock button during movement.

•

Skyroof / rollo shade movement can be stop by pressing lock/unlock button during movement.

If anti-pinch is detected 3 times continuously within 10 second, then smart close though PKE key fob will not work for next 30 second. User can manually close skyroof through switch from console.

Skyroof Smart Close while Raining

If Rain sensor is equipped: In auto wipe mode or wiper LOW or HIGH mode, when wiper is ON for predefined time, DID will request user feedback for closing the skyroof. Using Steering “selection button/ center button” user can choose to close the Skyroof.

In RLS variant, skyroof and rollo shade will close automatically while rain is detected or after the defined time (12 hour) during the vehicle is in Ignition OFF and locked state.

•

In Non Rain sensor variant once wiper is turned ON for a predefined time, CID/DID will request user feedback for closing the skyroof. Using steering switch button, user can close the skyroof.

Skyroof Smart Control by Voice Recognition

User can open and close skyroof via Voice command through Alexa during Ignition ON.

9.18.6 Skyroof Control by Authorised Mobile Phone Application

User can open and close skyroof via mobile phone with authorized application in Ignition OFF.

9.18.7 Skyroof Tilt Open/Close

Tilt/rotate Up the switch to position (6) for skyroof tilt open.

Tilt/rotate Down the switch to position (7) for skyroof tilt close.

9.18.8 Pinch Protection For The Power Skyroof

•

Pinch protection can help reduce the risk of pinching injuries when closing the power skyroof.

•

If the power skyroof closing meets resistance or there is something in the way, the power skyroof opens again immediately.

•

Check why the power skyroof did not close and avoid such incident in future for your safety.

•

Try to close the power skyroof again.

•

Without pinch protection, the power skyroof will close with enough force to cause serious personal injury.

•

Always be careful when closing the power skyroof.

•

Pinch protection cannot prevent fingers or other parts of the body from being pressed against the edge of the roof; may result in injuries.

•

If the power skyroof malfunctions, pinch protection may not function properly. Visit a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

9.18.9 Emergency Close Feature

•

The express (One Touch) / Manual (long press) skyroof and Rollo Shade Close function may not work due to:

•

Consecutive several attempts to close skyroof and Rollo Shade.

•

Pinch protection is only for closing skyroof and Rollo shade.

•

Excessive Ice / Dirt accumulation on the skyroof Glass / guiderails.

Follow the emergency close command as below:

•

Emergency close feature can be used, if Sliding skyroof or rollo shade consecutive reversal movement observed 3 times within 10 second then continue with step 2 as below to use emergency close feature.

•

On the 4th attempt continuously push the skyroof close switch - position (3) or rollo shade close switch - position (4) until it closes completely to ensure occupant privacy, safety and theft prevention from skyroof open window. This is emergency close feature. (Never keep your hands or head in the skyroof window while performing this operation it may cause severe injury, since anti-pinch function will not work at this 4th attempt).

•

Once the skyroof or rollo Shade is completely closed, release the switch.

•

Alternatively, user may wait for minimum 30 second before operating skyroof and rollo shade, then skyroof can be operated with normal functions.

•

If the skyroof doesn’t operate as above, visit Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

9.18.10 Initializing the Power Skyroof

Condition for Initializing the Skyroof /Rollo Shade

If the vehicle battery has been disconnected during skyroof / rollo shade movement and reconnected or it is dead or any fuse is replaced, the skyroof / rollo shade must be initialized. Otherwise express (one touch) function (open / close / tilt) and pinch protection function will be deactivated.

Initializing command procedure:

Turn ON the ignition.
(Pre condition shall be open position for both skyroof and Rollo shade).

Close the skyroof fully by pushing ‘skyroof close switch’ (3) and keep the switch pushed for 1-2 second after the roof is fully closed, till clicking sound comes from skyroof.

Close the rollo shade fully by pushing ‘Rollo Shade close switch’ (4) and keep the switch pushed for 1-2 second after the rollo shade is fully closed, till clicking sound comes from rollo shade.

The initializing command is complete, check if the express open/close features are working.

If the initializing procedure is not completely performed, then it has to be run again from step 2.

•

To help prevent damage, remove ice and snow from the skyroof before opening or tilting it in winter season.

•

Always close the skyroof before leaving the vehicle or if it begins to rain. If the skyroof is open or tilted, rain could enter the vehicle interior and cause extensive damage to the electrical system. This could result in further vehicle damage.

•

Remove leaves and other objects from the skyroof guiderails regularly either by hand or using a vacuum cleaner.

•

If the power skyroof malfunctions, pinch protection may not function properly. Consult a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

•

Rollo shade can be opened and closed independently when the sliding skyroof is in closed position.

•

During sliding skyroof Express (one touch) open/tilt operation, rollo shade will also open in synchronization with sliding skyroof (Express - Complete Open Feature).

Do not remove vehicle battery while skyroof is in motion.

•

Improper use of the power skyroof can result in serious personal injury.

•

Always make sure that no one is in the Path/Cutout of the power skyroof when it is Closing or Opening.

•

Always take the key with you while leaving the vehicle.

•

Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle – particularly if they have access to the vehicle key. Unsupervised use of the remote control vehicle key makes it possible to lock the vehicle, start the engine, turn on the ignition and operate the skyroof.

•

Never stand or sit on skyroof glasses or roof. This can cause severe damage and would be treated as abuse of the skyroof which will not be covered in warranty.

•

Never keep the luggages / weights on top of the roof/skyroof.

•

Any wet area found on the headliner should be reported to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

9.18.11 Wind Buffeting

When you drive the vehicle with the window or skyroof open at a certain position, you may feel some pressure upon your ears or hear some noises similar to those from a helicopter. This happens because of an influx of in air through the window or skyroof and due to its resonance effect. If this happens, adjust by opening the window or skyroof.

9.18.12 Skyroof Service Checking Procedure

•

Open the skyroof.

•

Check all 4 rail channel corners for mud or dust / leaf present in it.

•

Move the leafs/dust to center of rain channel and then remove it by hand.

Do not blow air in drain hose channel before cleaning it manually – as the bigger leaves may go inside and block drain hose.

•

After cleaning of all visible particles blow air into drain hose channel area to clean hose for mud in this area.

•

Now pour 1 liter of water in rain channel and check if water is draining or not.

If water is not draining kindly contact the Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

•

High pressure washer nozzle jets should not be directed towards skyroof seals and Rubber components.

•

Do not use high pressure water on skyroof area.

•

It is recommended to wipe the seals with damp micro fiber cloth during cleaning.

•

Skyroof rails and drain area should be cleaned using air blower.

9.19 Power Window and Skyroof Smart Close and Open

This feature is applicable only for driver door power window (If Equipped with anti pinch operation).

9.19.1 Smart operations in Ignition OFF State

a). Using PKE Key Fob

•

Skyroof and Power Window Smart Close- During ignition off with all doors closed, if the key fob lock button is pressed for more than 1 second, then doors will get locked and Skyroof and power window will get closed automatically.

•

Skyroof and Power Window Smart Open- During ignition off, if the key fob unlock button is pressed for more than 1 second, then doors will get unlocked and Skyroof and Power window will be opened along with blower ON in fresh air mode (for approximately 40 second).

If any of the doors status is not changed for 45 second, doors will get locked, skyroof will get closed but power window will be left open.

b). Using Adrenox Command

Adrenox command will work only when,

Ignition is off

Doors in locked state

Key fob is not inside the vehicle.

Vehicle Controls

Power Window Smart Open

Power Window Smart Close

Skyroof Smart Open

Skyroof Smart Close

User set PIN will be required to execute AdrenoX commands.

c). Timer Based Control (Applicable only for RLS variants)

Skyroof Smart Close - During ignition off, if skyroof is open for more than a predefined time (for approximately 12 hour), skyroof and rollo shade will get closed automatically.

d). Rain detection based control (Applicable only for RLS variants)

Skyroof Smart Close - During ignition off and doors are in locked condition, If rain is detected skyroof and rollo shade will be automatically closed.

9.19.2 Smart operations in Ignition ON State

a). Using Alexa Voice Command

User can open and close Skyroof via voice command through Alexa during Ignition ON.

. .Alexa, Open Skyroof ....... .Alexa, Close Skyroof

User can open and close driver side power window via Voice command through Alexa during ignition ON (will open/close only driver side window)

. .Alexa, Open Windows....... .Alexa, Close Windows

b). While Wiper is ON

Skyroof and Power Window Smart Close- During ignition ON condition, if front wiper is ON for approximately around 10 second (varies based on wiper modes), a notification requesting user confirmation for closing the power window and skyroof will be displayed. On confirming the same, both will be closed.

10 PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM

10.1 Surround View System (If Equipped)

The SVS Camera assists in parking and low speed maneuvering by displaying different views of the vehicle’s surroundings on the screen to the driver with the help of 4 Cameras located in the front grille, tailgate, and both exterior mirrors. Driver can activate SVS through app drawer (soft button) or SVS switch or on engaging reverse mode. The Surround View app exits automatically when the speed is exceeded.

Once activated, it delivers a detailed surround view, helping the driver navigate tight spaces and obstacles with ease and confidence.

Before using the system, ensure that all camera lenses are clean and free from dust, dirt, or any obstructions that may impair the system. External mirrors shall be fully unfolded. Regularly inspect and clean the lenses to maintain optimal functionality. Ensure the camera lenses are not damaged and are fully functional/ operational.

Disclaimer

•

The SVS camera system provides a visual display of the surroundings but does not detect or alert the driver about obstacles. It is the driver's responsibility to carefully observe the environment and check for potential collisions with obstacles.

•

There is an approximate blind area based on the mounting where the cameras cannot see around the periphery of the vehicle. Driver must be careful to check manually these blind spots for potential obstacles to ensure safe maneuvering.

•

The SVS camera system creates a seamless view by stitching images from four cameras aligned to specific geometric orientations. If the position or installation angle of any camera is altered, such as following a collision, the stitching accuracy may be compromised. For safety reasons, avoid using the system until it has been inspected and recallibrated.

•

If the exterior mirror is folded or misaligned, the image stitching for the SVS camera system may become inaccurate.

•

Use the SVS camera only when all the doors, hood and the tailgate is closed.

•

The area around the vehicle is shown using camera stitched images and the car image is a standard graphic shown by the system. Hence the car image shown on the screen is not real and may not represent your actual vehicle.

•

Objects and obstacles above the camera height or out of the field of view of the cameras are not displayed.

•

Camera lenses provide a wide coverage of surroundings which results in objects appearing slightly different from the actual and may not be dimensionally same as real as on the screen.

10.1.1 SVS camera Activation and Deactivation

Use any of the following methods to activate SVS camera

•

Press SVS Hard Switch on center fascia switch bank.

•

Select “Surround view” Icon from CID screen app drawer.

•

Engage reverse mode using shift by lever.

SVS camera deactivates when one of the following action is performed

•

Driver presses “Close button” in Surround view app in CID screen.

•

SVS camera switch is pressed again.

•

Vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h while driving forward unless SVS camera activation was done above 20 km/h.

•

Vehicle is changed from non-park (N/D/R) to park mode (P) and no operation has been performed for 10 second.

Under any circumstances, Mahindra or its directors, officers and key managerial persons do not accept any responsibility and cannot be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system.

When reverse mode is engaged, SVS camera cannot be deactivated by SVS camera switch or close button.

SVS camera is a supplementary driving assist function therefore under any circumstance it cannot replace vigilance or responsibility of driver. Always pay attention and check the vehicle's surroundings for safety. Do not solely rely on what is displayed on the screen. What you see on the screen may differ from the actual vehicle's location and surroundings.

10.1.2 SVS Camera Views

SVS camera provides various features for assistance such as

•

2D front (panoramic view, normal view, top view)

•

2D rear (panoramic view, normal view, top view)

•

Corner views

•

3D view

•

Parking guidelines

•

Transparent view

•

Blind view monitor

The system allows for enhanced interaction, enabling the driver to swipe, zoom in, and zoom out on 3D view. The respective 2D/3D view can be displayed on the left side of the top view for convenience.

Refer to the following sections for detailed instructions on using each feature effectively.

How to select views

•

For the ease of the driver, names of all the views have been provided in the app along with the icon rib.

•

The small car icon on the top left corner of the top view panel is the transparent view icon.

•

When in 3D view touch the car model on top view screen to enable 8 oval touch points around the vehicle and by selecting each touch points 3D surrounding of the vehicle can be seen from 8 different angles.

•

3D View will not be available at vehicle speed above 20 km/h.

•

8 Oval touch points in top view will be automatically hidden if no operations is performed for 8 second.

•

Transparent view will not be available on speed above 20 km/h.

•

The video feed displayed beneath the vehicle in transparent view is not a real-time feed.

•

The front of the vehicle swings out more than the rear of the vehicle.

•

Maintain sufficient distance to the obstacles so that the exterior mirrors or the corners of the vehicle does not collide with any obstacles.

Sl. No	Icons	Description
1.		Front 2D View: Assists the driver to view front surrounding in 2D.
2.		Front Wide View: Assists the driver to view panoramic surroundings.
3.		Front Top View: Assists the driver to view zoomed-in front top of the vehicle.
4.		Rear 2D View: Assists the driver to view rear surroundings in 2D.
5.		Rear Wide View: Assists the driver to view panoramic surroundings.
6.		Rear Top View: Assists the driver to view zoomed-in rear top of the vehicle.
7.		Transparent View: Assists the driver to view the road beneath the vehicle.
8.		All Corner View: Displays the view close to all four tyres i.e, front left, front right, rear left, and rear right.
9.		You can view SVS settings option using this Icon.
10.		In these views, you can see the areas surrounding the vehicle in 3D.
11.		This view assists you with front surroundings view for maneuvering in front of the vehicle.
12.		This view assists you with front surroundings view for maneuvering in rear of the vehicle.
13.		You can capture screen shot of CID screen using this Icon.

•

A pop-up message on the screen appears.

When:

- The tailgate is open.

- The driver's door is open.

- The passenger's door is open.

SVS camera displays the combined images from the four cameras. Therefore, the displayed image may be different from the actual vehicle position and parking guideline, etc. Make sure that no persons or animals or any objects/materials are in the maneuvering area. Pay attention and ensure safety before maneuvering the vehicle.

10.1.3 Static and Dynamic Guidelines

Static and dynamic guidelines can be used as reference for parking and maneuvers only and may differ if camera orientation is altered due to passenger occupancy.

•

Static Guidelines provide indicative distance of the objects with reference to vehicle.

•

Color coding (Red = 0.5 m, Orange = 1 m, Green = 3 m) on the static lines help in assessing the distance of the obstacles [at the leveled ground] from the vehicle’s boundary.

•

Dynamic Guidelines (Blue) indicate the path the vehicle will traverse with reference to the current steering angle.

10.1.4 Parking Assistance (Parallel and Perpendicular)

Disclaimer

Parallel and Perpendicular parking are only assistance and driver should take care of surrounding for collisions.

A. Perpendicular Parking

Step 1:

Choose Perpendicular Parking icon from SVS settings. Below overlays will appear on either side.

Drive ahead of the parking slot so that camera can have the parking slot view.

•

It is driver’s responsibility to identify the suitable parking area to park the vehicle safely.

Step 2: Keeping the Vehicle Ready for parking

•

Move the vehicle either forward or backward so that the end point of the shortest arc (either blue or green, based on the side in which the vehicle will be parked), is coinciding with the parking slot line. (Blue arc line as shown in the image)

•

Once it is done, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking slot, till the rack end/extreme end move of steering wheel.

Step 3: Parking the Vehicle

•

Start Reversing the vehicle until the static lines are parallel to the parking slot lines. Then, keep the steering straight, and take reverse until the vehicle is in final position in the slot. Parking is Complete.

•

Steering will be straight if both dynamic and static lines are overlapping.

B. Parallel Parking

Step 1 : Choose the Parallel Parking Mode

•

Drive ahead of the parking slot, so that Camera can have the parking slot view and choose Parallel parking icon from settings.

Two green rectangular boxes will appear on either side as below image.

Step 2 : Keeping the Vehicle Ready for parking

•

Move the vehicle forward or backward, so that the one of the rectangular box is placed inside the parking slot.

•

Make sure there are no obstacles in the green parking slot after orange pole.

•

Turn the steering wheel in the direction in which parking is intended.

Step 3 : Park the Vehicle

•

Hold the steering in the current position once selecting the parking area after turning the steering wheel as the area color turns from yellow to green as in below image screens.

•

Now start reversing the vehicle. An arc will appear on the screen as below image. Stop reversing the vehicle when the arc touches the end of parking slot.

•

Now turn the steering in the opposite direction until the rack end/ extreme end move of steering wheel (i.e full rotation) and start reversing the vehicle. Below screen will appear.

•

Continue reversing the vehicle until the static lines are parallel to the parking slot lines. Then, keep the steering straight, and keep reversing the vehicle until the vehicle is in final position in the slot. Parking is Complete.

•

Steering will be straight if both dynamic and static lines are overlapping.

10.1.5 Secure 360 (If equipped)

The cameras installed on the vehicle body record the video of the vehicle surroundings during driving which can be used for fault diagnosis, accident evidence identification and to capture special event during driving.

Inorder for Secure 360 to record videos,

•

"Camera Recording” option should be turned ON under Quick Settings.

•

USB pen drive should be plugged into vehicles USB media port.

USB pen drive should be of minimum USB 2.0 and should be in FAT32 format.

USB pen drive can be of storage size between 8 GB — 128 GB, and should have a minimum free space of about 1 GB for smooth recording.

Live Feed

Secure 360 application displays live video feed from all 4 SVS Cameras.

Open Secure 360 application available in CID App drawer.

User can tap on the respective camera feed to view them in full screen.

When there is no USB drive in vehicles media port, live feed can only be viewed through Secure 360 application.

Recording

Recording folder displays various type of recording stored in USB device.

•

General Recording

•

Emergency Recording

•

Personal Recording

•

Screenshots

When there is no USB pen drive plugged into vehicles media port, secure 360 application will display only the screenshot folder.

General Video Recording

When the engine is started, video recording starts and files will be saved in “General Video” folder inside connected USB pendrive.

General video recordings are limited to 3 minutes for each video and a total of 5 videos will be recorded.

In General Video Folder, the old recording files will be overwritten cyclically to keep the latest recordings.

It can be disabled in setting by turning OFF Camera Recording toggle button.

Emergency Video Recording

Videos of deployed crash, Automatic Emergency Braking events etc. are also saved in “Emergency Video” folder inside Secure 360 interface.

Emergency Videos will be recorded and saved in memory when the conditions met and battery connection is intact and not disturbed by any means.

Video clips stored in the Emergency Folder can’t be overwritten and can be deleted by user only.

Personal Video Recording

User can trigger Secure 360 to record custom videos and it will be saved in “Personal Video” folder inside connected USB pen drive.

Personal Video recording can be triggered within Secure 360 application live screen by tapping on the “red” record button.

Screenshots

User can trigger Secure 360 to take screenshots and it will be saved in “Screenshots” folder inside connected USB pen drive if USB is not connected it will be stored in vehicles My drive.

Screenshots can be viewed through gallery application.

Video Playback

•

Under secure 360 recordings, click "Emergency Video" folder, "General Video" folder or "Personal Video" folder to replay any video file.

•

Saved video file name is as per date and time of recorded video. Video files are saved with .AVI file extension.

Eg. File Name - 20260203_163028.AVI

20260203 - YYYYMMDD (Y-Year, M-Month, D-Day)

163028 - HHMMSS (H-Hour,M-Minute, S-Second)

•

Click the on the video to play it.

1: To play available videos in a loop

2: To shuffle and play the available videos

3: To close the playing video

4: To rewind the video

5: Pause/play

6: To fast forward the video

Exported File

User can export Secure 360 videos from USB drive to vehicle Mydrive storage through Mydrive application available in app drawer.

Those exported videos and screenshots can be viewed under exported folder.

10.1.7 SVS Camera Settings

1. General

A. Default View: Driver can select default view for SVS camera as per convenience.

B. Brightness Control: Driver can adjust brightness for SVS application as per convenience.

2. 3D:

A. 3D Surround Scan: Driver can enable/disable 3D surround scan for SVS camera as per convenience.

B. Automatic Side View based on Turn Indicator: Driver can enable / disable automatic side view based on turn indicator for SVS camera as per convenience.

3. Overlays

A. Parking Sensor: Driver can select the type of view in which parking sensor indication is needed in SVS camera as per convenience.

B. Guidelines: Driver can enable the static and dynamic guidelines visibility in the view (2D, 3D, Top) required for SVS Camera as per convenience.

10.1.8 SVS camera Troubleshooting

•

When there is any error in system / camera lost connection, the corresponding camera view on screen shows green or blue color with pop up as “Please contact service center”. Visit the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

10.1.9 System Limitations

•

SVS camera is subject to certain system limitation and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations:

- During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc).

- At night or in very dark places.

- Display may flicker, if the area around cameras is lit by LED or any fluorescent lighting.

- If there is a sudden change in temperature, from cold to hot.

- If your vehicle is damaged or/and if any camera position or/and the settings is changed.

- When rain, snow, dirt or an object adheres in front of the camera lens.

- When strong light rays fall on the camera. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset).

- When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge).

•

Video may get blur if camera is exposed to bright light and area around is dark / with shadow.

•

SVS camera images are reproduced slightly delayed and not in real time due to processing and stitching.

•

Sometimes during SVS camera activation, you may not see stable video feed as some parameters update happens.

•

If video file is corrupted, you may observe black screen while replaying the video and system will reset to default view.

•

If the SD card is corrupted or disconnected, there is no pop-up when connected to the vehicle on CID. Impact: In the Inglo app will show the text “Feed not available” continuously.

•

If the pendrive is not connected, then video file sharing will not happen.

•

SVS camera is only a supplementary function and may display obstacles from a distorted perspective.

•

Avoid using SVS camera if you are having color blindness or impaired color vision.

•

Objects above the ground or hanging objects may appear to be farther away than they are. However, in reality, objects may be closer to your car. In such cases, avoid using guidelines to judge the distance. Since it leads to misalignments and increases the risk of collision with your car.

•

SVS camera video is shown based on driver activation, but it cannot be used to see a complete surrounding view. The feature cannot replace the driver for looking into exterior and interior view mirrors.

•

Some obstacles are hard to depict and thus very difficult to recognize due to stitched images, hence sole-reliance on the system may result in a collision.

System Maintenance

•

Always keep all camera lens clean & scratch free. Foreign materials on the camera lens can cause system error and reduced visibility.

•

Always use clean water and soft nonabrasive cloth to clean the lens.

•

Don’t clean the camera lens and the area around the cameras with a power washer.

•

Avoid direct contact of camera lens to high temperature areas, materials, etc.

•

Avoid camera lens damage due to car polish or solvents.

•

When SVS camera parts need to be replaced due to damage/ non-functioning / any other reason, the app will not open on clicking and give a pop up as “SVS camera app not available.”

•

Always clean camera lens smoothly and don’t apply much pressure.

10.2 Parking Assistance System (PAS) FPAS and RPAS (If Equipped)

Parking assistance system is provided to aid the driver while parking the vehicle in reverse and in front.

While parking, PAS will detect the obstacles at the rear and front side of the vehicle within the sensing zone, which cannot be viewed through the internal rear-view mirror and the outside rear view mirrors and windshield.

The PAS will then alert the driver by a beep sound and display about the location of the detected obstacle from the vehicle.

The alert sound level will vary proportional to the distance. Smaller the distance shorter the interval between the beeps.

Parking Assistance System Sensors

Front Sensor Location	Rear Sensor Location

RPAS sensors are located in the rear bumper and FPAS sensors are located in front Bumper to assist driver for hassle free parking.

RPAS and FPAS will give proper alerts at vehicle speed less than 8 km/h.

Always keep the sensors clean and free from ice formation, dust, water etc. for proper working of the system.

Do not press or shock the sensors by hitting or using a high-pressure water gun while washing. The sensors could be damaged.

Magnetic devices present in the detection range could vastly affect the sensor performance and the distance displayed may not be accurate.

•

Driving and Operation

•

PAS is an aiding system. Under no circumstances Mahindra will accept any responsibility or can be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system.

•

System will not sense pot holes, trenches or drainages which are below the ground level.

•

Repainting of the sensor will affect the performance of the system.

•

Activation and De-activation of PAS

–

The Vehicle should be in IGN ON state to activate the Parking assistance system.

–

RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse gear engaged.

–

RPAS will get deactivated when reverse gear is disengaged.

–

FPAS will be activated automatically in the below conditions.

–

FPAS will work on "D, R (Reverse) and Neutral" gear

–

Vehicle is in between 1 to 8 km/h and Hand brake is disengaged or clutch is pressed.

–

Vehicle is in standstill and Hand brake is disengaged or reverse gear is engaged.

–

In case of AT variant FPAS will be activated automatically when the vehicle is in D gear and hand brake is disengaged.

–

FPAS will not work on "Park" gear

–

FPAS will automatically deactivate when Drive, Reverse & Neutral gear are disengaged

–

FPAS will get deactivated when vehicle speed is more than 8 km/h or hand brake is engaged or reverse gear is disengaged.

–

When the obstacles come in the sensing range, the system starts giving the indication based on the distance and direction of the obstacles as defined in the detecting zones. The closer the obstacles, more display bars illuminated and beeps alerts.

PAS Information on DID Screen

RPAS display on DID screen gives the following information:

•

Left zone indicates obstacle on left side.

•

Right zone indicates obstacle on right side.

•

If Obstacle is in center then left and right both zone will get highlight

Number of Zones getting changed according to variant.

FPAS display on DID screen gives the following information:

•

Left Corner zone indicates obstacle on left side

•

Right Corner Zone indicates obstacle on the right side

•

Operation of PAS

Start the vehicle (Ignition is turned ON).

Shift the gear to Reverse (engage reverse gear) and ‘D’ is engage hand brake. RPAS and FPAS will be displayed as like below in DID. The RPAS and FPAS both will be displayed as like below in the DID screen during obstacle detection

For FPAS alone, disengage Hand brake and drive the vehicle forward with speed limit within 1 to 8 km/h. FPAS will be displayed as like below in the DID screen during obstacle detection.

The Beep sound can be heard from the DID. Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle comes closer (crossing each display bar) and the sound will be continuous if any of the obstacle is less than 50 cm.

The RPAS distance displayed will be the minimum of distances sensed by left and right sensors. And 120 cm is the maximum detection range and the FPAS distance displayed will be the minimum of distances sensed by left and right sensors 70 cm is the maximum detection range.

For Example: Assume 2 obstacles are placed as mentioned below:

•

Obstacle at left at 70 cm

•

Obstacle at right at 101 cm

On engaging the gear in reverse, DID will display as below:
	Since obstacle is at 70 cm in left - minimum distance is shown in the distance indicator.

	6. FPAS warning sound can be disabled using PAS Switch, available on IP.
PAS switch LED will not glow when FPAS sound is in active state and will be in ON state when PAS sound deactivated.

1. If bars in any one of the sides are displayed with ‘X’ marks is displayed on instrumental cluster display, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

2. If all bars are displayed with ‘X’ marks on instrumental cluster display, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

3. Obstacle in the blind zone cannot be sensed by the system.

4. Please check the condition of the obstacle behind your vehicle before reversing. In some cases, the display may be not as same as reality due to the installed sensor level, obstacle shape and reflection condition.

5. Point B will be detected sooner or later, but A may not be detected at all. Point B will be detected sooner or later, but A may not be detected at all.

6. Not all obstacles are detected from 120 cm. For instance, a person is detected from 75 cm because of the weak reflection or absorption of the waves of the clothes.

7. The distance indication may move up and down due to different sizes of the obstacle at different positions.

8. Though the obstacle is in the sensing zone, obstacle may not be detected since the ultrasonic waves are not reflected back to the sensor.

9. The obstacle of a conical shape may not be detected, since the ultrasonic waves get deflected away.

10.3 Rear View Camera - (If Equipped)

Rear View Camera is located under tail gate applique it enhances rear visibility by displaying areas that are difficult or impossible to see through mirrors.

10.3.1 RVC Entry and Exit Conditions

Entry Conditions

When reverse gear is engaged, the infotainment system automatically enters ‘Rear View Camera Mode’ and displays the video feed without a close button.

The rear view camera can also be accessed through the infotainment system via App Drawer >> Reverse View Camera, where the video is displayed with a close button.

RVC feed cannot be accessed through the infotainment when the vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h in forward gear.

Exit Conditions

•

When RVC Mode is activated by engaging reverse gear, it exits upon disengaging reverse gear, and the infotainment home screen will be displayed.

•

When RVC Mode is activated through the infotainment system, it can be exited by selecting the cancel button on the screen.

•

RVC Mode exits automatically when the vehicle speed exceeds 20km/h in forward gear.

10.3.2 Feature Description

Front and Rear View Camera assists the driver while reversing and manoeuvring the vehicle at lower speeds. It has the following features:

Normal View

Full View

Static and Dynamic Guidelines

Zoom — in view

1. Normal View

By selecting normal view icon, camera will provides view of vehicle’s rear surrounding on the Infotainment screen.

2. Full View

When enabled, the RVC feed is displayed in the center of the screen, with the RPAS overlay hidden.

3. Static and Dynamic Guidelines

Guidelines will assist the driver in understanding the position/placement of the vehicle with respect to the surroundings by displaying overlays with representation for the vehicle movement when driven straight and when driven in a path.

Dynamic Guidelines indicate path, the vehicle will traverse with current steering position.

Guidelines can be turned ON/OFF based on the user preference.

This will help the driver in adjusting the steering, towards hitting any obstacles.

Color coding on the static guidelines helps to assess the distance of obstacles from the vehicle’s rear. In the camera view, if the red section of the static guideline aligns with an object, the object is within 0.5 meters of the vehicle’s rear. Similarly, amber indicates a distance of up to 1 meter, and green indicates a distance of 1–3 meters from the vehicle’s end.

Click the guideline icon to turn the guidelines ON or OFF.

4.Zoom—in View

By using the zoom-in/out icon, RVC feed can be zoomed in and zoomed out..

10.3.3 Camera Maintenance

Always keep the Camera lens clean from dust. Presence of dirt on lens may lead to poor image quality.

Always use clear water and soft non-abrasive cloth to clean the lens.

Don’t clean the camera lens and the area around the Rear View Camera and Front View Camera with a power washer.

•

In case of any camera related issues, the Infotainment will display ‘Please Contact Service Centre’ and vehicle needs to be taken to the Authorized Mahindra Service Center. Avoid using the Rear View Camera under these circumstances.

•

If the rear of the vehicle is damaged or the camera position is altered, please contact the nearest authorized Mahindra service center for recalibration.

10.3.4 System Limitations

Camera may not operate normally in extremely high or low temperature conditions (operating range: –20°C ~ 65°C)

Under the following conditions, the system may have limited performance or may not function fully:

•

In heavy rain, snow or fog.

•

At night or in very dark places.

•

If the camera is exposed to very bright light sources.

•

Display may flicker, if the camera is lit by LED or fluorescent lighting.

Performance may also be affected in the following situations:

•

If there is a sudden change in temperature, from cold to hot areas.

•

If the camera lens got dirty or obstructed.

•

If any damage to the rear of the vehicle or changes in camera position or settings. Please contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

•

The camera image may be displayed with a slight delay due to processing and is not in real time. As the display is two-dimensional, pointed or protruding obstacles may be difficult to identify. Avoid relying solely on the reverse view camera in such situations, as this may result in injury or damage to objects or the vehicle.

•

Camera performance may also be affected by ice, dust, heavy rain, wind, or exhaust deposit.

•

Images shown on the display are mirror-inverted manner, like the rearview mirror. Make sure that no people or animals and any objects/materials are in the maneuvering area. Pay attention and ensure safety before maneuvering the car. Driver is legally responsible for their car.

The Rear View Camera and Front View Camera is only a supplementary function and may display obstacles from a distorted perspective and inaccurately.

•

Avoid use of the rear view camera in cases of color blindness or impaired color vision.

•

Objects above the ground or suspended may appear farther away than they actually are. In reality, such objects may be closer to the vehicle. In these situations, avoid using the guidelines for distance judgment, as this may lead to misalignment and increase the risk of collision.

•

It is the driver’s responsibility to identify a suitable parking area and park the vehicle safely.

•

The rear view video is displayed when reverse gear is engaged; however, it is not a rear-view monitoring system and does not replace the use of exterior and interior mirrors.

Rear View Camera is only meant to aid the driver and to enhance convenience while parking. It does not in any way replace the driver’s abilities and driving skills while using this system. Under any circumstances, Mahindra accepts no responsibility and cannot be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system.

10.4 Reverse Parking Assistance System (RPAS)

Reverse parking assistance system (RPAS) is provided to aid the driver while parking the vehicle in reverse at a speed of less than 8 km/h. While reversing, RPAS will detect the obstacles at the rear side of the vehicle within the sensing zone, which cannot be viewed through the internal rear view mirror and the outside rear view mirrors. The RPAS will alert the driver by sending out sound alarms at different frequency and display bars in DID to indicate proximity of the obstacle from the vehicle. The alert sound level and the number of display bars is proportional to the distance. Lesser the distance, shorter the interval between beeps & more number of display bars illuminated.

RPAS Sensor Location

Two RPAS sensors are located at the rear bumper to assist driver for hassle-free parking.

Activation & De-activation of RPAS

•

The vehicle should be in IGN ON state to activate the reverse parking assistance system.

•

RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged and deactivate when reverse gear is disengaged.

•

When the obstacles come in the sensing range, the systems starts giving the indication based on the distance and direction of the obstacles as defined in the detecting zones. The closer the obstacles, more display bars illuminate and frequency of beeps increases.

RPAS display on DID screen gives the following information:

•

Left zone indicates obstacle on left side.

•

Right zone indicates obstacle on right side.

•

If obstacle is in center then right and left both zone will get highlight.

•

3 bars indicate how close the obstacle is from the vehicle rear bumper, with all bars highlighted being very close and bar 3rd bar alone being distant.

10.4.1 Operation of RPAS

•

Start the vehicle.

•

Change the gear from neutral to reverse and disengage the hand brake for RPAS information on DID screen.

•

The RPAS will be displayed in the DID screen during obstacle detection.

•

Start moving the vehicle in reverse direction.

•

Display bars in the respective direction will glow according to obstacles in its path.

•

The beep sound can be heard from the driver side speaker.

•

Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle comes closer (crossing each display bar) and the sound will be continuous if any of the obstacle is less than 50 cm.

RPAS is an aiding system. Under no circumstances will Mahindra accept any responsibility or can be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system.

10.4.2 Limitations of RPAS

•

System may not sense obstacles like wire mesh, handrail, small objects which are below the bumper level.

•

System may not sense obstacles with cotton or spongy surface, which will absorb ultrasonic waves emitted by RPAS.

•

System performance is dependent on the reflection angle of the obstacle.

•

System may give false alert without obstacles while reversing the vehicle on grasslands, gravels and bumpy roads considering it to be an obstacle.

•

System may alert you by sensing the ground when the bumper is not fitted in its intended position or when the vehicle is overloaded.

•

System may give false signal while the vehicle moves from plain ground to a slope terrain and vice versa.

•

System may give false signal by sensing the ground when the bumper is tilted more from the normal position or when the vehicle is heavily overloaded.

•

System may give false signal an alarm during heavy rain, snow and heavy wind conditions.

•

The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Some obstacles for example as follows:

–

Sharply-angled objects.

–

Tall or curved curb.

–

Low obstacles (with height of 40 cm above ground level).

–

Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of the vehicle.

•

Depending upon the shape of the obstacle and other environmental factors, the detection distance may shorten or detection may be impossible.

•

Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor.

•

Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected when approached, even if they have been detected once.

•

Because of other ultrasonic sources, sensor may give false alarm for e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners and neon lights.

•

Due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves, the vicinity of the vehicle is noisy. It may cause sensor to give false alarm.

11 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM (HVAC)

HVAC system provided in the vehicle enables occupants to automatically/manually adjust air flow distribution pattern, air flow rate, air intake mode and air temperature inside passenger compartment.

By appropriately adjusting the control knobs/switches provided on the DATC/ETC control panel, located on center console, occupant’s comfort can be ensured.

HVAC system also helps in defogging / de-misting the windshield and windows. Air flow direction can be further controlled by adjusting louvres of air vents. An air filter is provided at the inlet of HVAC blower.

Engine coolant is utilized to heat the cabin air. For cooling the cabin air, an air conditioning circuit based on the vapor compression refrigeration cycle is used. The air conditioning system uses a refrigerant along with a suitable lubricating oil.

Although being non-ozone depleting, the refrigerant is a greenhouse gas, hence once allowed to escape in the atmosphere, it adversely affects the environment by contributing to global warming/climate change.

Refrigerant used in system is a hazardous liquefied gas and is under high pressure.

The refrigerant is colorless and has ethereal or faint sweetish odor. Exposure of refrigerant to skin or eyes may cause irritation and frostbite.

They can also cause suffocation, dizziness and loss of concentration. When mixed with compressed air or certain other refrigerants, it may form flammable mixture. Never try to service HVAC system yourself which would involve refrigerant handling.

If you sleep while operating the air conditioner or heater with all the windows closed, you may suffocate to death due to lack of ventilation. When you operate the air conditioner or heater, ventilate frequently.

To ensure sufficient air flow and hence adequate HVAC system performance, air flow path should be kept free of obstructions. Keep system’s air intake, located near plenum appliqué, free of snow, leaves and other debris. Also keep the area in front of air vents free of any obstruction inside the cabin.

11.1 Air Vents

Multiple vents are provided for distributing the air, being force-circulated by HVAC blower, throughout the passenger compartment.

Side Vents: The two side vents are located one each at the left and right extreme ends of the instrument panel. Both the side vents provide air flow to the front seat passengers.

Center Vents: Two center vents are located below the CID screen in the center console. Both the center vents provide air flow to the front seat passengers. Direct air to the desired direction by adjusting the Louvres up/down or left/right.

Second Row Vents: The second row AC vents are located on the rear side of the center console.

Third Row Vents: The third row vents (LH and RH) are located on side trims on either side of the third row seats.

It will be provided only for variants which have the third-row seats.

Rear blower speed control knob is provided below the third row (RH) vent to control the air flow to the third-row vents.

The third row AC is switched ON by the Rear AC button on the DATC/ETC Control panel, The airflow is controlled by the rear ac blower speed control knob on the third row RH side trim.

11.2 Climate Control through CID

Climate control feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

User can press Climate Control option and select different climate modes available in XUV7XO.

Power Off:

•

HVAC system is turned off when the user presses the power button.

•

Press the power button to restart the HVAC system.

Types of modes are described below,

Mode Selection:

User can access various mode by clicking next/previous icon.

User can select various mode like – Face mode, Face & Foot Mode, Foot Mode, Foot & Defogger Mode, Front Defogger Mode.

Recirculation Mode:

•

User can select Re-circulation mode by pressing the Recirculation mode icon.

•

In re-circulation mode, air is re-circulated in passenger compartment If it is OFF, fresh air is supplied in passenger compartment.

Blower Speed Control:

Blower Fan Speed can be controlled by pressing '+' or '-' button on HVAC controller.

Auto Mode:

User can select auto mode by pressing the ‘Auto’ button on HVAC controller.

In AUTO mode, with respect to the surrounding condition, set temperature is automatically obtained. This is done by adjusting the blower speed and fresh/recirculation mode to optimum level.

Seat Ventilation:

Blower speed of the seat ventilation can be controlled by using this icon.

For every short press on the seat ventilation icon, the levels shall be changed by one step to another step like Level 3→Level 2 → Level 1 → OFF →Level 1 → Level 2 → Level 3→ Level 2 →Level 3 → OFF.

Set Temperature:

Touching -/+ will decrease/increase temperature. This option is available on both driver and codriver side.

MAX AC:

MAX AC mode can be used to attain MAX cooling in a short period of time.

When MAX AC switch is pressed

1. In cabin temperature is set to minimum

2. Blower fan speed is set to Max.

3. Air intake mode is set to recirculation mode.

4. Air distribution mode is set to Face mode.

Rear AC:

11.3 Dual Automatic Temperature Control (If Equipped)

A	Smart Air Purifier Indicator	J	A/C (ON/OFF)
B	Seat Ventilation (Co-driver)	K	Auto Mode
C	AQI Indicator	L	Dual Mode
D	Max Defogger	M	Mode Selection
E	Rear Defogger	N	MAX A/C
F	Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode	O	Rear A/C (ON/OFF)
G	Seat Ventilation (Driver)	P	Set Temperature– Co-Driver
H	POWER (ON/OFF)	Q	Blower Speed Control
I	Set Temperature –Driver

Power ON/OFF: Touch to turn on/off climate control system.

Auto: If you press the AUTO switch with AC ON, AUTO indicator appears on CID screen and the set temperature is maintained while the airflow and air distribution are automatically controlled.

AQI Indicator: AQI indicator displays Air Quality Index value inside the cabin.

Rear Defogger: Touch to turn on/off rear defogger.

The rear defogger heats the rear windshield clearing the fog / mist.

Max Defogger: Touch to turn on/off Max Defogger. In this mode, air at maximum temperature and blower speed is directed towards the windshield with fresh air mode enabled. Max Defogger mode is deactivated by pressing any button on the climate control screen.

Do not use recirculation mode in the vehicle for extended periods of time with every window closed. Doing so can cause headache, drowsiness and fogged window due to lack of oxygen.

If exhaust gas comes in, there is a danger of carbon monoxide poisoning. Set to the fresh air intake mode after passing through a dusty or polluted area with air recirculation mode in operation.

When choosing foot mode, some air flows out from windshield defogger vents, Side defogger vents and side vents.

Rear A/C: Rear AC icon is used to turn ON/OFF the 3rd row AC blower.

Rear AC blower can be turned ON only when the Rear AC icon is turned ON.

A/C: Touch to turn on/off air conditioning. Turning it off will allow only the blower to run with the existing temperature.

DUAL Mode: This function allows controlling the co-driver side temperature separately with engine ON.

•

If you press the dual mode, dual mode icon turns ON in CID display.

•

When the Dual mode is turned ON, driver side and co-driver passenger will be able to change the temperature individually as desired.

When the DUAL mode switch is turned off, the passenger temperature returns to the driver side set temperature.

Blower Speed Control: Touching -/+ will decrease/increase the blower speed between 1 to 8.

Set Temperature: Touching -/+ will decrease/increase temperature. This option is available on both driver and co-driver side.

MAX AC: MAX AC mode can be used to attain MAX cooling in a short period of time.

When MAX AC switch is pressed

In cabin temperature is set to minimum.

Blower fan speed is set to Max.

Air intake mode is set to recirculation mode.

Air distribution mode is set to Face mode.

11.3.1 DATC – Auto Operation Mode

Use only when the engine is running.

Press the AUTO icon.

AUTO icon is displayed on the CID Screen.

Set the desired cabin temperature with the temperature control knob.

The temperature of the passenger compartment is automatically maintained according to the set temperature.

If the driver and co-driver require different temperatures in their respective zones, the same can be done by pressing the dual mode switch and subsequently, setting different temperatures using temperature control.

When you use the blower speed control icons, mode icons or Max defogger / Max AC icons during the auto operation mode, AUTO icon on the display goes out and the air conditioner system can be controlled manually.

11.3.2 DATC – Manual Operation Mode

Use only when the engine is running.

Press AC ON icon.

Set the desired temperature by rotating the temperature control knob.

Adjust the blower speed by pressing the blower speed control switches.

Select the air flow by pressing the air distribution/ mode switch.

Select the air source mode by pressing recirculation mode switch.

In manual mode, the AUTO indicator on display does not come on and you can manually adjust the climate conditions by controlling the temperature, blower speed, mode (air distribution), A/C, air source selection, and DUAL temp. selection control switches.

To activate the auto operation mode, press AUTO switch.

Quiet Mode: When a phone call is received via the vehicle connected phone, the system automatically.

Reduces the blower speed to quieter setting.

Minimizes background noise from the HVAC system.

11.4 Electronic Temperature Control (if equipped)

A	Temperature control Knob
B	Air distribution/Mode switches
C	Front defogger switch
D	Blower speed control knob
E	Rear Defogger switch
F	Rear A/C switch
G	Recirculation mode switch
H	Economy Mode switch
I	A/C switch

Temperature Control Knob

By operating the temperature control knob, temperature of air being discharged from various vents can be adjusted to the desired level. Engine coolant is utilized to heat, whereas the air conditioner is used to cool the air inside the AC unit. Based upon selected position of the temperature control knob, the desired discharged air temperature can be obtained.

By rotating the knob anti-clockwise and setting it to the extreme left position, maximum cooling is obtained. When the knob is rotated clockwise, the discharged air progressively starts getting warmer and at the extreme right position, hot air is discharged.

Blower Speed Control Knob

The blower force-circulates the air through the HVAC unit and distributes it throughout the passenger compartment.

Blower is OFF when the blower speed control knob is set to small (Blower Symbol) position (extreme left). To switch-ON the blower, rotate the control knob clockwise which progressively increases the blower speed.

Economy Mode switch (ECON)

ECON switch turns ON economy mode. During ECON AC operation the system automatically cuts OFF at a higher temperature than normal AC. The operation can be used during mild weather conditions for better fuel efficiency. Comfort level may be compromised during this operation.

Press the ECON switch again to turn OFF economy mode.

A/C switch

This button turns the air-conditioner ON or OFF.

When the air conditioner is functioning, air gets cooled and de-humidified before being circulated inside the cabin. In hot weather conditions, it will take a slightly longer time to cool the interior as compared to cooler weather. Fuel consumption will be relatively higher if the vehicle is being driven with the air conditioner ON.

AC will function only when both engine and blower are switched ON.

•

In certain operating conditions when the engine gets overheated, the engine management system may switch off the air conditioner intermittently

•

The air conditioner should be operated at least for ten minutes once every fortnight, even during winter months. This allows AC system components to get lubricated periodically and ensures optimum system

•

During extreme cold weather conditions, the air conditioner may not function until temperature of the air near the evaporator rises above a predefined threshold

•

When air conditioner is ON, moisture is extracted from the air. The resulting condensate is drained off from the vehicle. It is therefore normal, if you see a small pool of water under your vehicle

Re-circulation Mode (Re-circulation mode switch ON)

To set the HVAC system to recirculation mode, press the recirculation mode button. The LED on the button illuminates, indicating the recirculation mode is active. In this intake mode, the air from inside the passenger compartment will be sucked by the blower and utilized further to ventilate /cool / heat the cabin.

For quick cabin cooling/heating or while driving through dusty/polluted region, re-circulation mode can be selected for short periods. Driving with this mode active, may lead to better fuel economy and longer HVAC filter life. However, running the air conditioner in re-circulation mode for long will make cabin air too dry and oxygen level drops inside cabin the turning the air stale. On the contrary, keeping air intake control in recirculation mode for long, with air conditioner switched OFF, will make cabin air too humid and windshield and window are more likely to become foggy. Hence, never drive in recirculation mode for long, shift back to fresh air mode intermittently.

Never keep recirculation mode selected continuously for long period. Prolonged use of the HVAC system in recirculation mode may cause windshield/windows to mist/fog-up, impairing visibility which can lead to an accident, endangering you and others.

Fresh Air Mode (Re-Circulation Mode Switch Off)

To set the HVAC system to fresh air mode, press the re-circulation mode button again. The LED on this button switches OFF, indicating that fresh air mode is active. In this intake mode, fresh air from outside the vehicle is sucked by the blower and utilized further to ventilate /cool / heat the cabin.

Rear AC switch

Rear AC Switch is used to turn ON/OFF the Rear AC blower.

Rear AC blower can be turned ON only when the Rear AC switch is turned ON

Air Distribution/Mode switches

The air flowing out of various vents can be controlled by the air distribution/mode switches.

•

Face Mode — When face mode switch is pressed, air is discharged from the Center vents, second row vents and side vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the face of the passengers

•

Face-Foot Mode — When Face-Foot mode switch is pressed, air is discharged from the Center vents, second row vents, Foot vents and side vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards both the face and feet of passengers at the same time

•

Foot Mode — When foot mode switch is pressed, air is discharged from the two foot vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the feet of passengers seated on front seats

•

Foot and Front Defogger Mode — When foot and front defogger mode switch is pressed air is discharged from the foot vents, side defogger vents and windshield defogger vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the feet of passengers while de-misting/defogging.

•

Front Defogger Mode — When Front Defogger mode switch is pressed air is discharged from the side defogger vents and windshield defogger vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the front windshield to ensure de-misting / defogging.

Rear Defogger Switch

Rear defogger switch is located on the ETC control panel. Press the switch once to activate the rear defogger. The LED on the switch illuminates upon activation and the rear defogger heats the rear windshield clearing the fog / mist. Switch OFF the rear defogger by pressing the switch once as soon as the fog / mist is cleared.

If the rear defogger switch is not switched OFF manually, it will turn OFF automatically after a pre-defined time, based on ambient temperature. If you want to switch the rear defogger ON again, press the rear defogger switch again.

On second and subsequent activations of the rear defogger in the same ignition cycle, the rear defogger ON time will be half the duration of the first activation.

11.5 Remote Cooling (If Equipped)

Remote cooling feature allows user to control cabin climate settings from outside the vehicle.

•

During remote cooling operation, Cabin temperature settings will be changed to default 18 °C in Auto mode for both driver and co-driver to achieve faster cooling.

•

Vehicle cabin will be cooled down before entering vehicle. Thus, making cabin more comfortable for the passengers when they enter the car that was parked in the hot sun.

Activate Remote Cooling feature

Remote cooling starts by automatically once we press “start engine” button in the Adrenox connect mobile app.

In Automatic transmission vehicle

•

All doors closed.

•

Gear is in PARK position.

•

Fuel level is greater than 10 liter.

•

Vehicle should be in Standstill.

When vehicle is started remotely using Adrenox connect mobile app, by default Cabin climate settings will be changed to 18 °C in Auto mode.

In remote Engine start condition user will have access to control below cabin climate setting under Climate settings.

Duration time: User can select the time duration for which remote cooling will be active using Adrenox connect mobile app, duration can be selected from minimum of 2 minute to maximum of 15 minute.

Cabin Temperature settings: User can change temperature settings during remote cooling.

Front defrost: User can activate / de-activate front defrost during remote cooling by selecting front defrost option in mobile app.

Rear Defrost: User can activate / de-activate Rear defrost during remote cooling by selecting Rear defrost option in Adrenox connect mobile App.

Once vehicle is started remotely customer will get feedback in the Adrenox connect mobile app.

Remote cooling can be de-activated by using Mobile app. if vehicle is already in Remote start condition by Pressing start engine button, remote cooling will be deactivated.

In mobile app customer will get notification if remote cooling is failed.

Remote cooling operation is suggested to be used while vehicle is parked in open sunny area for long duration. It is recommended not to operate remote cooling when vehicle is parked in a closed environment.

11.6 Rapid Cabin Cooling

Rapid Cabin Cooling In DATC

For rapid cooling of the cabin, the following AC settings are recommended:

•

Make sure that all the windows are fully closed.

•

Fully open the vents and adjust Louvres to direct air toward face.

•

Turn ON AC.

•

Press MAX AC Switch.

Rapid Cabin Cooling In ETC

For rapid cooling of the cabin, the following AC settings are recommended:

•

Make sure that all the windows are fully closed.

•

Set the blower to maximum speed.

•

Fully open the vents and adjust louvres to direct air toward face.

•

Set the air distribution control to face mode.

•

Set air intake control to recirculation mode.

•

Turn the air conditioner ON.

•

Set the temperature control knob to extreme left (coolest) position.

For faster cabin cooling, you can select re-circulated air intake mode initially. Once passenger compartment reaches a comfortable temperature, shift to fresh air mode. Also blower speed and temperature control knob can be re-adjusted as desired.

If your vehicle was parked in the hot sun with all the windows closed, drive the vehicle with windows open for the first few minute. This will help in venting the hot interior air out and allow the air conditioner to cool the cabin quickly. In case you are leaving the vehicle parked in sun frequently then activate the Active Cooling Option.

11.7 Rapid Cabin Heating

For rapid heating of the cabin, the following AC settings are recommended:

Make sure that all the windows are fully closed.

Set the blower to maximum speed.

Set the air distribution control to foot mode.

Set air intake control to recirculation mode.

Set the temperature control knob to extreme right (hot) position.

For de-humidified heating, switch the air conditioner ON. So on rainy conditions if the heater is ON then also keep the AC ON.

For faster cabin heating, you can select re-circulated air intake mode initially. Once passenger compartment reaches a comfortable temperature, blower speed and temperature control knob can be re-adjusted as desired.

In extreme cold weather conditions, the engine coolant takes time to get heated up. Hence, it might take a while for hot air discharge, even when blower is running and temperature control dial is set to hot position.

11.8 Points to Remember

•

For quickly defogging/de-misting outside of front windshield, it is advisable to operate the windshield wiper/washer for few times intermittently.

•

If snow has deposited on windshield, use ice scraper to remove ice deposited before using wiper.

•

In freezing weather, warm the front windshield with the defogger before using the windshield washer. Also use a washer fluid having anti-freezing properties. These will help prevent the washer fluid from freezing on your windshield.

•

Dirty/contaminated windshield would make misting / fogging-up worse. Always keep the inside and outside of windshield clean.

•

Reduced air flow because of clogged HVAC filter or any other obstructions in air flow path may lead to inadequate defogging/de-misting performance. If air flow seems to have considerably reduced, get the filter cleaned or replaced immediately. Air flow path should be kept free of obstructions.

•

Reduced cooling performance from air conditioner may lead to inadequate defogging/de-misting. If cooling effect seems to have dropped considerably, get the air conditioning system checked by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Your vehicle is equipped with a HVAC filter. If the AC performance is considerably low, it is recommended to have the HVAC filter checked at the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Keep in mind that a choked filter will also lead to poor cooling.

Never operate HVAC system with the filter removed. This may result in premature failure of system components.

12 CONNECTIVITY AND ENTERTAINMENT

12.1 Power Outlet

Front USB Outlet

The USB outlets are provided on the center switch bezel below the CID control.

USB (A) as per the image provided can be used as an input to the music system. You can connect iPods, USB memory sticks, etc. as an input and listen to the music through the vehicle speakers.

USB (B) can be used only for charging.

A: LH -Type C Charging Port (If Equipped)

B: RH - USB Port

It is recommended to connect an input device only when the vehicle is stationary. Trying to connect an input device while driving may distract your attention and lead to an ACCIDENT.

Third Row 12V Power Outlet (If Equipped)

The 12V Power outlet socket is provided below the third row (RH) AC vents. Electrical equipment/appliances like mobile charger, cigarette lighter etc., can be used in the outlet.

The power sockets function only when the ignition is in ACC or ON positions. It is recommended to use the power sockets when the engine is ON to avoid battery drain.

To avoid serious injury:

•

Close the power outlet cap when not in use.

•

Do not allow children to use or play with the power outlet.

•

When using electrical appliances, strictly follow the manufacturer’s instruction manual.

•

Never use the power outlet for electric heaters while sleeping.

•

Never insert foreign objects into the power outlet.

•

Never use malfunctioning electrical appliances.

•

Never insert inappropriate or badly fitting plugs into the power outlet.

Do not modify, disassemble or repair the power outlet in any way. Doing so may result in unexpected malfunction or fire, which could cause serious damage to equipment and/or personal injuries. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for any necessary repairs.

To prevent injuries and accidents, secure all electrical appliances before use. Do not use any appliance that may:

•

Distract the driver while driving, or hamper safe driving.

•

Result in a fire or burn injuries due to the appliance rolling, falling or overheating.

•

Emit steam, while the windows of the passenger compartment are closed.

•

Use the power outlets only when the engine is running. Remove the plug from the power outlet after using the electric device. Using the power outlets when the engine is OFF or leaving the electric device plugged in for many hours may cause the battery to drain.

•

Do not use the power outlet to connect electric accessories or equipment that are not designed to operate on 12V.

•

Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into the power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio noise and may interfere with other electronic systems or devices in your vehicle.

12.2 Wireless Charging (If Equipped)

Front Wireless Mobile Charging (If Equipped)

The front wireless mobile charging unit is located in front of the center console below the front USB ports.

Front wireless mobile charging can be enable/ disable through CID settings –> Vehicle Settings –> Convenience –> Front wireless charger (Enable/Disable)

Rear Wireless Mobile Charging (If Equipped)

Rear wireless mobile charging unit is located below the rear AC vents.

The wireless charging system is designed for one smart device confirming to QI standard only. Please refer to your smart phone’s user manual or the website of the manufacturer to check whether your smart phone supports QI wireless charging.

Rear wireless mobile charging can be enable/ disable through CID settings –> Vehicle Settings –> Convenience –> Rear wireless charger (Enable/Disable)

If any metallic object such as coins is placed between the wireless charger and the smart phone, the charging will be stopped and a warning “Foreign object detected’ will be displayed on the DID. Kindly remove the coin or the metallic object. This is done to stop heating of the metallic object which might hurt the driver or the passengers.

Do not place misalign your phone from the charging pad. It may not charge or give a warning on the DID.

Do not keep any Debit/Credit card between the phone and the charger.

12.3 Alexa Reference Guide

Alexa Built-in is your in-car voice assistant that helps you stay connected, entertained, and in control hands-free. With Alexa, you can play music, get directions, control smart home devices, and even operate certain car functions using simple voice commands

12.3.1 Registering / Signing In to Alexa

•

Have an active Amazon account which can be created using below URL
https://www.amazon.in/

•

Install Alexa App in your mobile device and sign in with same account.

•

Follow the Instruction on the mobile app to complete the account settings before Sign-in into Car.(Refer Alexa Companion app section)

Alexa sign in

•

Open Alexa application from CID app drawer.

•

Click on the “Sign-in” button.

•

Wait for the QR code to be generated.

•

Scan the QR code with your mobile and sign in using your Amazon account. Make sure you create an account at https://www.amazon.in/ before scanning.

•

After signing in, you must grant permissions for Navigation and Contacts. These permissions are required to use navigation features as well as make calls and send messages.

•

Alexa can be triggered using the wake word “Alexa”,

•

Alexa wake word will be enabled by default.

•

To disable it further open the Alexa app and go to the Alexa home screen.

•

At the bottom left corner, you’ll find a toggle button that allows you to disable Alexa Wake Word.

12.3.2 Alexa Calls and messages

Alexa Supports Calling and Messaging options.

Follow the below steps to enable Alexa calls and messages.

•

Enable Bluetooth in Your Vehicle and pair your Phone via Bluetooth.

•

Grant Access to Contacts both on CID and mobile device.

•

Open the Alexa App from CID → Go to Settings.

•

Under Calling & Texting verify whether your Phone Name is Listed under it and tap on it.

•

Enable Contacts & SMS.

•

Scroll to Bluetooth Settings and Tapping on it will redirect you to vehicles Bluetooth settings.

•

Go to SMS Settings under Phone Settings → Enable SMS Readout (so Alexa can read your messages).

•

Ensure Your Phonebook is Synced in the Vehicle under Home Screen → Phone tile → Contacts).

Sign in to the Alexa Companion App using the same account linked to your vehicle (This is required for sending messages.) refer companion app sign-in process under Alexa.

12.3.3 Alexa Utterances

The basic format for giving a command to Alexa is: Wake Word + Action + Module + Value

Examples:

•

Alexa, turn on the air conditioner

•

Alexa, set the temperature to 25 degrees.

Vehicle control utterances

•

Alexa, turn on Aircon / Air conditioner / AC

•

Alexa, turn off Aircon / Air conditioner / AC

•

Alexa, set to AUTO mode

•

Alexa, turn on fan / blower

•

Alexa, turn off fan / blower

•

Alexa, set fan/blower speed to 6 (any number up to 8)

•

Alexa, set the fan to maximum / set the blower speed to maximum

•

Alexa, decrease the fan speed to minimum

•

Alexa, turn ON/OFF air-recirculation/re-circulation

•

Alexa, Increase Driver temperature (works when HVAC in Dual mode only)

•

Alexa, decrease Driver temperature (works when HVAC in Dual mode only)

•

Alexa, Increase passenger temperature

•

Alexa, decrease passenger temperature

•

Alexa, Increase temperature

•

Alexa, Increase temperature by 2

•

Alexa, open sunroof

•

Alexa, close sunroof

•

Alexa, open window

•

Alexa, close window

•

Alexa, open sky roof

•

Alexa, close sky roof

•

Alexa, set brightness to (1 to 8)

(Only CID brightness can be adjusted).

Media/Music utterances

•

Alexa, play music

•

Alexa, pause song

•

Alexa, Sing a classical song

•

Alexa, resume

•

Alexa, next song / Alexa, previous song

•

Alexa, increase volume / Alexa, decrease volume

•

Alexa, play 93.5 FM

•

Alexa, play from Bluetooth / Alexa, play from USB

•

Alexa, mute

•

Alexa, unmute

•

Alexa, switch to USB

•

Alexa, switch to Bluetooth/Bluetooth to FM

•

Alexa, switch from Bluetooth to FM

•

Alexa, switch to alexa music

Communication utterances

•

Alexa, call “contact name”

•

Alexa, call (Number)

•

Alexa, send message to “Contact Name”

•

Alexa, read my new messages

Navigation Utterances

•

Alexa, navigate to “Any desired place” (This utterance will redirect to navigation page with the location. Manually start the navigation).

•

Alexa, what is my ETA to “Any desire place”?

•

Alexa, How is the traffic to “Any desire place”?

•

Alexa, cancel navigation

•

Alexa, find nearby parking

•

Alexa, find nearby coffee shop/ restaurant

General assistance utterances

•

Alexa, I am bored

•

Alexa, play with me

•

Alexa, when is Gandhi Jayanthi

•

Alexa, open chat GPT and plan me an itinerary in Chennai

•

Alexa, what’s the weather now?

•

Alexa, what’s the news today?

•

Alexa, what’s the time now?

•

Alexa, Good morning

•

Alexa, what’s the latest news

•

“Alexa, how many stars are there in the universe?”

•

“Alexa, what is the oldest living thing on Earth?”

•

“Alexa, how big is the observable universe?”

•

“Alexa, what is the hardest non material?”

•

“Alexa, when is the next leap year?”

•

“Alexa, how many days are there in this year?”

•

“Alexa, when was the last solar eclipse?”

•

“Alexa, what major scientific discovery happened in 1915?”

XUV 7XO Owners Manual skill Utterances

•

Alexa, My key fob is not working when I try to enter. What could be the reason?

•

Alexa, If my car battery dies, how do I get the car started again?

•

Alexa, It’s raining heavily, and my windshield keeps fogging up. What should I do?

•

Alexa, My tire looks a bit flat. What’s the safest way to deal with it?

•

Alexa, I’m hearing a beeping sound when I reverse. What is the car trying to tell me?

•

Alexa, I’m planning a long drive today. Anything I should check in the car before leaving?

12.3.4 Alexa Companion app

Alexa Companion mobile app can be used to manage Alexa-enabled devices, control music playback, shopping list on the go, keep track of upcoming remainders.

Follow the below steps for Login and Registration:

•

Open the application and Select ‘Create Account’ to register a new Amazon account or click on sign in to use your existing Amazon shopping account.

Ensure that you log in with the same Amazon account for Alexa in your vehicle and in this companion application.

•

Click on continue

•

Follow basic set up guidelines.

•

Now Alexa companion is application is ready to be paired with Adrenox.

12.3.5 Music & media services configuration

•

Open the Alexa Companion App on your mobile device and tap the menu icon (three lines) located at the bottom-right corner of the screen.

•

Navigate to Settings and Select Music and Podcasts under Alexa Preferences.

•

Choose Link New Service and select your preferred music application from the list and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the linking process.

12.3.6 Enabling Mahindra Skill for Alexa

If you want to check your vehicle’s status using Alexa devices, you need to enable the Mahindra Skill. By enabling this feature, you can check your vehicle’s status using your mobile device or in-home Alexa-enabled devices. Ensure that you are logged in with the same account on your vehicle system, the Alexa companion app, and your smart home Alexa devices.

There are two ways to do this:

1. Using the Adrenox App

2. Using the Alexa Companion App

1. Using the Adrenox App

Adrenox and Alexa companion application must be installed and logged in before following the below steps.

•

Open the Adrenox app on your mobile phone and Tap the three lines (menu) at the top left.

•

Scroll down and select Settings and Go to the In-home Alexa section.

•

Tap Continue to link your account with Alexa.

•

You will be redirected to the Alexa companion application with Mahindra skills, Tap on the Link button.

2. Using the Alexa Companion App

•

Open the Alexa companion app and tap the three lines icon at the bottom.

•

Select Skills & Games and search for Mahindra in the search bar and Tap on the Mahindra Skill.

•

You will be redirected to the Mahindra Skill page, Tap Setting and complete account linking.

•

Tap on launch and select your vehicle from the device list.

12.3.7 Enabling Chat GPT skills for Mahindra

•

Open the Alexa companion app. Tap the three lines icon at the bottom.

•

Select Skills & Games and Search for Mahindra in the search bar and Tap on the Mahindra Chat GPT Skill.

•

Click on enable to use.

•

Now Chat GPT is integrated with your vehicles Alexa,

•

To disable the chat GPT click on the ‘Disable skill’ tab.

How to use Alexa with Mahindra’s Chat GPT:

•

On Using the voice comment —> “Alexa, Open Mahindra’s chat GPT” – Mahindra, chat GPT welcome page will be loaded, then follow with the required request like,

•

“Alexa, tell me about XUV 7X0.” – In CID Alexa will display about XUV 7X0 content pulled from Chat GPT with audio.

12.3.8 Enabling XUV 7XO Owners Manual Skill

By enabling this skill, Alexa can be integrated with ChatGPT to deliver answers directly from Mahindra approved XUV 7XO Owner’s Manual.

•

Open the Alexa companion app. Tap the three lines icon at the bottom.

•

Select Skills & Games and Search for Owners Manual in the search bar and Tap on the XUV7XO Owner’s Manual.

•

Click on Launch and then select This device. After launching, it can be used in vehicle as well as in Alexa companion app.

How to use Alexa with XUV 7XO Owners Manual Skill:

•

On Using the voice comment —> “Alexa, Open vehicle owner’s manual” – Owners manual skill integrated Alexa homepage will be loaded, then follow with the required request like,

•

“Alexa, can I turn ON my cruise control now?.” – In CID Alexa will display about cruise control information provided in Owners Manual.

12.3.9 Manage Alexa Voice History

Alexa processes your voice commands to provide responses. Voice recordings are securely stored in your Amazon account and can be reviewed or deleted at any time.

To delete recordings or manage privacy settings:

•

Open the Alexa Companion App on your mobile device and tap the menu icon (three lines) at the bottom-right corner.

•

Navigate to Alexa Privacy and select ‘Review Voice History’ to view or delete recordings.

12.3.10 Alexa Animations and Status in Center Information Display

• Listening: A blue chrome bar at the bottom of the screen means Alexa is active and will listen after user says the wake word.

• Processing: A blue chrome bar at the bottom of the screen with pulsing animation means Alexa is processing your request.

• Speaking: A blue chrome bar at the bottom of the screen will pulsate when Alexa speaks back to user. Sometimes Alexa does the action directly by showing a toaster message or display card or by performing the intended action directly.

Connectivity Status

• Alexa icon displayed at the top-left corner of the centre screen indicates that Alexa is signed in and connected.

12.3.11 Alexa Pre-requisites

Required Internet Connectivity Sources

Alexa requires an active internet connection to function properly. You can connect using:

•

Embedded SIM (eSIM) in the vehicle for direct connectivity.

•

Mobile Hotspot from your smartphone or another device.

•

For smooth performance, ensure a stable connection (4G / 5G). Ensuring the optimal speeds improves the overall Alexa experience.

Supported Services and Regional Availability

– Music Services Supported Alexa supports popular music streaming services such as Amazon Music and their Partners based on sometime

– Navigation Providers Supported Alexa supports Navigation features with in-built MAPPLS / Map My India application, making your journeys enriched with voice commands.

– Features Not Available in Certain Regions For the latest list of supported services and regional availability, visit: https://www.amazon.in/alexa

FAQs and Known Limitations

General FAQs

Alexa not working

1. Sign-out and sign-in (also try with other accounts)

2. Set the date & time

3. Sleep/ Ignition cycle or Battery Reset

4. Connect to Wi-Fi

QR Code not generating

– Check ESIM Network:

•

Ensure your device has a stable mobile network signal.

•

If the signal is weak, move to an area with better coverage.

– Verify Internet Connectivity:

•

Open apps like Times Now or Weather to confirm internet access.

•

If these apps load properly, your internet is working.

– If ESIM Network is Fine but QR Code is Not Generating:

Switch to a Wi-Fi connection and try again.

Sometimes QR code generation requires a strong and stable internet connection

If Issue Persists Visit the nearest service Center for assistance.

Troubleshooting

– Alexa not responding or offline

Check if your car is connected to the internet via eSIM or hotspot

– Frequent disconnections

Ensure your hotspot remains active and within range. Disable battery-saving modes on your phone that may turn off the hotspot.

– Slow response or buffering

Verify network speed. Switch to a stronger Wi-Fi or mobile data connection if possible.

Common Issues and Solutions

– Alexa Not Waking Up

Check internet connectivity

– Navigation Not Launching

•

Confirm that the navigation app is installed and linked

•

Restart the CID system and try again.

– Skills Not Responding

•

Ensure the skill is enabled in the Alexa Companion App.

•

Update the app and retry the command.

– Limitations

•

When there is a transition between network to no network zone Alexa icon disappears and will not work

•

“Tell me a story” playback can be controlled only via voice not via display touch.

•

Brightness cannot be set to maximum and minimum via Alexa voice

•

Waypoint cannot be added to Map via Alexa voice

•

Kindle has known limitations. For more details kindly contact service center

•

Controlling Alexa when in USB source or making Alexa to perform in USB mode is not supported.

12.3.12 De-registering / Signing Out of Alexa

De-registering from the CID:

•

Open the Alexa application from CID.

•

Tap on Settings located at the top-left corner.

•

Scroll down to the bottom of the settings menu and click on Sign Out to de-register your account.

De-registering using Alexa Companion App

•

Open the Alexa Companion App on your mobile device.

•

Tap on the three lines (menu icon) at the bottom-right corner and select Settings.

•

Under settings select ‘Device Settings’.

•

Choose the account or device you want to de-register.

•

Scroll down and tap De-register.

De-registering using Amazon Web Portal

•

Go to Devices under your account settings.

•

Select the device you want to de-register.

•

Click on De-register to remove the device from your account.

12.4 ADRENOX+ Connect

XUV 7XO is equipped with Adrenox+ Connect, It provides information in your mobile phone about location & status of the vehicle and allows to control certain vehicle features in a secured way for both Android and iOS platform. Kindly use the ADRENOX connect mobile app for connected car related features.

12.4.1 KYC (Know Your Customer) Registration

To activate connected car features including access to Adrenox mobile App, KYC process must be completed successfully.

•

Customer must produce valid mobile number, communication address & email ID for KYC registration. for registration purpose.

•

Preferred mobile number entered during the KYC process will be the login for Adrenox mobile app.

•

After successful KYC registration, customer must download the “ADRENOX connect” mobile application from Google Play store or iOS app store.

Subscription for the connected car is free for a specified period, depending on the model variant. Post expiry of the free subscription, the same can be renewed by the user for an extended period.

12.4.2 Login & Registration

Follow the below steps for Login and Registration:

•

You can select sign up option from login page which redirects to sign up page.

•

Then enter registered Mobile number given in KYC form for connected services and click on Generate OTP.

•

OTP with a validity will be sent to the same mobile number.

•

If OTP is not received, you can request the OTP again by clicking on “Resend OTP”.

•

After entering valid OTP, click on “Verify My Account”.

•

On successful verification you will be notified with a message “Account Verified”.

•

You will be directed to “Terms and Condition” with “I Agree” option on successful authentication.

12.4.3 Forgot/Change Password and Change Pin

This Feature allows the existing user to change Password and change PIN.

In case user forgets the Password and PIN below flow helps to create PIN and password.

Forgot your password

In case you forget your password:

•

Tap on the Forgot Password? link from login page.

•

In forgot password page, enter the registered mobile number for connected services and click on Generate OTP.

•

Enter the OTP and click on Next button.

•

Enter New Password and Confirm Password and tap on Save button.

Change your password

To Change your password on app if you are already logged in:

•

Tap on the top Left corner from home screen.

•

Click on My Account and select Change Password.

•

Page will open with Old password, New password and Confirm password fields.

•

Fill all the required field and tap on save button.

12.4.4 ADRENOX+ Connect Features

FEATURE	DESCRIPTION
Alerts
Over Speed Alert	Alert will be triggered when vehicle exceeds the set speed limit. This speed limit value can be set under alert configuration in mobile application your car exceeds the set speed limit. This speed limit value can be set under alert configuration in mobile application.
High Engine Temperature Alert	Alerts when Engine temperature goes beyond the predefined limit.
Tyre Pressure Alert	Alerts on excessive/very low and high tyre pressure and navigate to nearby petrol station.
Vehicle Start/Stop Alert	Notifies when normal vehicle start /stop event is detected.
Door Open Alert	Notifies when any door is open while the vehicle is in motion, and also notifies when a remote lock is triggered but a door remains open.
Geo-Fence Alert	Alerts when your vehicle moves out of a set boundary area. Helps you to create virtual boundary for any region and will be notified whenever your vehicle moves in or out of that boundary.
Unauthorised vehicle entry Alert	Alerts the user when any unauthorized entry in the vehicle is detected.
Low Fuel Alert	Identifies low fuel level and notifies in your mobile application. Helps you to find nearby fuel station.
Route Deviation Alert	Alerts the user when the vehicle deviates from the pre-defined navigation.
Time Fencing Alert	Notifies you when any movement of vehicle is detected during set time period.
Seat Belt Alert	Notifies you whenever the driver/ co-driver is not wearing the seat belt during vehicle movement in mobile application.
Driver Drowsiness Alert	Alerts the user when the driver is detected to be drowsy while driving.
Insurance Expiry Alert	Suggests in advance to renew the Insurance as expiry date of Insurance approaches.
PUC Expiry Alert	Notifies you in advance when the PUC is about to expire.
Engine Idle Alert	Alerts when engine idling is detected for a set period of time. Time can be configured in mobile application.
Service Reminder	This feature alert’s the user for service due.
PKE / RKE Low Battery Alert	This feature alert’s the user when key battery is low.
Low DEF Alert***	This feature alert’s the user when DEF level is low.
DPF Choke Alert***	This feature alert’s the user when Diesel Particulate filter is about to choke.
Brake Pad Wear Alert	This feature alert’s the user when Front Brake Pad is worn out.
Critical Malfunction alert	This feature alert’s the user when a critical malfunction is detected
Personalized Safety Alert	Alerts the user via a personalized beloved ones voice prompt when the vehicle crosses the speed limit.
Sunroof Open Alert	Alerts the user when sunroof is left open after user exits vehicle (vehicle off & doors locked)
Battery Drain Alert	This feature warns the user when the vehicle is used without the engine running, to prevent the battery from draining over time
Vehicle Status
Check Door Status	Allows the user to view the current status of the vehicle door.
Check Tyre Pressure	Allows the user to view the current status of tyre pressure.
Check Lamp Status	Allows the user to view the current status of the lamp.
Check ODO	Shows the ODO value of the vehicle.
My SUV info	Essential information about the vehicle like VIN, Variant and so on.
Check AC Status	Allows the user to view the current status of the AC.
Check Distance to Empty	Helps to check distance to empty range i.e. the distance can be covered with the available fuel.
Seat Belt Status	Helps the user to check the Driver/Co-Driver seat belt is buckled or not.
Location Based Service
Live Tracking	GPS based vehicle tracking system for tracking vehicle’s location anywhere and at any point of time. Helps to provide the real time vehicle location when vehicle is in movement. Helps in sharing the vehicle location for a set time to your family and friends.
Save Route / Save Place	Provision to save a route /place.
Find my Car	Helps to identify the vehicle’s location and directs you to locate your vehicle.
Share my Car Location	Share your car’s location with friends and family.
Push to Car	Allows the user to push routes/location from the mobile app to the vehicle.
Ecosense*	Provides the details about the driving behavior for each trip.
Trip History	Provides detailed information about the trips.
Trip Replay	Provides glimpse of the trip in a form of a short video.
Pit Stops	Provides information and navigational access to nearby restaurant, ATM, Authorized Mahindra Service Center and so on.
Ecosence Leader Board*	Based on Eco score, The user’s driving pattern will be ranked for Country, state & district wise.
Trip tagging	This feature lets the user to label trips as either personal or official, making it easier to filter and reference trips quickly
Last Mile Navigation	This feature lets the user transfer navigation from the vehicle to mobile phone when stepping out, providing easy and continuous directions

Safety
E-Call	In case of accident, Emergency call will be triggered from vehicle, SMS will be sent to Adrenox+ & Emergency contacts along with the current vehicle location.
SOS Button	In case of SOS is initiated, SOS call will be triggered from vehicle, SMS will be sent to Adrenox+ & Emergency contacts along with the current vehicle location.
Road Side Assistance	Allows the user to reach out for help in case of vehicle breakdown.
Remote Function
Remote Start/ Stop**	Allows the user to remotely start or stop the vehicle using mobile app.
Remote Climate Control	Allows the user to remotely configure the in- vehicle temperature during remote start using mobile app.
Remote Window Up/Down	Allows the user to remotely control the Driver window (with anti-pinch) using mobile app.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock	Provide access to the vehicle by remotely locking and unlocking the doors when vehicle is stationary.
Remote Lamp On/Off	Allows the user to remotely turn on or off the lamps using mobile app.
Locate my SUV	Allows the user to remotely locate the vehicle by turning on the horn and lights.
Remote Skyroof Control	Allows the user to remotely control Skyroof using mobile app.
Third Party Apps
Just dial	Allows the user to search for various services using the Just Dial app in the CID.
India Today	Allows the user to browse through news using India Today app in the CID.
Weather Update	Allows the user to view weather information using the Accuweather app in the CID.
Travel Explorer	Allows the user to search for amusement places and more using the Travel Advisor app in the CID.
Horoscope	Allows the user to view daily fortune as per his/her zodiac sign.
Mahindra App store	This feature allows users to download new apps or updates provided by the OEM
Tickertape	Allows the user to track stock trends using the Tickertape app in the CID
In car browser	Enjoy browsing using the Vivaldi browser app in PID & CID, optimized to connect effortlessly via mobile hotspot for unrestricted internet experience.
Owner manual	Provides quick access to your vehicle's manual in digital format using the Owner's Manual app in CID
Others
E-Manual	Allows the user to explore Adrenox+ features through video tutorials available on the mobile app
In-Home Alexa	Allows the user to check the vehicle status and perform remote function using Alexa (voice commands).
Valet Mode	Allows the user to set the vehicle in a predefined state when giving the vehicle for valet parking. The default PIN to access the Valet mode will be 1234.
Profile Manager	Allows the user to connect the mobile app profiles with the vehicle profile thereby providing sync between both.
E-Payment Gateway	Enables users with in-app payment options for seamless mobile app experience
Calendar	Allows users to sync calendar events with the vehicle's infotainment system for important event reminders and notification
Contact us	Any Query / Enquiry about the product, get info on Mahindra. Send an Inquiry on any car model. Dealers will get back to the customer on details.
Log Book - Fuel(Fuel Diary)	Maintains a systematic log of the all the fuel filling events and provides a clear representation of the fuel filled and the amount spent.
Do-Not Disturb	Avoids distraction while driving by not pushing any AdrenoX Connect app notification when mobile is detected in the vehicle.
Journey Planner	Allows the user to plan a journey by providing some basic information.
Pick up Reminder	Allows the user to create an event that reminds the user at the specified time.
To-do list	Allows the user to create time based/location- based events that remind the user at the specified time.
Request app Access	Allows the user to share the vehicle access to two more users.
My Documents	Storage and retrieval of documents such as Driving license, Insurance, PUC, etc.
Smart Wearables	Allows the user to perform all the read and remote functions through the smart watch (applicable for both Android and iOS).
Service Booking	Allows the user to schedule a service by directing to the Adrenox+app.
Personalized Greetings	Personalized welcome message, which will be configurable by the user & he/she will be welcomed with the audio uploaded by them (Ex: Kids voice, Fav music, Fav hero dialogues).
Toll Dairy	This Feature helps to check the toll amount for the selected route & toll amount can be recharged via Adrenox App as well. Feature also provides you alert whenever your toll balances goes low.
Feature Auto Suggestion	This Feature analysis user last 3 months feature usage pattern & suggest user on the non —utilised feature.
M – Lens	This feature is a visual search tool to know your XUV7XO telltale lights better.
Ask Mahindra	This feature helps the customer to connect with Mahindra executive for any queries/support related to vehicle.
Social connect	Allows users to post trip information from special events directly to social media platforms
Expense Management	Allows user to add expenses for easy tracking
Travelogue	Allows user to create memorable videos from a trip by adding photos of trip via travelogue option (under Trip summary) in mobile app
ChatGPT	Allows the user to access Mahindra ChatGPT skills via Alexa
In car Experience	Allows the user to connect Mobile / Tab (BYOD device) and share content via Adrenox connect app
Weekly Report	Provides details about various vehicle parameters for a defined time period.

* Applicable only for MT variants **Applicable only for AT variants ***Applicable only for Diesel variants

12.5 Find My Tribe

Find My Tribe feature enables Mahindra users to share their vehicle's dynamic location with each other for group navigation. Users can create tribes via the mobile app, inviting others to join. They can initiate a journey from the vehicle's CID screen and share an invite with tribe members. Followers can choose to navigate toward either the leading vehicle or the destination.

•

It is a cross-platform feature, compatible with all applicable Mahindra vehicles.

•

Users can create up to 10 tribes per vehicle and each tribe can have upto 8 vehicles.

•

Users can add a profile picture, which will be used as their location marker.

•

A minimum of 2 active participants is required to start/continue tribe navigation in which one acts as leader while other joins as follower.

•

Users can view the live location of journey participants via mobile app.

•

The journey history and summary will be available for each tribe.

Roles & Definitions

Tribe Admin	The user who creates the tribe in the mobile app
Tribe Members	Users who joins the tribe
Tribe Journey	A journey initiated by a member of the tribe
Leader	The user who starts the journey from vehicle (not necessarily the tribe admin)
Followers	Users who joins the journey initiated by the leader
Participants	Users who are active in the journey, including both the leader & followers

Pre-Conditions

•

KYC should be completed & Adrenox subscription is active

•

Each tribe must have at least 2 members

12.5.1 Tribe Creation from Mobile App

•

Users can use Adrenox connect app and create a tribe.

•

Open Adrenox connect app and navigate to Find my tribe and click create tribe.

•

The tribe admin has access to rename and delete tribes as well as remove any members from the tribe

•

After creating the tribe, the invite link can be shared via any social media platform (the invite link will be valid for 24 hours)

12.5.2 Joining Tribe from Mobile app

•

Users with Adrenox connect can join the tribe through their shared invite link

•

There will be an option to choose the vehicle if multiple vehicles are available.

•

Tribe members have the option to leave the tribe at any time if they wish.

•

The members can also share the tribe link to others to join the tribe

12.5.3 Tribe Journey Creation from CID

•

Tribe members can view the list of tribes and tribe members through vehicle CID.

•

Open App drawer >> Navigation >> Tribe navigation

•

List of available tribe for that particular vehicle will be displayed

•

Tap on the required tribe to view the its participants

•

Tap on the setup journey to initiate journey creation.

•

Any tribe member can set up a new journey by providing a name, duration, destination details, and waypoints if required.

•

The maximum duration of the tribe journey can be set either “until arrival” or a custom duration:

•

Until arrival - Location sharing will remain active until all participants have reached the destination.Custom - Location sharing will remain active for the chosen duration (e.g., 30 minutes, 2 hours, 8 hours).

•

The participant who sets up the tribe journey will act as the leader, and other tribe members will act as followers.

•

The tribe journey name and duration can’t be changed once the journey is initiated.

•

The destination and waypoints can be updated during the journey

•

Tap on start journey to initiate the journey.

12.5.4 Tribe Journey Invitation to Follower Vehicles

•

A journey invitation will be sent to the tribe member’s vehicle that are part of the tribe

•

Users can choose to accept or reject the invitation

The invitation will include the following options for users to accept

•

Follow Leader – The navigation route will be plotted to follow the leader’s vehicle

•

Follow Destination – The navigation route will be plotted directly to the destination set by the leader

•

Share location – Only the vehicle’s location will be shared, with no route navigation provided

Real-Time Location Sharing

•

When a follower accepts the journey, location sharing will be enabled exclusively between the leader’s vehicle and the accepted follower’s vehicles

•

Tribe participants can view the real-time location of these vehicles, with profile pictures displayed, in the CID screen.

•

Location sharing will remain active for the duration of the journey (either "Until Arrival" or a custom duration).

12.5.5 On-going and Journey History in Mobile App

•

Participants can view the live location of vehicles for on-going journeys in the mobile app

•

The history of journeys will be available for each tribe

•

Each journey summary will include details such as distance traveled, duration, toll charges, and the route taken.

12.5.6 Exit from the Tribe Journey

•

Both the leader and followers have the option to exit the journey at any time.

•

The journey will end automatically if only one participant remains active after everyone else has left.

•

If the leader exits the journey, the navigation route for followers who chose "Follow Leader" will be cancelled and switched to "Share Location" view

13 STARTING AND DRIVING

13.1 Safety Tips - Before Starting Your Vehicle

Before starting the vehicle, inspect the interior and exterior of the vehicle; for any damages, leaks, loose parts, foreign objects/debris. In case of any abnormality noticed, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Before starting your journey, check and ensure proper functioning of safety devices/components like brake system, steering system, all lamps and tyres. Also ensure no critical warning lamps are ON in the DID. In case of any safety device/component not functioning as intended or any critical warning lamps found ON in DID, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center and get it rectified before starting the journey.

Adjust the seat headrest, steering wheel and fasten the seat belt as described in this manual. Never perform any seat / steering adjustments when the vehicle is in motion. Start the vehicle only when seated and belted in the driver’s seat.

Engine idle speed is controlled by engine management system. When the engine starts, idle r/min runs higher than normal in order to warm the engine. The engine idle speed r/min reduces once the engine warms up.

Never start your vehicle in a closed garage or in an enclosed area. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always keep the garage door open or start the engine in an open area.

Mirror Adjustment: Ensure that the rear view mirror and both the ORVM’s are adjusted for an unobstructed view of the road behind.

Exterior Lamps: With the help of someone observe and confirm normal operation of all exterior lamps while you work on the controls from the driver seat. Also, check functioning of all lamps in the instrument panel.

Door Latches: Check for positive closing, latching, and locking of all doors, both from inside and outside.

Fluid Leaks: Check the area under the vehicle after an overnight parking for fuel, power steering fluid, brake fluid, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. If leaks are observed contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

13.2 Starting the Engine

Make sure all vehicle occupants are properly seated in their seats and have buckled their safety belts. For more information on seat, headrest positioning, safety belts and their proper usage, refer “Seat Belts” section.

Before cranking the engine

•

Make sure the gear shift lever is in Neutral/Park mode.

•

Ensure that the parking brake / EPB is engaged. Turn the key to IGN position but do not turn the key to start.

Automatic Transmission-AT

Turn the ignition ON by pressing the start stop button or through ignition key.

Shift the gear shift lever to Park or Neutral position, if found in any other position.

Apply parking brake / EPB, if found not applied.

Do not press the accelerator.

Depress the brake pedal and press the start stop button or turn the key momentarily to the START position to crank the engine.

Once the engine starts, release the Start Stop Button or key.

Manual Transmission-MT

Turn the ignition ON by pressing the start stop button or through ignition key.

Shift the gear shift lever to neutral position. if found in any other position.

Apply parking brake / EPB, if found not applied.

Do not press the accelerator.

Depress the clutch pedal and press the start stop button or turn the key momentarily to the START position to crank the engine.

Once the engine starts, release the Start Stop Button or key.

Do not continue cranking after the engine has started.

If the engine fails to start, attempt to restart after about 10 second. If the engine fails to start even after repeated attempts as per the procedure given above, contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 second before attempting to restart the engine.

If the vehicle battery has discharged, use booster cables, a booster battery or a battery from another vehicle to start. Jump-starting a vehicle can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to the “Jump-starting procedure” section in this manual for correct procedure.

If the engine still fails to start, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

Ensure the following when the engine is running:

•

All warning lamps are OFF

•

Low oil pressure lamp is OFF

Engine Idling: The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will decrease as the engine warms up.

After idling for a few seconds, follow the below steps to drive away:

Manual Transmission-MT

Release the parking brake / EPB (Electric Parking Brake).

Depress the clutch.

Shift the gear lever to 1st gear.

Release the brake pedal.

Drive by releasing the clutch and depressing the accelerator pedal simultaneously.

Automatic Transmission-AT

Release the parking brake / EPB (Electric Parking Brake).

Depress the Brake pedal.

Shift the gear lever to D or R or M.

Drive by releasing the brake pedal and depressing the accelerator pedal simultaneously.

Engine Idling - In Cold Weather: Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold and prolonged idling at low ambient temperatures. Long periods of idling is harmful to engine. Combustion chamber temperatures can drop to low temperatures, where the fuel injected may not burn completely. Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.

For smooth functioning and reliable operation of the engine during cold weather conditions, use suitable fuel (Petrol/Diesel) which will be available at filling stations during winter months. Check with your fuel retailer for details.

Coolant in the radiator will survive up to ambient temperature of -15 °C. If the ambient temperature is expected go below -15 °C, during operation, the engine will require a different coolant/coolant concentration. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

13.3 Stopping the Engine

Your vehicle is powered by a turbo engine. Before turning the engine OFF, always allow the engine to return to normal idle speed and run for few seconds. This assures proper cooling and lubrication of the turbocharger. This is particularly necessary after any hard driving.

To reduce the risk of personal injury, before turning OFF the engine and leaving the vehicle, always follow the below mentioned safety tips.

Manual Transmission-MT

•

Keep your right foot on the brake pedal.

•

Turn front wheels towards the road curb.

•

Switch OFF the ignition, turn the key to the steering lock position and remove the key.

•

Press the start stop button once to switch off the vehicle (for PKE only).

•

Engage the parking brake / EPB.

•

Move the gear shift lever to 1st gear position (reverse gear if parking on an incline).

•

Slowly release the brake pedal.

•

Lock your vehicle when leaving.

Automatic Transmission

•

Keep your right foot on the service brake pedal.

•

Turn front wheels towards the road curb.

•

Engage the parking brake / EPB.

•

Shift the gear lever to Park “P” position.

•

Switch OFF the ignition, turn the key to the steering lock position and remove the key.

•

Press the start stop button once to switch off the vehicle (for PKE only).

•

Slowly release the brake pedal.

•

Lock your vehicle when leaving.

Alert will be displayed in the CID screen if the gear shifter is not in P position. Engine will not switch off unless shifter is in P position.

13.4 Exhaust Gases

Protection against exhaust gas entry into the vehicles interior is considered in the design of the exhaust system.

•

Vehicle exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Oxides, Hydrocarbons and Particulate Matter. These are potential environmental and health hazards.

•

Avoid inhaling the exhaust gases. Carbon Monoxide is a colorless and odorless gas and can cause unconsciousness or even death.

•

If the exhaust system is damaged for any reason or you notice a change in the exhaust noise, have the vehicle checked by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

•

Do not start the vehicle in a closed garage or in an enclosed area where ventilation is poor for the exhaust gases.

•

Since the engine compartment and exhaust system components are hot and can ignite a fire, do not park or leave the vehicle with the engine idling over dry grass, leaves, paper, rags or any combustible material.

Never keep the engine running when the vehicle is parked in an area which is not properly ventilated. This could lead to serious respiratory problems and/or death.

13.5 Driving Your Vehicle

13.5.1 Pedals

MT	AT

A: Accelerator Pedal

B: Brake Pedal

C: Clutch Pedal

13.5.2 General Driving Precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of accidents leading to serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

•

Before you drive your vehicle, please read this manual carefully.

•

Before you start driving, check proper operation of the brakes and steering system.

•

If, while driving, you hear any strange noise or feel unusual vibration, or if you have any concerns whatsoever, or if any warning lamps illuminate or buzzers sound, park/stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Identify the cause and take any necessary remedial action. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center if necessary.

•

Never overload or improperly load your vehicle.

•

Always be attentive while driving and follow safe driving practices.

•

Always maintain the recommended inflation pressure in tyres.

•

Always drive at a safe speed appropriate for given driving conditions. You must follow the speed limits.

•

While backing up, keep a constant lookout for people, particularly children, or other obstructions or hazardous material that might be present behind the vehicle.

•

Avoid loading any items on the roof that will raise the vehicles center of gravity and make your vehicle more unstable.

•

Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.

•

Always slowdown in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have much better control.

•

When driving in off-road or on rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.

•

Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially on rough terrains. Sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion. Make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes.

•

If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (e.g. from concrete to gravel/sand/mud/snow) there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds, especially the way it responds to steering, braking and accelerating inputs.

•

Be extremely careful when driving on pavements made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.

•

If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but avoid severe brake or steering application. Ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.

•

It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.

•

In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. Use all available road surfaces to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel.

13.5.3 Off-Road Driving Precautions

•

When driving in off-road or on rugged terrains, never over speed or make sharp turns. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing serious injury.

•

Always maintain steering wheel control, Sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion.

•

Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps. You should either know the terrain or map-out your route before driving in the area.

•

Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud or water.

13.5.4 If your vehicle is submerged

If Your stationary Vehicle is Submerged up to over the bumper

Contact Mahindra immediately and have the vehicle towed to nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center to check any entry of water into the engine.

All fluids including engine and transmission fluids required to be changed in case of water ingress and contamination.

Never attempt to start the engine, without the advice from Authorized Mahindra Service Center technician.

•

Never drive through water when it flows above the bottom portion of the bumper or above the tyre center line.

•

The engine could get damaged internally if attempts are made to cross through deep water.

•

Wet brake discs have a lower coefficient or friction resulting in reduced braking efficiency. Tab the brake pedal while driving to remove the film of water.

13.5.5 Driving Through Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow water, there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water.

Never drive through still water that is higher than the bottom of the axle hubs. Not following this instruction will allow water to enter vehicle components causing internal damage to the components, affecting drivability, safety, emissions, and reliability.

When driving through water, drive very slowly and at constant speed, less than 8 km/h. Drive with out pressing accelerator pedal and control speed using only the brakes. At higher speed waves can be generated by the front of the vehicle. These water waves may enter air intake, causing severe engine damage or cause a vehicle to get stalled.

You must slow down while driving through shallow water. Speeding may cause water to splash onto the windshield, impairing your vision. In extreme conditions, you may get a water wedge formation between the road and tyre causing loss of control in the vehicle.

•

The ground under the water might not be firm which could result the water being deeper than expected when driving the vehicle through it.

•

Do not stop or shut OFF the engine while immersed in water. It helps in preventing water getting inside the exhaust pipes.

•

When backing down a ramp, do not allow the exhaust tail pipe to immerse in water.

•

Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure. It may also enter the differentials, transmission, and transfer case, reducing the oil’s lubricating qualities. If these are submerged in water, the lubricants should be replaced as required.

•

Water entering the transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damaging the transmission.

•

Sand, mud/sludge that has accumulated in around brake discs may affect braking efficiency. This may also damage brake system components. Wet brakes cannot stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by driving the vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.

•

When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited. Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through water.

13.5.6 Flowing Water

If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine the exit point(s) that are downstream of your entry point to compensate for drifting.

13.5.7 After Driving Off-Road or through Water

Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water.

•

After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage. Completely inspect the underbody of the vehicle for any damages.

•

Check for accumulations of plants or bushes. or polyethylene / plastic. These could be a fire hazard at high temperatures.

•

Inspect all the tubes/hoses and check for any fluid leakages.

•

Get heat exchangers (radiator and condenser) cleaned.

•

We also recommend that the vehicle be checked at the Authorized Mahindra Service Center for any water entry into the transmission / axle or the engine.

Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not have full braking power when needed leading to accidents. If you have been operating the vehicle in off-road conditions, get the brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.

•

If any unusual vibration is experienced, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance. Get it inspected/corrected as soon as possible.

•

After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission/transfer case/axle oils) to ensure the fluids have not been contaminated.

13.6 Tips for Better Fuel Economy

Fuel mileage (efficiency) depends on the average speed of the vehicle, number of times the gears are shifted/Clutch pressed and number of times the brakes are applied. Vehicles operating in city traffic condition /bumper to bumper traffic will exhibit lower fuel mileage as compared to vehicles operating in open highways with higher average speeds.

Do’s

•

Ensure that your vehicle is maintained as per recommendation (Refer to Warranty and Service Information Guide).

•

Ensure that the tyre pressures are as per recommendation (Ref to sticker on door pillar or
Page 6-56 or Warranty and Service Information Guide).

•

Ensure parking brakes are released fully.

•

Use Engine Start-Stop feature to the maximum
(Ref Page no 6-29), if applicable.

•

Drive with all the windows closed to reduce aerodynamic drag.

•

Accelerate smoothly with a light foot on the accelerator.

•

Anticipate stops and slow down in coasting mode before applying brake.

•

In manual transmission, shift gears at the right speeds (Ref page 6-15 for gear shift indication prompts).

Don’ts

•

Fitting roof carrier will increase drag and reduce fuel mileage.

•

Driving at speeds above 80 km/h reduces fuel mileage.

•

Do not rest the left foot on the clutch pedal in manual transmission vehicles as it will reduce the fuel mileage as well as damage clutch/transmission components.

•

Do not attempt to use brakes with the left foot in Automatic transmission vehicles.

How to Measure /Read Fuel Mileage Values?

•

The Fuel mileage value is displayed in the DID as AFE (Average Fuel Economy) in km/lit.

•

The AFE can be set to multiple modes.

•

Refer to Page 3-12 for the procedure for resetting AFE modes.

13.7 Horn

The horn is integrated into the driver airbag section of the steering wheel. Use it appropriately when necessary.

Press the pad on the steering wheel to blow / sound the horn. The horn functions even when the ignition has been switched OFF.

Horn will get activated when horn switch/pad is pressed.

It will get deactivated when horn switch/pad is released or after 10 second of continuously pressing.

If Horn Switch Input is ON for more than 10 second, horn will get deactivate after 10 second.

13.8 Manual Transmission

The first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat rough. This is a normal phenomenon, and precision shifts will develop with the initial few hundred kilometer of running.

13.8.1 Gear Lever

Your vehicle is fitted with manual transmission having six forward and one reverse gear. This shift pattern is imprinted on the gear lever knob.

The transmission is fully synchronized in all forward gears, so shifting to either a higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished. The clutch pedal should be depressed fully while shifting, and then released slowly.

13.8.2 Gear Recommendation

Gear information shows the actual gear in which user has to drive the vehicle.

Based on the various parameters, it will suggest to change the gear for better fuel economy with up/down recommendation.

Operating Condition

The numeral is the suggested gear. The Up or down arrow is to upshift or downshift. When no arrow, it indicates vehicle is in which gear.

13.8.3 Neutral Position

This position stops the transmission of power from the engine to drive axle. With the gear lever in neutral and brakes released, the vehicle can move freely by pushing or towing. The engine can be started in this mode. It is always recommended to keep the brake pedal depressed in this position. It is advisable to shift into neutral when the vehicle is standstill for longer durations with the engine idling.

Coasting the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral and engine ON/OFF is not recommended. In an event of panic braking, you will not have the power of engine braking to slow down the vehicle. This may lead to personal injury or accident.

Do not leave the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral position. Always engage manual parking brake / EPB before leaving the vehicle, to prevent any vehicle movement leading to possible injury to a bystander or damage to vehicle.

13.8.4 Gears 1-6

Use the gears 1 to 6 as per vehicle load, road/traffic conditions or as per requirement. The current gear selection is indicated in the DID.

Always depress the clutch fully before moving the gear lever from the current position to any desired position. Perform up-shifts or down-shifts one gear at a time, do not jump gears.

13.8.5 Recommended Gear Shifting Speeds

Upshifting - Diesel

Shift Range	Vehicle Road Speed (km/h)	Engine r/min Range
1–2	16	1 600–2 000
2–3	27
3–4	42
4–5	54
5–6	70

Downshifting -Diesel

Shift Range	Vehicle Road Speed (km/h)	Engine r/min Range
2–1	14	1 000–1 200
3–2	25
4–3	40
5–4	52
6–5	61

Upshifting - Petrol

Shift Range	Vehicle Road Speed (km/h)	Engine r/min Range
1–2	18	1 600–2 300
2–3	30
3–4	44
4–5	54
5–6	70

Downshifting -Petrol

Shift Range	Vehicle Road Speed (km/h)	Engine r/min Range
2–1	14	1 000–1 200
3–2	25
4–3	40
5–4	52
6–5	61

Shift gears at suitable engine or road speeds to safeguard the transmission components. Avoid driving in high r/min’s frequently.

When parking on an incline, gear alone may not be sufficient to prevent the vehicle from moving. Always set the manual parking brake/EPB in addition to shifting the gear lever into gear. It is also recommended to turn the front wheels towards the road curb.

13.8.6 Reverse

This gear is to enable the vehicle to move in the reverse direction. Move the gear lever into this position only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the gear lever is in neutral position.

The reverse lock ring located immediately below the gear shift knob must be pulled upward while moving the shift lever to the reverse (R) position.

To avoid transmission damage, shift into or out of reverse gear only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. It is recommended you to wait approximately for three seconds in neutral gear to shifting into or out of reverse gear.

For brief stops, e.g. at traffic lights, keep the gear shift in neutral and hold the vehicle with the brake pedal. For prolonged stops, it is recommended to switch OFF the engine and apply the Parking brake/EPB. When stopping the vehicle on an uphill gradient, do not hold it with the clutch/accelerator; use the brake to avoid unnecessary clutch wear/heat build up.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gear lever, which could result in an accident or serious injury.

On slippery/wet road surfaces, never downshift to obtain braking action. This could result in a wheel slip and reduced vehicle control.

13.8.7 Uphill and Downhill Driving

To prevent the engine from high stress at a low r/min when driving uphill gradients or with your vehicle heavily loaded, downshift when necessary to maintain engine r/min within the best torque range. Similarly, while driving downhill, downshift to utilize the engine braking in an optimum manner. While driving in a continuous down gradient at high speeds, always engage the appropriate gear to reduce aggressive and sustained brake usage. Aggressive and sustained brake usage can cause higher brake pad temperatures and fading.

13.9 Automatic Transmission (AT)

13.9.1 Gear Selector Lever

Your vehicle is equipped with 6 Speed automatic transmission having Electric controls with an Adaptive Transmission Control Strategy.

This adaptive Transmission strategy offers optimal transmission operation and shift quality in different driving conditions.

The transmission electric are self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat rough. This is a normal phenomenon, and precision shifts will develop within the initial few hundred km of running.

P : Park position	M : Manual Shift
R : Reverse position	M+ : Manual up-shift
N : Neutral position	M- : Manual down shift
D : Drive position

Shift Logic Table

Movement	Possibility
P-R	Yes-Brake pedal + knob button
R-N	No
N-D	No
D-M	No
M-D	No
D-N	No
N-R	Yes-Only knob button
R-P	Yes-Only knob button

The current gear lever position is indicated in the centre of the DID display.

13.9.2 P : Park Position

Use this position to park your vehicle, warm up the engine, or stay in a location for an extended length of time.

To shift in to any other position, first depress the brake pedal, then press knob button and move the TGS to R or N or D as desired.

•

Stop the vehicle completely before shifting into “P”.

•

Never shift to “P” when the vehicle is moving, To avoid damage to transmission.

•

If the lever is shifted to P when the vehicle has not come to stop and in forward motion, then a ratchet noise will be heard. This is not abnormal. However we do not recommend moving to P till the vehicle has come to standstill. As repeated such instances can damage the internal parts.

•

To shift from the “P” position to another position, the ignition switch must be turned to “ON” and the brake pedal should be depressed. Any forcible attempts to move the selector lever from “P” without the two procedures may damage the selector lever.

13.9.3 R : Reverse position

Use this position to drive the vehicle in reverse.

To shift into “R” from “P” or “N” (with the knob button press), completely stop the vehicle and depress the brake pedal. When the shift lever is in “R”, parking aid system will be automatically activated.

•

Never shift into “R” when the vehicle is moving.

•

Please note that the vehicle may slowly move backward when the selector lever is at “R”.

13.9.4 N : Neutral position

At this position, the engine does not transfer power to the wheels and the vehicle will not move on a flat road. However, for safety, apply the brake when the gear is in this position.

•

Warm up the engine for approximately 3 minute when the ambient temperature is below -15 °C. Otherwise, shifting of gears in Forward or Reverse direction may not be smooth.

•

If you have to stop on a hill and would like to use this neutral position, depress the brake pedal firmly.

•

Never attempt to move the gear selector lever to “N” when the vehicle is in motion.

Depress the brake pedal while shifting the gear lever from “N” to “D” or “R” for your safety.

For shifting R to P, press the knob button and for shifting to N or D, only shift lever to moved. Refer the shift logic table for more clarity.

13.9.5 D : Drive position

Use this position for normal driving conditions. The transmission is automatically shifted from 1st gear up to 6th gear according to the level of depression on the accelerator pedal.

•

Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the vehicle immediately after shifting into “D” or the transmission will be damaged. Wait for D symbol to come in the DID before pressing the accelerator pedal.

•

Even while the gear is in “D”, the vehicle can roll down an uphill according to the gradients, so you have to depress the brake.

•

Please note that the vehicle may creep forward on level ground when the selector lever is in “D” even without pressing the accelerator pedal and this behavior is known as forward creep.

13.9.6 M : Manual Shift

To shift to manual mode move the lever in left side from “D” position. Driving gear can be adjusted by operating the shift lever in front or back direction.

In manual shift mode, the user can upshift or downshift from 1 to 6 forward gears by moving the shift lever in front or back direction.

Shift up: Move the shift lever forward towards + direction and release once to shift up one gear.

Shift Down: Move the shift lever backwards towards - direction and release once to shift up one gear.

The gears can be shifted without requiring to release the Accelerator pedal.

In manual mode, downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. Similarly, upshifts are automatically made when the engine r/min exceeds the threshold.

When starting to drive on a snow or icy road, upshift of the gear to 2nd or 3rd is possible to avoid loss of traction.

For safety reason maximum three shifts “+” / “-” can be allowed at given point of time.

•

Before leaving the Driver’s seat always make sure that the shift lever is in the P (park) position.

•

Shifting into P position while the vehicle is in motion will cause the drive wheels to lock which will cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

•

Always fully depress the brake pedal before and while shifting out of the Drive (D) position into another position (other than M Mode) to avoid inadvertent motion of the vehicle.

•

The shift from D to M (Manual Mode) and M to D can be performed while the vehicle is moving.

•

Never press accelerator pedal when moving the gear shifter lever.

•

To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the shift lever/ tip switch is operated.

Use of Engine Brake: To use the engine as a brake, change into the manual gear shift mode first, then operate the shift lever to switch to next lower gear.

•

Abruptly downshifting and using the engine brake may make the vehicle unstable, especially when driving on roads covered with snow or ice.

13.9.7 Gear Shift Interlock system

The Automatic Transmission has a shift lock system which prevents shifting the transmission from P into R unless the Brake Pedal is depressed.

In case of malfunction of the shift lock system or vehicle battery got drained, Open up the shift lock cap which is present in front of the shift lever on the shift bezel. Then with the help of Screw driver available in toolkit, Press the button and move the shift lever out of P mode.

13.9.8 Starting and Driving Off

•

Always start the engine while the selector lever is in “P”. For your safety, avoid starting the engine from “N” even though you can do so.

•

Check whether or not the engine idling speed is normal. Keep the brake pedal depressed and shift into “D” or “R”.

•

To move the vehicle, release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator pedal gradually.

•

Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the engine after shifting into “D”. Otherwise the transmission will be damaged. Especially, when you start off after stopping, wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on with the brake pedal depressed.

•

When driving on a down hill, never shift the selector lever to “N” If you try to shift the lever to “D” from “N”, a sudden gear engagement can damage the drive train.

•

HDC (Hill Descent Control) is designed for driving down a steep hill. When HDC is applied, do not shift to “N”. Otherwise, HDC will be deactivated.

•

For your safety, always depress the brake pedal before moving the gear selector lever with the vehicle stopped.

•

Never depress the accelerator pedal when moving the gear selector.

•

If you have to stop on a hill, depress the brake pedal fully.

•

To avoid any mechanical damages or accidents, never shift into “P” or “N” while the vehicle is in motion.

•

A high engine speed can cause your vehicle to move abruptly from the parked position. To avoid this, wait until the engine r/m becomes stable.

•

When you start off on a hill after stopping and parking the vehicle, wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on, with the brake pedal depressed.

•

Do not press the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal at the same time.

•

We suggest that right leg only should be used for brake pedal operation.

13.9.9 Creep Function

Without any actuation of the accelerator pedal, your vehicle will move slowly if the selector lever is in any position other than “P” or “N”. This is called the creep effect. You can control your vehicle’s movement by only applying the brake in heavy traffic or narrow areas.

On a steep decline or incline, your vehicle may move in the opposite direction of the intended direction despite the creep effect. When stopping on a steep hill, always depress the brake pedal.

13.9.10 Kick-down Function

If you need to accelerate rapidly, depress the accelerator pedal to its travel end. Then, a lower gear will be automatically engaged. This is called the kick-down function.

•

Do not use the kick-down function while driving on slippery or sharply curved roads.

•

If you use the kick-down function too frequently, the fuel economy of the vehicle will get worse.

13.9.11 Engine Braking

When the accelerator pedal is released while the vehicle is in motion, the engine speed decreases. On a down hill, engaging a lower gear can generate a higher engine braking and eventually slow down the vehicle speed. By using engine behavior as a brake, you can decrease your vehicle speed without excessively using the brake system. The lower gear, the higher braking force.

Do not excessively apply the brake pedal while going down a long slope. The brake system will overheat, experience vapor lock or the fade phenomenon, and lose the braking force.

Be aware that the engine brake does not work when the gear selector lever is in the “N” position.

Avoid any abrupt engine braking on slippery roads, or the tyres may slip.

13.9.12 Limp Home Mode (LHM)

When there is a malfunction in the transmission, it goes into Limp Home Mode to maintain minimum driving conditions and also to prevent critical transmission damage. This status is indicated by the transmission check lamp illumination in the DID. Contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further assistance.

The transmission is held either in 3rd/ 5th gear when LHM is activated.

13.10 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Operation (If Applicable)

In an AWD vehicle, power is transmitted to all the wheels. This is managed by the AWD System which intelligently transfers torque to all four wheels.

AWD system includes electromagnetically operated clutch which is controlled by an ECU. According to the driving conditions, this system automatically delivers torque to the rear wheels.

13.10.1 AWD System

AWD system is available in two operating positions viz., AUTO mode and AWD LOCK mode.

Once the ignition key is turned ON, AWD system by default turns into AUTO mode. In AUTO mode, whenever a slippage is detected in the FRONT wheels (slippery surfaces like icy roads, wet surfaces, etc,.) the torque is transferred to the REAR wheels by the AWD system.

13.10.2 AWD Lock Mode

The AWD LOCK mode is to transfer a portion of the drive torque to the rear wheels for increased traction on wet pavement, snow covered roads or when driving off road.

Occasional off-road use such as established unpaved roads and trails are OK. It is always important that the driver carefully reduces the speed to a level that does not exceed the safe operating speed for those conditions.

Use lock mode when driving up or down steep inclines, driving off-road, driving on sandy and muddy roads, etc. to maximize traction.

AWD LOCK button is located on the driver control switch bank. The LED on the switch turns ON when the AWD Lock is activated. In this mode, fixed amount of torque is transferred to the rear wheels irrespective of the driving condition.

The AWD warning lamp in the DID illuminates when there is a malfunction in the AWD system.

In AWD Lock mode, when vehicle speed > 80 km/h, then system changes to AUTO mode automatically.

When driving on normal roads, deactivate the AWD LOCK mode by pushing the AWD LOCK button (AWD LOCK indicator light goes off). Driving on normal roads with the AWD LOCK mode, especially, when cornering may cause mechanical noise or vibration. The noise and vibration will disappear when the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated. Prolong driving with the noise and vibration may damage some parts of the power train.

AWD vehicles have to be towed only by loaded it on the back of a truck. This is the safest and best way of towing. If vehicle needs to be towed by lifting the front wheels, then the propeller shaft needs to be disconnected in order to protect the coupling.

Do not use the AWD lock mode on dry paved roads. Doing so can cause abnormal noise or vibration, and may damage the AWD system.

When the vehicle is stuck in the snow, sand or mud, place a non-slip material under the drive wheels to provide traction OR Slowly spin the wheels in forward and reverse directions which causes a rocking motion that may free the vehicle. However, avoid running the engine continuously at high r/min, doing so may damage the AWD system.

13.11 Drive Modes (If Equipped)

Use any of the following methods to activate Drive mode.

Center Fascia Switch Bank

Press Drive mode hard switch on center fascia switch bank and select required drive mode on the CID.

CID

Select Drive mode icon on the CID and select required drive mode as shown in the image below.

Drive Mode is a quick and easy way to change driving style of your vehicle. With Drive mode settings, you can instantly adjust driving dynamics and feel of your vehicle, all on the go. The system is incredibly easy to use, simply chose you choice of "Drive Mode" and experience 3 different vehicles in one.

You can select from multiple drive modes options any time during your Drive, meaning you can switch to the perfect mode when the situation calls for it. Whether you’re looking for an relaxed commute or a sporty back roads adventure, Drive Mode allows you to perfectly tailor your vehicle for your unique driving style.

Drive Modes essentially offers you the Driving Experience of 3 different cars in one car.

Driving Modes changes vehicle handling, dynamics and entire Drive Feel at a touch of an icon. This essentially enables Driver to experience multiple calibrations seamlessly.

Driving modes alters

Sensitivity of Accelerator pedal along with engine power delivery

Gear shift patterns

Steering effort

TCS Control

Based on the mode selected driving

ZAP Mode: ZAP Mode offers regular everyday performance. The car runs like a true Mahindra should. It offers a good balance between ZIP and ZOOM settings and is ideal for day-to-day use. The vehicle will be default in ZAP mode every time the vehicle Ignition is turned ON. This is the default mode.

ZIP Mode: ZIP mode is the accelerator pedal response and shift points (in AT) have been modified so as to have comfortable and easy control for traffic condition.

ZOOM Mode: This mode is for a more spirited driving. ZOOM mode is offered to make the car more fun, as it produces more engaging and potent ride-quality. In this mode, accelerator will become more responsive, i.e. the car accelerates more readily. The steering gets heavier, Gear shift and is delayed.

Once any of the modes is selected, it will display a ALERT message in DID. Based on the mode selected the Alert message would vary for,

ZAP: ZAP MODE ACTIVATED

ZIP: ZIP MODE ACTIVATED

ZOOM: ZOOM MODE ACTIVATED

Once selected we would have a permanent indication in the DID. Also, the skin of the DID also changes as per the mode.

Custom mode: Allows the driver to alter settings to their specific preferences. This option offers further flexibility over choices of Drive Modes.

Here, the user can choose between,

Power train : ZIP, ZAP or ZOOM

Braking : ZAP or ZOOM

Steering: ZIP or ZAP or ZOOM

HVAC : Normal or Economy

Once the customer selects their choice from drop down, Each of the individual controllers will switch to this selection.

Few things to note

When in Cruise control or Adaptive cruise control Vehicle will always be defaulted to ZAP MODE

ON every IGNITION Cycle, vehicle will always start in ZAP MODE

IN case of any faults at vehicle level, that doesn’t allow the vehicle to be in the mode of choice Customer is alerted by an alert message – “DRIVE MODE INHIBITED” in CID screen and the Mode choice in the DID would be Blank.

13.12 Micro Hybrid Technology (Engine Stop/Start System) – MT/AT (If Equipped)

Engine Stop/Start system automatically “stops” and “starts” the engine when idle at signals or long traffic jams. This in turn gives a better fuel efficiency.

13.12.1 Overview of the Engine Stop/Start System – MT

Engine Stop/Start system is activated by the Engine Stop/Start button in the driver side switch bank. The LED on the button indicates the status of the button.

How does the Engine Stop/Start System Work?

Let’s take a simple example of driving in traffic conditions within your city. Assume that your vehicle has stopped at a traffic junction due to a red signal. The following steps illustrate how the system functions:

•

The vehicle has come to a halt at a traffic signal, is in the neutral gear and the clutch pedal is released.

•

The Engine Stop/Start lamp in the DID will blink indicating that the engine is going to stop shortly. The engine will shut down automatically after a specific time period.

•

The Engine Stop/Start lamp will illuminate in the DID indicating the engine was stopped by the “Engine Stop/Start” System.

•

Once the signal turns green, press the clutch pedal and the engine starts immediately.

•

The indicator in the DID goes OFF indicating that the engine has started again and you are ready to drive on.

For auto stop to happen, the following conditions are to be met:

•

Engine Stop/Start system is in active condition by default and should not be turned off using the selection switch.

•

Bonnet is fully closed.

•

In the current ignition cycle, the vehicle has crossed 7 km/h at least once.

•

Current status of the engine is idling.

•

Vehicle speed is zero.

•

Accelerator pedal and clutch pedal are fully released.

•

Vehicle battery should be in healthy condition.

•

Engine is warm (Engine coolant temperature is between 25 °C and 100 °C). This is an extra precaution to ensure safe working of the engine.

•

Fuel temperature is less than 60 °C.

•

Gear in neutral.

•

DPF REGEN should not be active.

•

Vehicle should not have DEF error codes E14, E24 & E34.

•

OBD and CHECK ENGINE telltale in OFF condition.

For auto start to happen, the following conditions are to be met:

•

Vehicle should have been stopped by the Engine Stop/Start System.

•

Gear lever is in the neutral position, Clutch pedal is fully de-pressed.

•

Vehicle speed is zero.

•

Engine Stop/Start System is active.

•

Bonnet should be closed.

13.12.2 Overview of the Engine Stop/Start System – AT

Engine Stop/Start system is activated by the Engine Stop/Start button in the driver side switch bank. The LED on the button indicates the status of the button.

How does the Engine Stop/Start System Work?

•

The vehicle has come to a halt at a traffic signal, is in the “D” Mode and the brake pedal is pressed.

•

The Engine Stop/Start lamp in the DID will blink indicating that the engine is going to stop shortly. The engine will shut down automatically after a specific time period.

•

The Engine Stop/Start lamp will illuminate in the DID indicating the engine was stopped by the “Engine Stop/Start” System.

•

Once the signal turns green, release the brake pedal and the engine starts immediately.

•

The indicator in the DID goes OFF indicating that the engine has started again and you are ready to drive on.

For auto stop to happen, the following conditions are to be met:

•

Engine Stop/Start system is in active condition by default and should not be turned off using the selection switch.

•

Bonnet is fully closed.

•

In the current ignition cycle, the vehicle has crossed 10 km/h at least once.

•

Current status of the engine is idling.

•

Vehicle speed is zero.

•

Brake pedal is fully pressed.

•

Vehicle battery should be in healthy condition.

•

Engine is warm (Engine coolant temperature is between 25 °C and 100 °C). This is an extra precaution to ensure safe working of the engine.

•

Fuel temperature is less than 60 °C.

•

Gear shift Lever in ‘D’ mode.

•

Vehicle should not be in slope.

•

DPF REGEN should not be in active state.

•

Vehicle should not have DEF error codes E14, E24 & E34.

•

AT Warning telltale in OFF condition.

•

OBD and CHECK ENGINE telltale in OFF condition.

For auto start to happen, the following conditions are to be met:

•

Vehicle should have been stopped by the Engine Stop/Start System.

•

Gear lever is in ‘D’ mode and brake pedal is fully released.

•

Vehicle speed is zero.

•

Engine Stop/Start System is active.

•

Bonnet should be closed.

13.12.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

What is the advantage of the system?

The Engine Stop/Start System aids in attaining better fuel efficiency on your vehicle and thus reducing your running costs. However, the mileage improvement will depend upon various parameters such as prevailing traffic, driving patterns, etc.

What are the other advantages of the system?

•

Since the engine is switched off during traffic signals / jams, considerable amount of CO2 release in the atmosphere is avoided. This reduces global warming and thus provides us with a cleaner atmosphere to live.

•

Ability to start the engine by pressing the clutch pedal.

•

Reduces noise pollution at traffic signals.

Is it possible to start the engine through the clutch pedal for the first time?

No, the engine can be cranked only with the ignition key for the first time. If the engine is stopped automatically by the system, only then it is possible to start the engine through clutch pedal in MT.

How to activate/deactivate the system?

The system is activated by default during every ignition cycle. The LED indication on the Engine Stop/Start switch indicates the status of the system. The system can be turned OFF or back ON using the Engine Stop/Start switch.

Whether the system will get activated as soon as the engine is started the first time with the ignition key?

No, the Engine Stop/Start system can be activated only by the Engine Stop/Start switch, provided all listed conditions (in the previous section) are met. This is to ensure better performance of the engine in terms of fuel economy and durability.

What is to be done, if I don’t want the system to stop my engine at traffic signals/jams?

The system can be turned OFF by the Engine Stop/Start button in the central bezel switch bank.

Whether the A/C will function, if the engine is switched off?

No, the A/C will not work. However, the blower will be in operation when the ignition is ON.

What will happen if I keep the clutch continuously pressed at traffic signals/jams?

The system will not stop the engine if the clutch is continuously pressed since it indicates the driver’s intention of moving the vehicle immediately.

When the battery charge is low, whether the engine will be switched off?

If the battery charge drops below a certain threshold level, the system will not stop the engine so as to preserve the battery from further draining.

10.

Whether I will be able to operate the engine with the normal ignition key?

Yes, normal operation with the ignition key is always possible.

11.

Whether the vehicle will start (or) stop in gear for MT?

The vehicle will not start or stop automatically in gear to ensure safety. It will do so only in the neutral position of the gear lever.

12.

Whether the system will stop my engine in moving traffic?

No, the engine will be stopped only when the vehicle speed is zero.

13.

Whether the audio system will be switched OFF, when the engine shuts down?

No, the audio system will not be switched OFF and you can continue to enjoy the music.

14.

Whether the engine will re-crank whenever the clutch pedal is pressed in MT?

No, when the engine is running, the starter motor will not attempt to re-crank.

15.

If any component involved in the system fails, what will happen?

The system has a built-in diagnostic module which understands the failure and immediately goes to bypass mode. In the bypass mode, the engine can be turned ON and OFF by ignition key as usual.

13.13 Fuel-BS VI

For Diesel: Use Automotive Diesel fuel confirming to IS 1460:2025 specification (Having Sulphur less than 10 mg/kg (PPM)). Information regarding the diesel fuel quality filled shall be available with the concerned fuel retail outlet.

In case you require freeze protection of diesel for cold start at sub-zero temperature, we recommend to add Mahindra Genuine additive “mFLO” for temperature up to -15 °C. For temperature lower than -15 °C recommend to fill winter grade automotive diesel available at the fuel retail outlet of that location.

Avoid filling any other grade of fuel or diesel with high sulphur content or kerosene. Do not add any additives which are not recommended by us. These actions will void the emission warranty of your vehicle and can cause permanent damage to the engine and emission control systems.

For Gasoline (Petrol): Use E20 (20 percent mixture of Ethanol in Motor Gasoline) confirming to IS 17021 specification or E10 (10 percent mixture of Ethanol in Motor Gasoline) confirming to IS 2796 specification having RON 95. Information regarding the fuel quality shall be available with the concerned fuel retail outlet.

Do not “top up” after the nozzle automatically shuts off when refuelling.

Always ensure the fuel cap is secured properly after fueling to avoid spillage or splash and causing fire incidents.

Do Not fill Ethanol or bio-diesel directly into the fuel tank. This will harm the fuel system, lines, engine and exhaust components.

Once you realize if inappropriate fuel filled in your vehicle, do not start the vehicle. Contact the nearby Authorized Mahindra Service Center for appropriate help and action in this regard.

Avoid inhaling fuel vapours and any skin or clothing contact. Direct skin contact with diesel / petrol or the inhalation of fuel vapour may affect your health.

Diesel and Petrol fuel are highly inflammable.

Avoid sparks, naked flame, any potential spark producing devices while fueling.

Its highly recommended to turn off the engine while filling fuel at retail outlets.

Do not park your vehicle nearby or on any extreme hot surfaces / nearby bonfire locations.

13.13.1 Minimum Fuel Requirement

It is recommended maintaining a minimum of 10 liter of fuel in the fuel tank. Driving the vehicle till the fuel tank is empty is not recommended. Always have sufficient fuel in the tank. Check the fuel level prior to starting your journey.

Never carry fuel in separate containers in the vehicle, it is dangerous and may lead to inadvertent fuel leak or spillage.

13.14 Brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes in the front and rear wheels.

Disc brakes offer good braking capability and reduced stopping distance. Wet brake discs result in reduced braking efficiency. After a car wash or driving the vehicle through water, apply and release brake pedal mildly while driving to remove the film of water from the brake disc.

Front Brake Pad : The Front brake pads are equipped with Electronic Pad Wear Sensors, thus when the brake pads are worn out, the brake warning lamp on DID will turn ON. Replace the brake pads as soon as possible.

Rear Brake Pad : The rear brake pads are equipped with Mechanical Pad Wear Sensors, thus when the brake pads are worn out, there will be a metallic rubbing noise from the rear brake pads. Replace the brake pads as soon as possible.

Even if the power assist (vacuum assistance) is completely lost, the brakes will still work. The brake pedal would be much harder than normal and the vehicle stopping / braking distance will be longer than usual.

Driving with wet brakes is dangerous. Stopping distance increases considerably while braking.

Brake squeal occurs as a high frequency whistling noise usually at the end of the stop while pressing the brake pedal, squeal can occur from front or rear or from both ends. This is a normal condition caused by environmental factors such as cold, wet, snow, etc and vehicle usage pattern.

Brake Creep-Groan occurs as a low-frequency (Kar-Kar) noise which occurs in AT vehicles when the vehicle is ON and D/R mode is selected and the brake pedal is released slowly to move the vehicle.

13.14.1 Parking on a Hill/Incline

If you have to park the vehicle with front side facing the uphill, select first gear for MT vehicle & park position for AT vehicles and also turn the front wheels away from the kerb.

If you have to park the vehicle with front side facing downhill, select reverse gear and turn the front wheels towards the kerb.

Always ensure that the vehicle is in gear and parking brakes is engaged before leaving the vehicle.

When parking on an uphill, turn the front wheels away from the Kerb/Pavement.

When parking on a downhill, turn the front wheels towards the Kerb/Pavement.

While driving in a continuous down gradient at high speeds, always engage the appropriate gear to reduce aggressive and sustained brake usage. Aggressive and sustained brake usage can cause higher brake pad temperatures and fading.

13.14.2 Parking Brake – Manual (If Equipped)

To apply the parking brake, pull the park brake lever up as firmly as possible. When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON, the parking brake warning lamp in the DID illuminates.

To release the parking brake, pull the parking brake lever up slightly, press the release button on the lever tip and lower the parking brake lever completely.

The parking brake warning lamp indicates only the parking brake status. It does not indicate the degree of brake application. Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the gear shift lever is in gear. When parking on a hill; first apply the parking brake; after that shift the TGS lever to the P position (for AT) and gear for MT. This will avoid the load on the transmission, locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of gear.

Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving off. Failure to do so can lead to brake problems due to excessive heating of the rear brakes. It will also result in reduced fuel efficiency lowered brake pad life and rear brake squeal.

•

Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident.

•

Always apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle, and be certain to leave the transmission in gear. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage, hit a bystander resulting in personal injury.

•

Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake or the gear shift lever. Do not leave the key in the ignition. A child could move the vehicle leading to accidents.

•

The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.

13.15 Electric Parking Brake-EPB (If Equipped)

The EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) is a safety feature with enhanced comfort, the parking brakes are applied/released by simple switch operation.

The EPB system replaces the conventional manual parking brake which requires high effort to apply & release.

In addition to the switch based apply, EPB also provides additional safety/comfort features like EPB auto apply, auto release, Auto vehicle hold, Controlled deceleration for parking, rear wheel un-locker and roll away re-clamp.

13.15.1 Applying EPB

Park the vehicle in a safe place and pull up the EPB switch.

The parking brake warning lamp on the DID and the red Illumination on the EPB switch is turned on, indicating that the parking brake is applied.

13.15.2 Releasing EPB

Press down the EPB switch with the brake pedal depressed.

The parking brake warning lamp on the DID and the red Illumination on the EPB switch is turned off, indicating that the parking brake is released.

13.15.3 AUTO Apply EPB

For added comfort and for safety reasons the EPB will get automatically applied in the following conditions.

Ignition is turned Off.

AT vehicle –gear shifted to Park.

Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) in Active state and Driver door open.

Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) in Active state and Driver seat belt unbuckled.

Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) in Active state and AVH switch pressed to release AVH Active state.

Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) in active state continuously for more than 5 minute.

Auto vehicle hold (AVH) active and engine turned OFF by engine start stop feature.

How to override EPB Auto Apply – MT

If in any case, EPB auto apply feature needs to be overridden, it can be achieved by a simple switch-based operation, which is mentioned below:

Stop the vehicle.

Push and hold EPB switch in release position.

Holding the EPB switch in released position, turn the ignition OFF.

This prevents EPB from automatically getting applied.

In any case, where the vehicle needs to be moved in ignition OFF condition, EPB auto apply override feature to be utlilized.

In case of any Switch related failure when vehicle in standstill, the EPB Auto release feature must be used to release EPB, if EPB Auto release feature doesn’t work, contact Service center in such cases to release the EPB.

How to override EPB Auto Apply – AT

EPB manual override feature can be used to push the vehicle after turning the ignition OFF or in any breakdown condition.

•

Position TGS lever in neutral (N).

•

Push and hold the EPB switch, simultaneously press and hold the start stop button (SSB) till ignition is turned OFF.

•

This operation prevents EPB auto apply and EPB will be in disengaged state.

In this case, vehicle remains in accessory state (SSB LED in amber color) before completely getting turned OFF, for 30 second or till driver door is opened.

13.15.4 AUTO Releasing EPB/Drive Away

For Automatic Transmission Vehicles (AT)

Close the driver door and fasten the driver seat belt.

Shift the gear selector lever to the D / M or R position.

Release the brake pedal and then depress the accelerator pedal slowly.

The EPB is released automatically, thus enabling forward or backward movement of the vehicle.

The red Illumination on the EPB switch and the brake tell-tale on DID is turned off, indicating that the parking brake is released.

For Manual Transmission Vehicles (MT)

Close the driver door and fasten the driver seat belt.

Shift the gear to forward or reverse gear.

Then slowly release the clutch pedal and depress the Accelerator pedal to drive away.

The EPB is released automatically, thus enabling forward or backward movement of the vehicle.

The red Illumination on the EPB switch and the brake tell-tale on DID is turned off, indicating that the parking brake is released.

The EPB AUTO release function will not be activated if driver door is not closed or if the driver seat belt is not fastened. The driver will get message on DID to ensure the same.

If the EPB is being released using the accelerator pedal, be cautious if the vehicle is parked uphill. In this scenario if an aggressive accelerator pedal input is given, it can also result in wheel spin. The wheel spin will cause ESP to intervene.

13.15.5 EPB Warning Lamp / Parking Brake Warning Lamp

	This tell-tale is turned ON in the DID when EPB is applied properly.
	This tell-tale is turned ON in the DID when there is a malfunction in the EPB system.

If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Do’s

Driving Conditions

•

For EPB Auto release and Drive Away always wear driver seat belt and ensure that the driver door is closed.

•

In MT vehicles, drive away with clutch alone modulation not possible, thus always modulate the clutch pedal and accelerator pedal for effective drive away.

Don’ts

Driving Conditions

•

If the EPB Malfunction lamp is ON and the brake is engaged. Do not drive.

•

Avoid using EPB after doing water wading. Please get the vehicle checked in Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Servicing: Do not get your vehicle serviced at an unauthorized service center.

•

The EPB can also be used in cases of emergency braking. Release the accelerator and Pull and hold the EPB button until your vehicle comes to standstill and EPB gets applied. This should be done only in emergency condition and not as a regular action.

•

The braking process is interrupted when the EPB button is released or the accelerator pedal is actuated in dynamic condition.

•

The EPB AUTO release function will not be activated when the driver door or the seat belt is not fastened.

•

Motor noise can be heard during the EPB operation, this is normal behavior.

•

If the EPB warning lamp stays on, have the vehicle serviced at a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

•

Do not let children or other people who are not familiar with the EPB system operate the EPB switch. There is a danger of accidents depending on the parking/stationary state of the vehicle.

•

If you hear noises or smell a burnt odor from the related components after using the EPB emergency mode, have the vehicle checked and serviced.

13.16 Auto Vehicle Hold/Auto Hold (AVH) (If Equipped)

The AVH is a comfort feature offered with Electric parking brake.

The function of AVH is to hold the vehicle in standstill with the applied driver brake pressure.

Once AVH switch is pressed, it remains in memory and thus driver doesn’t have to press AVH switch every time.

The AVH feature can exist in 4 states in the vehicle, which are as follows:

	AVH Off – AVH switch is not pressed, thus AVH is not available.
	AVH Standby – AVH is available but is in standby mode.
	AVH Active – AVH is available and is controlling/holding the vehicle in standstill.
	AVH Faulty – Indicates some fault in AVH, because of which AVH not available

For the AUTO HOLD to function, the following conditions should be met.

•

Engine ON.

•

Driver door closed and Driver seat belt buckled.

When AVH is active and Driver door is opened/Driver seat belt is unbuckled, the EPB gets automatically applied for safety reasons.

13.16.1 Activation of AVH

Ensure driver door closed and Driver seat belt buckled.

Press the AUTO HOLD switch button. Auto Hold tell-tale in DID goes to standby.

The LED indicator on the AUTO HOLD switch is illuminated in Amber color.

13.16.2 Deactivation of AVH

Press the AUTO HOLD switch with AUTO HOLD activated to deactivate the feature.

Operating Auto hold

Pressing the AUTO HOLD switch turns on the AUTO HOLD indicator on DID (white).

Depress the brake pedal while driving to stop the vehicle.

The color of AUTO HOLD indicator on the DID is changed from white to green and the brake is applied.

Slowly depress the accelerator pedal when driving off.

The color of AUTO HOLD indicator on the DID is changed from green to white and the brake is released.

If the AUTO HOLD function remains active for more than 5 minute or if the driver door is opened/seat belt is unbuckled the EPB applies automatically and AVH is disabled.

•

When driving off on a downhill by depressing the accelerator pedal, be careful as the vehicle can accelerate suddenly and on uphill sufficient accelerator pedal input to be provided for overcoming the gradient.

•

Do not depress the accelerator pedal abruptly with the AUTO HOLD function is activated. Otherwise, the parking brake is released, and the vehicle can accelerate suddenly.

•

If the EPB warning lamp is turned on or there is a fault in the EPB system, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Authorized Mahindra Service Center. If parking the vehicle is required in an emergency, pull over the vehicle on a flat surface and chock the wheels after shifting the gear selector lever to the P position.

Controlled Deceleration for Parking (CDP)

•

The Controlled Deceleration for parking is a safety feature.

•

The CDP functions can be made used in any case such as Brake pedal/Brake Booster/Master Cylinder failure because of which sufficient brake force can’t be achieved through the brake pedal.

•

In such conditions, pulling the EPB Switch triggers the ESP Control unit to generate a pressure build up in the brake system which produces the braking force at individual wheels to bring the vehicle to an emergency stop.

•

For unintentional application, if the codriver or any other person pulls the EPB switch without driver’s notice in dynamic condition, The CDP function can be overridden by the driver by pressing Accelerator pedal.

•

The CDP functionality having a high rate of deceleration, anyone other than the driver must be advised not to pull the EPB switch in any case while driving.

•

The CDP function is a safety feature and must be used in the cases of emergency only.

EPB Roll Away Re-clamp

•

If the EPB system detects any rolling after EPB is applied, the motor on caliper re-clamps the disc to avoid any rolling.

•

As an added feature, to avoid roll away due the reduction in clamp force due to decrease in temperature, the EPB motor on caliper re-clamps the disc multiple times based on the temperature.

Servicing and Repairing

The EPB is a complex system involving electrical and hydraulics, it is strictly advised to get it repaired or serviced in a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

13.16.3 Electric Parking Brake (EPB) Alert

Display	Operating Conditions
	This message is displayed on the DID when the EPB switch is released without depressing the brake pedal to deactivate EPB.
	This message is displayed on the DID in the following conditions: 1. When the accelerator pedal is depressed to auto release EPB, with EPB Applied and driver door open/driver seat belt unbuckled. 2. When the AVH switch is depressed to activate AVH, with driver door open/driver seat belt unbuckled.

13.17 Hazard on Panic Braking

Hazard lamps are turned ON during panic braking for 5 second when the following conditions are met:

•

Ignition is ON.

•

Vehicle speed is greater than 60 km/h.

•

Panic/sudden brake is applied and high deceleration rate is sensed.

13.18 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

Anti-lock Brake System (also called as ABS) is designed to help prevent lock-up of the wheels and stable stopping of vehicle during a sudden, panic emergency braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. The ABS system takes input from wheel speed sensors and brake pedal switch to control the brake fluid pressures at the wheels to avoid wheel lock-up. It allows vehicle to be steered during braking.

The minimum speed for ABS to function is 12 km/h. ABS is activated only during wheel lock conditions where ABS takes over and prevents wheel lock.

During the ABS operation, a slight pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal to indicate ABS is active. You may also hear motor noise from the engine compartment. It is recommended to hold the brake pedal firmly while the ABS is active rather than pumping the brake pedal.

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, a joint in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day, tends to activate the anti-lock brake system.

The ABS warning lamp lights up when you switch ON the ignition and should go out after a few seconds. If the ABS warning lamp does not go out or if it comes ON while driving, it means there is a fault in the ABS system. In both cases, the normal braking system remains efficient, exactly as on a vehicle without ABS. The vehicle should be examined as soon as possible by an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

The ABS is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. The stopping distance may be longer in the following cases:

•

Driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.

•

Driving with tyre chains installed.

•

Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road.

•

Driving on roads where the road surface is potholes or large differences in surface height.

Do not overestimate the Anti-lock Brake System: Although the Anti-lock Brake System assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to drive with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. There are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness of steering wheel operation even with ABS active.

If tyre grip performance exceeds its capability, or if hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the rain, the Anti-lock Brake System will not be able to completely avoid wheel lock-up.

13.19 Electric Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

EBD is a subsystem of the ABS system, It prevents least loaded wheel from locking on application of brakes, thus allows the wheel to maintain tractive contact with the road surface. The system monitors the wheel speed and when it identifies any slip, the pressure in the wheel cylinders is dumped thus preventing the wheels from locking.

A fault with EBD is indicated by illumination of the parking brake as well as ABS warning lamps. The vehicle should be examined as soon as possible by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

13.20 Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP corrects for over-steering and under-steering behavior of the vehicle by applying the brake on the appropriate wheel automatically.

ESP uses in-built sensors to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle, compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of over-steer or under-steer.

Over-steer - When the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

Under-steer - When the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

The ESP cannot overrule the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction due to the prevailing road conditions. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skilful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle can not compensate for reckless or dangerous driving that could endanger the user’s safety or the safety of others on road or passerby.

13.20.1 ESP ON

Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in active mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions.

When the ESP is in operation, ESP indicator lamp will blink in the DID.

When the ESP is operating, you can feel a slight pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and indicates that braking had gone to ABS zone. Suggest that the driver should slow down the speed are not matching the road surface.

When moving out of the mud or slippery road, accelerator response may be different because ESP system controls the engine r/min to come out of this slippery road condition. This is normal.

13.20.2 ESP OFF

In some driving conditions, to maximize traction, it may be beneficial to de-activate ESP.

Such conditions are:

•

To start in deep snow or on a loose surface.

•

Driving in deep sand.

•

Driving through deep mud etc.

To de-activate ESP, press ESP OFF button on the driver control switch bank. Once ESP OFF mode is selected, a warning indicator illuminates in the DID.

Press ESP OFF button again to activate ESP function.

For safety reasons, ESP will be automatically re-activated once the vehicle speed crosses 64 km/h.

Mahindra recommends that ESP be operational in all normal driving conditions.

When ESP is in OFF mode, other functions like HHC (Hill Hold Control), HBA (Hydraulic Brake Assist), HDC (Hill Descent Control), DTC (Drag Torque Control), ROM (Roll Over Mitigation) will be available.

ESP, by default, will be in ON condition for every ignition cycle.

If the ESP indicator blinks while driving, it indicates that ESP is working. However If this lamp is blinking continuously or remains ON, it indicates a malfunction in the ESP system. Drive carefully to the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center and get the ESP system checked.

13.21 Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)

The HBA function is designed to optimize the vehicles braking ability during emergency braking situations, the system detects a panic braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and generates an additional brake-force boost to the driver if required.

During a panic braking situation, the brake pressure is raised to the locking pressure. For the HBA to become active, the brake Pedal must be pressed throughout the braking maneuver, that is the brakes must not be pumped and released.

The HBA function gets deactivated, when the brake pedal is released thus do not release brake pressure unless braking is no longer needed.

•

The HBA system cannot prevent collisions, the capabilities of an HBA equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could risk the user’s safety.

•

The Safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the driver, never rely on the HBA feature to prevent accidents.

13.22 Hill Descent Control (HDC)

This System assists the driver to descend a steep slope by means of brake intervention limiting the vehicle speed without driver’s input on brakes. This does not replace cruise control.

During HDC, if the wheel slip becomes excessive, ABS will be activated automatically.

HDC is a user-intended function. To activate, press HDC button on the driver control switch bank. The LED on the button illuminates indicating the status. Press the button again to deactivate HDC.

The HDC feature can control the vehicle speed from 8 km/h to 35 km/h, aove 35 km/h the HDC feature will go to ready mode. The HDC feature will be deactivated automatically if vehicle speed is more than 60 km/h. (For Activating the HDC feature again, the driver needs to press the HDC button once again within the specified speed limits).

The HDC should be enabled only on steep gradient. It is not recommended to be ON in plain road- to avoid accidental intervention.

While HDC is controlling the vehicle speed, descent speeds can be varied by cruise buttons, accelerator pedal & brake pedal.

To Set the desired descending speed, follow the steps listed below:

•

SET Speed — This is the driver desired speed at which vehicle should descent. This can be set using HDC switch or brake/accelerator pedals.(example: when the driver activates HDC at a speed of 30 km/h, then set speed will be 30 km/h). HDC will limit vehicle descent speed to set value).

•

If driver presses the accelerator pedal and increases the speed from 30 km/h to 34 km/h and then releases the accelerator pedal. Now the new SET speed will be 34 km/h.

•

Similarly, if the driver applies brake and reduces the speed from 30 km/h to 10 km/h and then releases the brake pedal, now the new SET speed will be 10 km/h.

•

If the vehicle cruise speed is with in the HDC active region, similarly the set speed can be modified using cruise +/- buttons (by tapping the “SET — or “SET +” buttons, each press of the button will adjust the speed by approximately 0.5 km/h).

The descent speed increases only if the gradient is sufficiently steep to cause the vehicle to accelerate as the braking effect is reduced. On a shallow slope, pressing the “SET +” button may result in no speed increase.

13.23 Hill Hold Control (HHC)

Imagine a situation where your vehicle is stopped on an uphill incline. If you release the brake while moving off, there are chances that your vehicle may roll back. HHC helps in such situations by holding the vehicle from rolling back.

Hill Hold Control function uses the inbuilt acceleration sensor to identify the gradient and holds the vehicle for 2 second in MT and 1 seconds in AT vehicles after the brake pedals are released. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal.

The Following conditions must be met in order for the HHC to activate:

The Vehicle must be equipped with HHC.

The vehicle must be on sufficient gradient.

The Parking brake must not be applied.

The HHC will function on both vehicle facing Up hill and vehicle facing downhill, provided the correct gears are selected.

•

Vehicle Facing Uphill – Gear should be in Forward.

•

Vehicle Facing Downhill – Gear should be in Reverse.

•

In some situations, when the conditions are not met, the HHC may not get activated. In such cases slight rolling may occur.

•

The Safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the driver, never rely on the HHC system to prevent rolling.

13.24 Hydraulic Fade Compensation (HFC)

Due to continuous brake operations, the temperature of the brake disc may get raised, due to which the friction between the brake pads and the brake disc may get reduced alarmingly, this is known as Brake Fading.

HFC provides an additional braking-force boost to the driver, based on the pad temperature model, brake pressure and deceleration rate, to reduce the braking distances in such cases.

The HFC will activate only during high brake pedal force application.

•

The HFC system cannot prevent collisions, the capabilities of an HFC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety.

•

The Safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the driver, never rely on the HFC feature to prevent road accidents.

13.25 Roll Over Mitigation (ROM)

Roll Over Mitigation system is a safety function which anticipates the wheel lift due to lateral forces. The ROM function analyses the rate of change of steering wheel angle and the wheel speed to determine any possible wheel lift, the system then applies appropriate brake and may also reduce the engine power to reduce the chances of wheel lift.

In any instance where physical limits of Long. and lateral tyre road grip are not exceeded, RMF reduces the lateral forces that will lead to a critical roll moment about the center of gravity.

•

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur.

•

The ROM system cannot prevent all roll overs; thus ROM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

13.26 Brake Disc Wiping

When a vehicle is driven in a wet condition; the accumulated wetness on the brake disks leads to an elongated brake response time.

The BDW function actuates the brakes with a low pressure, such that; the brake pads comes in contact with the rotating brake disks, creating a wiping action; thereby removing the moisture from the brake disks.

For the Brake Disc Wiping function to get activated, the following conditions must be met.

Vehicle speed above 70 km/h.

Accelerator Pedal must be pressed.

The Wipers must be in ON condition (Low/High Speed)

The Pressure generated in the BDW function is very small and this is not felt by the driver during normal driving conditions.

•

The system will not be able to sense water splashed on disc from situations such as water wash or water puddles.

•

It is suggested that the driver dry the brakes in the above said conditions by driving at very slow speed and applying the brakes lightly until the brake performance becomes normal.

13.27 Electric Brake Prefill - EBP

EBP is a value-added feature in ESP, the target of the function is to reduce the air gap of the wheel brake by putting low brake pressure to the brake pads such that the brake pads come in close proximity to the brake disc.

The system detects an emergency braking by monitoring the rate of release of the acceleration pedal. A sudden release of accelerator pedal signifies an upcoming sudden braking.

By actively pre-filling the brake-system, the brake response time is reduced for an upcoming braking and full vehicle deceleration is achieved earlier. This results in a shorter stopping distance.

13.28 Second Collision Mitigation System (SCM)

The SCM feature in the ESP system is an autonomous braking system which decreases the speed of the vehicle after the first collision by means of autonomous braking interventions. This reduces the risk of a subsequent crash due to uncontrolled vehicle movement.

For the Second Collision Mitigation feature to get activated, the following conditions must be met.

There must be a front collision detected with a certain severity, where airbags gets deployed.

The impact speed must be greater than approx. 10 km/h.

The brakes, the ESP and other required electrical systems remain functional after impact.

The accelerator pedal must not be actuated.

13.29 Driver Drowsiness Detection System (DDD) (If Equipped)

The Driver Drowsiness Detection system advises the driver to take a break from continuous long duration driving when driver fatigue can be detected based on the driver’s steering behavior.

The system evaluates the steering behavior above speeds of 60 km/h.

Conditions under which a break from driving is detected by the system are as follows.

•

The vehicle is stopped and the ignition switched off.

•

The vehicle is stopped, the seat belt removed, and the driver’s door opened.

•

The vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minute.

If none of these conditions are met or if the driving style is not changed, the system recommends a driving break again after 15 minute.

The Drowsiness alert should be enabled in the driver assistance screen.

Pause Recommendation

This alert comes in the display of DID when the system detects the driver is quiet sleepy or very sleepy, along with audible signal.

•

When the vehicle is driven continuously for more than 2 hour and if the system detects driver as “Quite Sleepy”, an alert message along with audio signal appears in the DID. DID will display the alert message till the user presses the “OK” button from steering wheel switch.

•

After pressing the OK button, if break is not detected by the system for next 15 minute, alert message will repeat again. If the drowsiness is continuously sensed and if the system detects driver as “Very Sleepy”, next level alert message & audio signal will be triggered along with steering wheel haptic feedback.

Driver Attention Level: The Driver attention level is calculated based on driving behavior and many external parameters and the attention level is displayed to the driver in the Drive Info Tab.

Driver Attention Level	Description
	Very Awake
	Quite Awake
	Neither Awake nor Sleepy
	Quite Sleepy
	Very Sleepy

•

The driving ability is always the driver’s responsibility. Never drive if you feel tired.

•

The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed.

•

Therefore, take regular, sufficient breaks during long trips.

•

There will be no system warning during the so-called micro-sleep.

•

In some situations, the system can evaluate the steering behavior incorrectly and therefore falsely display a break recommendation.

•

The system is designed primarily for use on highways.

13.30 Wheels and Tyres

13.30.1 Tyre Information

A: RADIAL TYRES OR BIAS-PLY TYRE

B: “TUBELESS” OR “TUBE TYPE”

C: TYRE SIZE

D: MAX. LOAD LIMIT

E: TREAD WEAR

13.30.2 Tyre Rating

Your vehicle is originally equipped with tyres supplied by a reputable manufacturer. If you ever have any questions regarding your tyres, please refer to literature supplied by the tyre manufacturer, or to the separate tyre warranty provided by the tyre manufacturer. You may also contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center directly, or the tyre manufacturer.

The tyre rating of your vehicle is:

•

235/55 R19 105 V or

•

235/65 R17 103/104 V/H or

•

235/60 R18 103/104 V/H

Also, a Temporary Spare Tyre: T155/90 R18 113M

Tyre rating is explained as below:

Tyre size (Example: 235/60 R18 104H)

Callout (A) : 235 (Three-digit number) : This number gives the width in millimeter of the tyre from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. This is called as “Section Width”.

Callout (B) : 60 (Two-digit number) : This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tyres ratio of height to section width.

Callout (C) : R : This is the Tyre Construction Code. The “R” stands for Radial.

Callout (D) :18 (Two-digit number) : This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

Callout (E) :104 (Two or three-digit number) : This number is the tyres load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tyre can support.

Callout (F) : H : Tyre speed rating or speed symbol. Never drive the vehicle faster than the tyre speed rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tyre is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure.

13.30.3 Speed Rating

SPEED SYMBOL	MAX. SPEED CAPABILITY
SPEED SYMBOL	km/h
L	120
M	130
N	140
P	150
Q	160
R	170
S	180
T	190
U	200
H	210
V	240
W	270
Y	300
Z	240+

13.30.4 Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard)

Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard) is located on the driver side inner B-pillar. This placard tells you important information about tyre size designed for your vehicle, and the tyre inflation pressures for the front & rear tyres.

Never overload your vehicle. Overloading can cause tyre failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance, resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Improper inflated tyres can adversely affect vehicle handling or can fail unexpectedly, resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

	Regular Tyre	Temporary Tyre
Dynamic Rolling radius (mm)	358 +/- 5	358 +/- 5

13.30.5 Tyre Pressure

Proper Tyre inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper Tyre pressure:

•

Safety

•

Economy

•

Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability

Proper Tyre inflation contributes to a comfortable and safe ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering. Unequal Tyre pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response or may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the Tyre tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier Tyre replacement. Under inflation also increases Tyre rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.

The proper cold Tyre inflation pressure is listed in the Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard), located on the front passenger side inner B-pillar.

13.30.6 Inspection and Adjustment Procedure

The Tyre pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as inspected for signs of Tyre wear or visible damage, at least once a month. Use a good quality pressure gauge to check Tyre pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial Tyres may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. At the same time, each Tyre should be inspected for signs of Tyre wear or visible damage.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold Tyre inflation pressures. Cold Tyre inflation pressure is defined as the Tyre pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 km after a three-hour period. Check Tyre pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as Tyre pressures vary with temperature changes. Tyre pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 7 °C of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking Tyre pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter.

When it was new, the spare tyre in your vehicle was fully inflated. However, a spare tyre can lose pressure over time. In order to avoid being stranded, check the spare tyre air pressure frequently.

13.30.7 Inflating Your Tyres

Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tyres are properly inflated. Remember that a tyre can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat.

At least once a month or before long trips, inspect each tyre and check the tyre pressure with a tyre gauge (including spare tyre). Inflate all tyres to the recommended inflation pressure.

Under-inflation is the most common cause of tyre failures and may result in severe tyre cracking, tread separation or “blowout”, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tyre. It also may result in unnecessary Tyre stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents.

•

Over or under inflation may reduce the tyre life

•

Do not correct the tyre pressure immediately after the vehicle is stopped after operation, server handling or long distance drive. Check the inflation pressure when the vehicle is idle for 3 hours or 10 minute of driving after 3 hour in idle condition

•

Do not drive the vehicle with lower pressure than recommended, which may lead to over heating of sidewall resulting in tyre damage.

•

Check the tyre pressures once in a month or before long distance travels.

•

Check your tyres regularly for any damages or cut on the sidewall. Please replace the tyres immediately.

Always inflate your tyres to the recommended pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tyre. The recommended tyre inflation pressure is found on the Tyre Label which is located on the front passenger side inner B-pillar. Failure to follow the tyre pressure recommendations can cause uneven tread wear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.

If you overfill the tyre, release air by pushing the metal stem in the centre of the valve. Then recheck the pressure.

After inspecting or adjusting the tyre pressure, always reinstal the valve stem cap (if equipped). This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the stem, resulting in an unexpected loss of Tyre pressure, an accident and/or personal injury.

13.30.8 Radial Ply Tyres

Combining radial ply tyres with other types of tyres on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly, resulting in an accident and/or personal injury. Always use radial tyres in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tyres.

Cuts and punctures in radial Tyres are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for radial Tyre repairs.

13.30.9 Tread Wear Assessment

Tyre wear can be assessed by looking the tyre wear indicator (TWI). The TWI will appear as a band across the tyre tread when the tyre wears out to the minimum allowed tread depth of 1.6 mm.

Tyre Wear Indicator (TWI)

A mark of triangle in the Tyre side wall indicates the position of the Tyre wear indicators at 6 to 9 locations around the circumference of the tyre.

The TWI appear as raised portions inside the tread in a new or partially worn tyre (A).

As the tyre wears out to its minimum allowable tread depth, the TWI will appear as a band across the tyre tread (B).

The tyre should be replaced at this stage or before this stage.

New Tread (A)

Worn Tread (B)

It is extremely dangerous to drive with worn out tyres on wet roads/rainy seasons. The vehicle can skid and aquaplane on wet surfaces, if the tyre tread depth is insufficient.

Replace the tyre before the tyre tread depth reached the minimum acceptable limit.

13.30.10 Life of Tyre

The service life of a Tyre is dependent upon various factors including but not limited to:

•

Driving style

•

Tyre pressure

•

Distance driven

Tyres and the spare tyre should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden and unexpected tyre failure, leading to an accident and/or personal injury.

Keep dismounted Tyres in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tyres from contact with oil, grease and fuels.

Do not use a Tyre, wheel size or speed rating other than that specified for your vehicle on the tyre placard. Combinations of unapproved tyres and wheels may change suspension geometric and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling, stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control of the vehicle or the tyre can unexpectedly fail, resulting in an accident and/or personal injury.

Replacing original tyres with tyres of a different size may result in false speedometer / odometer readings and impacts riding comfort.

13.30.11 Snow Chains

Snow chains cannot be used on these tyres.

In case of harsh winter driving conditions, it is recommended using winter tyres with the same specifications for better stability, safety and performance.

13.30.12 Low Profile Tyre

Low‑profile tyres are designed with a reduced sidewall height in proportion to their tread width, reflected by a low aspect ratio tyre for enhancing steering accuracy, lateral stability, and overall handling performance.

Driving Precautions:

•

When driving on roads with curb stones, reduce speed and maintain an appropriate angle. Avoid running over objects with sharp or elevated edges, as it may seriously damage tyre side wall.

•

Reduce your speed when driving over speed bumps, manhole covers, or potholes as they may cause severe tire damage.

13.30.13 Tyre Replacement AWD (If Equipped)

Always strictly follow the tyre size, wheel size, and speed rating specified on your vehicle’s tyre placard and also maintain factory fitted tyre thread pattern

For all-wheel drive (AWD) vehicles, ensure tyre replacements are made with approved combinations, even if a single tyre with mismatched tread pattern or uneven wear can introduce rotational differences across wheels. These inconsistencies disrupt driveline harmony, potentially causing abnormal behaviour and increasing the risk of mechanical failure.

Mechanical failure, Balance and stability issues are observed in the following tyre type fitment scenarios:

New and old tyre.

If any tyre is cut and replaced with second hand tyre or new tyre.

When there is a flat tyre (puncture) and it is replaced with spare tyre (Stepney - as it is smaller than the usual tyres).

If any All-terrain tyre is used.

Recommended to replace all four tyres at the same time to ensure balanced, performance, especially in all-wheel drive (AWD) vehicles.

13.30.14 Tyre Rotation Recommendations

Type 1 - Applicable for Front wheel Drive Vehicles

Tyres on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns.

Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Follow the recommended tyre rotation frequency for your type of driving.

Type 2 – Applicable for All wheel Drive Vehicles

It is recommended rotating the tyres as per the “Maintenance Schedule”.

The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the diagram. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-road type tyres.

More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

13.30.15 Temporary Spare Wheel

Regular Tyre

Temporary Tyre

The spare wheel provided on your vehicle is for temporary purpose only. Do not use the spare wheel for continuous running.

When Using the Temporary Spare Wheel

•

Temporary Spare Wheel provided specifically designed for your vehicle.

•

Do not use more than one Temporary Spare Wheel simultaneously.

•

Drive the shortest possible distance with Temporary Spare Wheel.

•

While using Temporary spare wheel reduce speed, Avoid sharp cornering, Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.

When Temporary Spare Wheel is attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:

ABS, Cruise control (If equipped), EPS, Rear View monitor system (If equipped), Navigation system (If equipped)

Speed Limit when using Temporary Spare tyre

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h when a Temporary Spare Wheel is installed on the vehicle.

The temporary Spare Wheel is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

•

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the Temporary Spare tyre compared to when driving with standard tyres. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.

•

Inflate the tyres as per manufacturers recommendation, refer Tyre pressure label on the door panel.

•

TPMS is not provided in temporary spare wheel.

•

Do not fit tyre chains to the Temporary spare tyre.
Tyre chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

•

Tyre to be loaded within the max allowable load limit specified by the load rating index marked on the tyre.

•

Tyre to be operated with in the speed limit specified by the speed rating index marked on the tyre.

•

The tread depth of temporary tyre is lesser compared to regular tyre. Hence do not use the temporary tyre for longer distance than recommended. Repair & refit the regular tyre as soon as possible.

•

Recommended to drive Max 50 km in a stretch or reach nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

13.30.16 Changing a Flat Tyre

Refer to “Changing a Flat Tyre” section in the Emergencies chapter for details.

13.30.17 Wheel Tightness

When you change a wheel, remove all rust and dirt at all locations where the wheel contacts the wheel hub. Use a scraper or wire brush to be sure that you remove all rust and dirt. A loose wheel could have damaged or elongated the holes in the rim, or damaged the rim/hub assembly. If any of the wheel bolts are damaged, contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Always tighten the bolts in a criss-cross sequence. Never use oil or grease on your wheel bolts.

Never overtighten the bolts on the wheel hub. You could damage the hub or the bolt.

Torque tighten the wheel bolts to the specified value at the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

The tyres fitted in this vehicle meet the requirements of BIS and they comply with the requirements under the Central Motor Vehicles Rules (CMVR) 1989.

13.31 Tiretronics (If Equipped)

The tiretronics system checks the pressure and temperature of the air inside the pneumatic tyres of the vehicle. System alerts the driver during driving if any of the tyre parameters are not in acceptable limits due to any reason.

The system will continue to alert until the warning condition is resolved to the actual placard values.

Appropriate tyre pressure and tyre temperature is required for:

•

Adequate braking

•

Road grip

•

Vehicle handling

•

Vehicle maneuvering

•

Reduced tyre wear and tear

•

Reduced tyre strain and safety

•

Good fuel efficiency

The DID displays all alerts & visual warnings related to Tiretronics system.

13.31.1 Operation of Tiretronics

Tiretronics uses wireless sensor technology that is mounted on the wheel rim to checks the tyre pressure levels. They transmit the data to the receiver inside the vehicle which is in turn is communicated and displayed on the DID.

In the DID screen all the tyre locations will display the status as pressure and temperature. Spare tyre (if TPMS sensor equipped) information on tiretronics screen shall be available only during any alerts and warning in the spare tyre. (User Shall verify spare tyre pressure manually, In certain conditions system may not update pressure for Spare tyre correctly).

The Tiretronics has been customized only for the manufacturer’s genuine tyres and wheels. Tiretronics pressure limits and warning messages have been established and calibrated for the tyre size equipped on your vehicle. Replacement of manufacturer’s parts with a different size, type or style of components may damage the sensor and lead to incorrect readings.

Do not use aftermarket tyre sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with Tiretronics. Failure to comply may lead to sensor damage.

The Tiretronics is not intended to replace normal tyre care and maintenance or to warn of any tyre failure condition. The system should not be used as a replacement for a pressure measuring gauge to adjust the vehicle tyre pressure.

Driving with under-inflated tyres cause the tyres to overheat and may lead to tyre failure. Under-inflated tyres reduce fuel efficiency, tyre tread life and may affect the vehicle’s maneuverability and braking ability.

It is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure using an accurate pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tiretronics warning indicator.

13.31.2 Tiretronics Warning Lamp

The Tiretronics warning lamp in the DID illuminates for any alert condition and also for low/high tyre pressure/High temperature alerts and malfunction.

13.31.3 Tiretronics Sensor Installation

First apply lubricant (paste) or soapy water to rim hole or valve nozzle bar, as shown in the following figure (the diagram is for reference only, and it is operated according to the degree of automation of the customer’s production line).

Line the sensor up with the rim hole and attach the TTV insertion tool to the end of the valve ready for pull in.

Ensure the TTV insertion tool is positioned to the correct notch and that the sensor is pulled through in a direction parallel to the valve whole axis and NOT at an angle to it.

The picture below shows a correctly fitted sensor. Note the rubber bulb of the valve resting against the rim and the front face of the enclosure is NOT touching the rim. Apply tyre soap solution to the rubber portion of the valve stem and the top of the enclosure.

Place the inner tyre bead over the rim.

Place the outer tyre bead over the rim.

Inflate all tyres to the prescribed pressure, check the valve area for leakage and re-balance the wheels prior to installing back on the vehicle.

Starting to mount the tyre from the valve location is a wrong fitment. The fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and damage it. Start from the opposite direction.

13.31.4 Tiretronics Sensor Removal

•

Remove the tyre from the rim.

•

Remove the valve core to deflate the tyre.

•

Remove the tread and ensure that the extractor forceps is inserted into the tyre at the yellow position shown below and turn the rim clockwise.

•

To remove the sensor, firstly remove the screw using a T6 TORX screwdriver.

•

Carefully and firmly pull the enclosure straight back off the valve.

•

Cut the rubber bulb and attach the TTV tool to the valve. Remove the valve from the rim by pulling through the rim, or simply pull through without cutting the bulb.

•

Lift the outer tyre bead over the rim using a tyre tool.

The valve must be positioned just left of the start position to avoid sensor damage. Do not touch the sensor with the tyre tool.

•

Lift the inner tyre bead over the rim using the tyre tool.

•

Remove existing valve stem.

Starting to mount the tyre from the valve location is a wrong fitment. Fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and damage it. Start from the opposite direction.

13.31.5 Functionalities of Tiretronics System

•

Low Pressure Alert

•

High Pressure Alert

•

High Temperature Alert

•

Pressure Leakage Alert

•

Sensor Signal Missing (Communication error)

•

Tiretronics Sensor Faulty

•

Tyre Auto Learn

•

Tyre Fill Assist (TFA)

•

Tyre Pressure Imbalance

Low Pressure Alert

Low pressure monitoring is to indicate low tyre pressure. Please note the following points.

•

Low pressure alert will be set only when the tyre pressure value goes below threshold. Low pressure will be set based on the temperature value.

•

Low pressure alert in the main alert screen will pop up once for driver notification when the alert is set and the vehicle is in running condition. Otherwise the alert will remain in the information screen and alert register screen.

•

If low pressure is observed, respective tyre should be rectified with cause of low pressure and then fill air.

•

Once low pressure alert is set with tyre pressure below threshold the alert shall not be cleared until the pressure is filled to the placard value.

High Pressure Alert

High pressure monitoring is to indicate high pressure alert. Please note the following points.

•

High pressure alert will be set only when the tyre pressure value goes above threshold.

•

High pressure alert in the main alert screen will pop up once for driver notification when the alert is set and the vehicle is in running condition. Otherwise, the alert will remain in the tiretronics screen.

•

If high pressure value is observed, air has to be released from the respective tyre until the pressure reduces to the placard value.

•

The vehicle should be driven above 40 km/h for the new pressure value to be updated and the alert to be cleared.

•

Once the high pressure alert is triggered the alert shall not get cleared until the respective tyre pressure is reaches to the placard value.

Pressure Leakage Alert

Pressure leakage monitoring is to indicate pressure leakage in any of the vehicle tyres. Please note the following points.

•

Pressure Leakage alert will be set only when the tyre pressure is leaking at a rate greater than defined threshold.

•

In the pressure leakage condition if the tyre pressure goes too below threshold then the low pressure alert will also be set.

•

The pressure leakage alert in the main alert screen will pop up once when the alert is set for driver notification and will be shown in tiretronics screen when the vehicle is in running /ignition ON condition.

•

Once pressure leakage is observed the respective tyre should be observed for air leakages and the puncture condition has to be rectified. Proper placard value should be filled after puncture rectification.

•

If the vehicle is running in an extremely rocky and acute bumpy condition then fluctuating pressure leakage alert may get set which will get rectified when the vehicle runs back on a normal road. This happens due to sudden change in pressure levels due to rocky conditions.

Sensor Signal Missing Alert

When the vehicle runs in speed above 40 km/h, Tiretronics system receives signal from all the Tiretronics sensor installed in all running tyres.

•

On account of any issue in signal reception or Tiretronics sensor damage or tyres changed with out performing manual learning then the signal will not be received.

•

If the signals from the tiretronics sensor are not received atleast once, when the vehicle is driven at a speed greater than 40 km/h for more than 10 minute, “Signal Missing” alert will be set for the respective tyre and Tiretronics Telltale will be ON.

•

When the Tiretronics signal missing is set then perform manual learning once. If manual learning is not done successfully then the corresponding position tyres sensor needs to be checked by carefully opening the tyre.

•

If the sensor is found to be damaged then it should be replaced with a new one and manual/auto learning should be done.

Sensor Faulty / Low Battery Alert

Each tiretronics sensor in the vehicle tyres has an internal individual battery. If the battery level is too low or the sensor by itself is malfunctioning then the Tiretronics system shall give this alert.

•

If the Tiretronics sensor low battery/faulty is set then the corresponding position tyres sensor needs to be removed by carefully opening the tyre and replacing it with a new sensor.

•

Post replacing the new sensor, manual/auto learning should be done.

Tyre Auto Learn Process (If Enabled in DID)

In case of tyres location changed from its original location, automatically tyre swap location shall be identified and pressure and temperature value for respective tyre shall be updated within 10 minute of vehicle driving based on environmental condition and vehicle drive condition auto location shall take one or more drive cycle to auto learn.

In case of a new TPMS replaced in the tyre, automatically system shall identify the tyre swapped location and update the warnings and alert for new location.

If spare wheel tyre get swapped with any of the running tyres then display shall show Signal missing in the DID for respective tyre location and TPMS indication lamp will blink for 90 second and remain ON. TPMS indication lamp will continue until the error condition is rectified.

Refer DID settings for the “TPMS Auto Learn” in the “Driver Information Display (DID)” chapter for further details.

Tyre Fill Assist (TFA) (If Enabled in DID)

During air filling in tyre,

•

Hazard lamps shall blink until placard value reaches.

•

If tyre pressure has reached the placard value, then horn shall activate one time.

•

If tyre pressure exceeds placard value, then hazard lamps shall blink at faster rate.

Refer DID settings for the “Tyre Fill Assist” in the “Driver Information Display (DID)” chapter for further details.

Tyre Pressure Imbalance

During driving if the system identifies tyre pressure imbalance on front two tyres / rear two tyres then DID shall popup Tyre Pressure imbalance warning.

13.31.6 Tiretronics Manual Learning

After tyre rotation or Tiretronics sensor replacement, the receiver must be learnt, else the Tiretronics warning lamp will be ON, indicating malfunction.

Mandate Points

Manual learning is the process by which the identities of 4 sensors installed inside the tyres are learnt and programmed in to the memory of the receiver module.

Manual learning should be compulsorily performed on any of the following conditions or operations done

•

Any sensors replaced.

•

Any of the tyres are replaced.

•

If any of the tyres or set of tyres are shuffled or swapped in position.

•

If tyre rotation operation is performed.

•

If it is observed that the alert indications in the tiretronics screen are not co-relating with respect to their actual position in the vehicle.

Once manual learning is initiated, the sensors inside the tyres need to be triggered by leaking the air from each tyre one at a time and should be completed within certain value post to each event for learning all 4 tyres.

Do not perform Manual learning process at the same time on two vehicles with in the radius of 20 meter.

It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should follow the sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front right tyre, rear right tyre and rear left tyre.

It is required to ensure the tyres have pressure > 32 psi and < 36 psi before initiating the manual learning process.

Post manual learning, all tyres should be filled to the placard pressure value.

It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should follow the sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front right tyre, rear right tyre and rear left tyre’.

Initiating the Manual Learning Process

1. Turn the ignition OFF. Press and hold the up button in steering wheel.

2. Turn the ignition ON.

3. Wait for the DID’s tachometer and speedometer to rotate to highest position and then release the enter button in up position. Then observe the DID for the Tiretronics telltale to blink, vehicle siren will indicate by 2 chrips and 2 times turn lamps blink and DID screen shows ‘TPMS MANUAL LEARNING’.

If failed to enter in to the manual learning mode:

•

Try initiating the manual learning once again.

•

Check if the reverse gear is engaged, if it is engaged disengage it.

•

Check if the Enter button is working fine.

If problem still persist, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further assistance.

Starting from Front Left Tyre: Start leaking the air from the front left for 30 to 40 second and stop for 5 second. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.

If the front left tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and the FL tyre shows learned in the DID screen.

Learning the Front Right Tyre: Start leaking the air from the front right for 30 to 40 second and stop for 5 second Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.

If the front right tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and the FR tyre shows learned in the DID screen.

Learning the Rear Right Tyre: Start leaking the air from the rear right for 30 to 40 second and stop for 5 second. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.

If the rear right tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and the RR tyre shows learned in the DID screen.

Completing the Learning with Rear Left Tyre: Start leaking the air from the rear left tyre for 30 to 40 second and stop for 5 second. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.

If the rear left tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and the RL tyre shows learned in the DID screen.

If rear left tyre is also learned, then 1 siren chirp is heard and ALL tyres show learned at respective tyre positions and ‘All tyres Learned successfully’ in the centre of the screen.

If learning is not successful at any point of time, or at any point of time during the learning process if the learning takes more than 90 second of time for each tyre position then the system shall exit the learning mode and show the ‘TPMS Manual Learning Not Successful’ screen.

Limitations

•

Tiretronics monitors only tyre pressure and temperature. It does not monitor conditions such as tyre wear.

•

Tiretronics will not be able to detect an instant tyre burst and inform the driver in advance.

•

There may be the possibility of getting all the tyre location indicators on the Tiretronics display blinking along with the Tiretronics telltale, on passing environment area prone to heavy power lines and RF signal. It will come back to normal condition when interference gets cleared.

13.31.7 Tiretronics — Points to Remember

•

It is recommended to fill the pressure to 32 psi at a digital gauge station only.

•

Every 15 days, inflate all the tyres up to 32 psi and inflation should be done at cold condition/ambient temperature.

•

Pressure deviation between the Tiretronics display and gauge will depend upon the following factors:

–

Atmospheric pressure

–

Error in pressure filling gauge (not calibrated)

–

Air leakage during inflation/deflation

•

Tiretronics measures pressure of the tyre.

•

Pressure deviation is defined for 0.5 psi (min) and 3 psi (max).

•

If the vehicle battery/fuse is disconnected and reconnected, it will update the pressure after the vehicle is driven or sensor is activated.

•

If the vehicle tyres are rotated or any of the tyres sensors are replaced, then tires have to be learned via either manual or auto learning. Refer Tyre Auto/Manual learn process in Tiretronics section for more details.

•

If more than one tyre needs to be learned, learn all 4 tyres as per manual learning procedure.

•

Tiretronics is only a warning or indicating device. Pressure and temperature values displayed by the system is for indication prior to alert purposes only. The Tiretronics system should not be used as a measuring device to correlate or calibrate against other systems.

•

During winter or in cold conditions, there may be chances of getting a pressure alert with the corresponding tyre location indicator in the display, if the tyre pressure is near the thresholds level. i.e. between 28 psi to 24 psi. However, this alert will get cleared after driving a few kilometer depending upon the climatic condition.

13.31.8 Recommended Placard Value

Ambient Temp. (°C)	Recommended Pressure Front & Rear (32 Psi Placard)
<0	28
10	29
20	31
30	32
40	34
50	35
60	37
70	38

If the vehicle was previously halted for more than 45 minute and is driven less than 15 minute before filling the air then the tyres shall be filled to the respective placard as per the ambient temperature else to the next placard value.

Example: If a vehicle was halted at a ambient of 30 °C for 50 minute and driven to a air filling station within 5 minute then respective play card value will be 32.0 PSI for front & rear. Else 33.5 PSI.

13.32 Steering

Your vehicle is equipped with electric power steering (EPS). EPS system provides an external assist, so that the driver can easily rotate the steering wheel without much effort. The power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of manoeuvrability in tight spaces. If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will provide mechanical steering capability to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking manoeuvres.

Continued operation with reduced power steering performance could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Have the vehicle serviced at specified intervals or whenever a power steering problem is noticed.

Keep both hands especially your thumbs on the outside of the steering wheel rim. Do not hold the steering wheel spokes.

If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned OFF or Not availability of vehicle speed / Power cut off), you can still steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.

If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:

•

Under inflated tyre(s) on any wheel(s)

•

Uneven vehicle loading

•

High crown in the centre of the road

•

High crosswinds

•

Wheels out of alignment

•

Wheels out of balance

•

Loose or worn suspension components

13.32.1 Tilt Steering

The steering wheel can be adjusted for both tilt and telescopic (If Equipped) as required using the lever in the steering shroud under the steering wheel.

To tilt/adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the tilt lever down to unlock.

2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the desired position.

3. Move the steering wheel to the desired position.

4. Push the tilt lever back up to its original position to lock the steering.

Improperly locked steering wheel could cause loss of control and lead to accidents. Never adjust the steering wheel while driving.

13.33 Steering – Audio (LH)

The steering wheel also houses switches to control the main audio functions.

Audio Operation can be controlled by Steering wheel switch mounted on the left side of the steering wheel.

Type 1 (If Equipped)

A: Toggle-VOLUME +/- PUSH-MUTE	F: Seek Down
B: Volume +	G:Call Disconnect
C: Voice	H: Call Connect
D: Mode	I: Volume -
E: Seek Up

Type 2 (If Equipped)

A: Voice	F: Source
B: Volume +	G: Seek Up
C: Mute & Unmute	H: Seek Down
D: Volume –	I: Call Disconnect
E: Call Connect

13.34 Cruise Control (If Equipped)

Cruise functions can be controlled by Steering wheel switch mounted on the right side of the steering wheel.

Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed without the need to keep your foot on the accelerator pedal. It should be used for cruising on straight, open highways. Never use it for city driving, inclines, winding roads, slippery roads, heavy rain or in bad weather conditions.

It works on the closed loop system principle to maintain the set speed of the vehicle; the system controls the fuel injection of the engine in order to maintain the set speed.

Type 1 (If Equipped)	Type 2 (If Equipped)

A: Cruise ON/OFF	C: Set –
B: Set +	D: Cruise Resume

Cruise control enhances your comfort while driving and allows you to effortlessly maintain the desired lane speed limit. Improper use of the cruise control can lead to an accident.

Cruise control is designed to operate above a vehicle speed of 20 km/h - MT / 35 km/h - AT for all gears except 1st and reverse gears. The cruise lamp in the instrument cluster functions only if the cruise control is active.

Cruise control will function only under the following conditions;

•

The vehicle is cruising above 20 km/h - MT / 35 km/h - AT.

•

Engine r/min above 1 200 r/min.

•

Vehicle is in any gear except 1st and reverse.

•

Clutch pedal released.

•

Brake pedal released.

•

Cruise is enabled by pressing ON/OFF button.

•

Cruise is activated first time in an ignition cycle by SET + / SET - button.

•

Subsequent cruise engagements can be done by RESUME SET+ /SET- buttons in the same ignition cycle.

Cruise control is deactivated under the following conditions:

•

CRUISE OFF button is pressed.

•

Brake or clutch pedal depressed.

•

If the vehicle speed exceeds the cruise set speed by 20 km/h - MT / 35 km/h - AT by accelerator pedal intervention.

•

If vehicle speed is increased by 10 km/h for more than 30 second by pressing the accelerator pedal.

•

When Set+/Set- switch is pressed for more than 12 second (In this case, vehicle will not go into cruise mode in that ignition cycle. In order to restore the cruise function, switch OFF the ignition, wait for 30 second and switch ON the ignition).

•

Cruise influencing error indicated by Check Engine Lamp, OBD lamp, etc.

13.34.1 Cruise Control Activation

Cruise is enabled by pressing ON/OFF button.

Drive the vehicle to the desired cruising speed (any value greater than 20 km/h - MT / 35 km/h - AT), press and hold the SET+ button until the cruise lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates.

If cruise is deactivated (e.g. by depressing brake to handle an intervention in the road etc.) in current driving cycle, reactivate the Cruise to the last active Cruise Speed by pressing the RESUME button.
Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up or down hills, and the vehicle may come out of cruise control. This is indicated by the cruise lamp going OFF in the instrument cluster.

13.34.2 Cruise Control De-activation

You can cancel cruise control in any of the following ways:

•

Press the CRUISE OFF button in the steering wheel.

•

Press the brake pedal.

•

Gear selector moved into neutral.

•

HDC or ESP becomes active.

13.34.3 SET + Button

SET + button is used to activate cruise control and also to increase the cruise set speed.
To increase the speed in very small amounts, press the SET + button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed increases by about 2 km/h. When you wish to continuously increase the cruising speed, press and hold the SET + button and release when the desired speed is reached.

13.34.4 SET - Button

To decrease the speed in small amounts, press the SET - button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed decreases by about 2 km/h. When you wish to continuously decrease the cruising speed, press and hold the SET- button. When the desired speed is reached, release the button.

If switch is pressed for more than 12 second, the switch is assumed to be malfunctioning and the cruise functionality ceases to function in that ignition cycle. To resume functionality, ignition has to toggled.

The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver must at all times remain alert of road / traffic conditions and responsible for the vehicle brake operation / steering control.

Never activate cruise control in traffic or when driven in adverse road conditions (heavy rains, windy, slippery, etc.)

13.34.5 RESUME Button

With the help of RESUME, you can opt for the previous set cruising speed of the vehicle in the same ignition cycle. This is best explained with the following example:

Assume, you have activated cruise mode and set the vehicle speed at 50 km/h.

Due to an obstacle or a sharp turn, you have deactivated the cruise mode either by pressing the brake pedal or by switching OFF the CRUISE control.

Vehicle comes out of the cruise mode.

When the road condition is suitable to switch over back to cruise control mode, press RESUME button once. The system activates the cruise control mode to the previous cruising speed of 50 km/h.

To resume the previous cruise set speed, the vehicle speed should be above 20 km/h - MT / 35 km/h - AT.

13.34.6 Override Function

This function enables user to ramp up the cruising speed to overtake front vehicle.

The cruising speed can be increased by using accelerator pedal. User has to complete this action within 30 second, to maintain the cruise mode. If user exceeds the 30 second limit, cruise mode will be deactivated.

14 ADVANCED DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM (If Equipped)

The XUV7XO is equipped with Level 2+ Advanced Driver Assistance System (ADAS) featuring one camera and one radar to provide alerts and controls to improve the overall safety and increase the driver comfort. It should be noted that ADAS is only an assistance given to the driver; it neither replaces the driver nor is a substitute. ADAS may fail to detect vehicles, pedestrians, or road hazards under certain conditions. The driver is fully responsible for maintaining control and must always be prepared to intervene.

The ADAS system gives enormous benefits to driver, however the driver shall remain solely responsible for the safe maneuvering of the vehicle. Driver must remain vigilant throughout the drive.

ADAS provides following features:

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Collision Mitigation System (FCW/AEBS)

•

Front Collision Warning (FCW)

•

Auto Emergency Braking System (AEBS)

High Beam Assist (HBA)

Lane Sway Alert (LSA)

Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)

Speed Limit Assist (SLA)

Lane Centering Function (LCF)

Lane Keep Assist System

•

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

•

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)

Front Vehicle Start Alert (FVSA)

10.

Smart Pilot Assist (SPA)*

*-Even if ADAS is equipped in the vehicle, some features are further subject to applicability.

14.1 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Camera Troubleshooting:

If any of the following telltales or pop-ups are displayed in the DID, please follow the checklist provided in the Camera Maintenance section.

Camera Maintenance:

To avoid incorrect, partial or disabled ADAS functionality due to camera sensor failure, following points to be taken care of:

•

The outer area of the windshield must be cleaned regularly and to be kept free of dirt, oil, ice, water drops, etc.

•

If there is condensation in the inner side of windshield in front of Camera, use the de-mister to clear it.

•

If there is any other dirt in the inner side of windshield in front of camera, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for cleaning.

•

Stickers, window tinting, electronic toll devices or similar objects should not be attached on the windshield in front of camera.

•

If the camera needs to be removed or replaced, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center only.

•

If the windshield portion in front of camera has any cracks/scratches/stone chips, it should be taken to Authorized Mahindra Service Center for complete windshield replacement.

•

If the vehicle met with any accident or impact, particularly for the front side, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center to check for any damage / calibration errors in the camera.

•

In case any modification to be done for Camera, beauty cover, Inside Rear View Mirror or Ceiling, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

•

Any external object/accessories should not be installed on the hood area as it may affect the Camera’s field of view.

•

Ensure that flag post on the bonnet is not blocking the camera view.

•

The head lamps should not be modified and in case of head lamp replacement, head lamp aiming should be by Authorized Mahindra Service Center only.

•

If the Windshield or Camera is replaced, the Camera must be recalibrated at Authorized Mahindra Service Center only.

Radar Troubleshooting:

If any of the below tell tales or pop ups are displayed in the DID, then please follow the checklist provided in the Radar maintenance section.

Radar Maintenance:

To avoid incorrect, partial or disabled ADAS functionality due to Radar sensor failure, following points to be taken care of.

•

The Radar surface and bumper area in front of radar must be cleaned regularly and to be kept free of dirt, oil, ice, water, etc.

•

Any external object should not be installed on the front grill or front bumper area as it may affect Radar’s performance.

•

Ensure that the number plate is not blocking the radar sensor.

•

Avoid any kind of customization to the front bumper and Radar like attaching stickers, installing flags or metallic objects, painting etc.

•

If the vehicle met with any accident or impact, particularly for the front side, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center to check for any damage to the Radar unit.

•

If the Radar sensor needs to be removed or replaced, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center only.

•

If any rework done on front bumper or radar, the radar must be recalibrated by Authorized Mahindra Service Center only.

14.1.1 General System Limitations

ADAS feature functions may get affected due to the detection limitations of Camera and Radar in following conditions.

General Limitations: Camera

•

Poor visibility (conditions such as rain, fog, snow, dust storms, sandstorms, etc).

•

Poor visibility owing to night conditions.

•

Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.

•

Driving on a bumpy road surface or on an uneven dirt road.

•

Strong light (such as, Direct sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles) entering the front camera lens.

General limitations: Radar

•

If dirt, ice, snow or other material is covering the radar sensor area.

•

Inclement weather conditions such as rain, fog, snow, dust storms, sandstorms, etc.

•

Interference by other radar sources.

14.2 Drive Assist

Drive Assist is a feature where all detected road traffic and lanes by Camera and Radars are displayed in DID for driver’s visualization purpose.

This feature is only for visualization purpose and has no influence on the individual feature performance.

Steps to enable Drive Assist:

Press the menu button located on the steering wheel, scroll down and select “Drive Assist”.

Drive Assist Limitations:

Drive Assist visualization has below known limitations and this would not affect the ADAS features working performance in any manner.

•

All four wheelers except large trucks will be displayed as Car.

•

Two wheelers might get displayed as bicyclists and vice versa.

•

Truck may get displayed as Box-Unclassified object.

•

Vehicles in blind spot will be displayed as Box- Unclassified object.

•

Vehicles which are at a longitudinal distance of above 40 m from your vehicle are not displayed.

•

Vehicles which are laterally far from your vehicle are not displayed.

•

Vehicles which are positioned in adjacent lanes are not displayed when the adjacent lane markings are not clear.

•

During rare occasions due to reflection from the environment, false object detections could be possible.

•

There might be a slight delay for objects to get updated in the drive assist screen with respect to real time.

14.3 Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)

When the ACC is engaged, it allows the vehicle to cruise at the desired ‘set speed’. In traffic conditions if a vehicle is detected in the front of the vehicle, then the ACC reduces the vehicle speed to match the front preceding vehicle speed. The distance from the front preceding vehicle is maintained as per the time gap level set by the driver.

Disclaimer

•

ACC is an aid to assist the driver. It is not a collision avoidance system.

•

Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ACC system. Read and understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the system.

•

ACC is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver’s attention and judgement. The driver is responsible for observing all traffic and safety rules, including maintenance of safe distance and speed and must intervene if Adaptive Cruise Control does not maintain a suitable speed or suitable distance to the vehicle ahead.

•

It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert and to be in control of the vehicle at all times.

•

Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash.

•

ACC has limited braking capability and may not stop the vehicle in time to avoid a collision, if the front preceding vehicle decelerates quickly or a new vehicle cuts-in front always be prepared to apply brake.

•

Failure to follow the alerts and instructions for proper use of system could result in serious injury.

•

Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.

•

Use ACC in appropriate roads with proper lane marking and sign boards.

•

Do not use ACC in busy areas where multiple road users cross the vehicle’s intended path.

•

When two wheeler cuts out, ACC may not be able to identify the vehicle in front of two-wheeler.

•

ACC may or may not be able to stop behind stopped vehicles.

•

ACC may not be able to identify a two-wheeler, not to follow two wheeler.

ACC may not detect all types of vehicle and driver has to be vigilant to be in control of the vehicle.

14.3.1 ACC Switches

A: ACC ON/OFF

B: Set +

C: Set –

D: RESUME

E: Target Distance Level (Time Gap)

A - ACC ON/OFF Switch

•

To Toggle between ACC ON and OFF

B - SET+

•

To set desired speed

•

To increase Set speed when ACC is active

C- SET-

•

To set desired speed

•

To decrease Set speed when ACC is active

D- RESUME

•

To resume ACC to previous Set Speed.

E- Target Distance Level (Time Gap):

•

This allows the driver to adjust the following distance from the target vehicle from Level 1 – Level 4.

Do not use RESUME button to Set Speed immediate after ACC ON. Do use only SET+/SET-

14.3.2 ACC Telltales

Image	Display
	ACC Indicator
	Set Speed
	Time Gap
	Front preceding vehicle Indicator

Front preceding vehicle Indicator shows an icon of a Car always though the front preceding vehicle may be a car/truck/two wheeler or any other type of vehicle.

ACC Telltale Color:

•

Red- Permanent Failure

•

Amber- Temporary Failure

•

Grey- ACC Standby

•

Green- ACC Active

•

Green Blink- ACC Override

Target Color:

•

No display- No target is present.

•

Green- Target is present/ Following the target.

•

Green Blink- ACC Override.

Driver Set Speed Color:

•

White- ACC Standby.

•

Green- ACC Active.

•

Green Blink- ACC Override.

Driver Set Distance Level:

•

Grey - ACC Standby.

•

White - ACC Active.

•

White Blink - ACC Override

14.3.3 How to Enable, Adjust and Disable ACC

Press CRUISE switch to activate ACC feature. This turns ACC to Standby Mode.

Standby Mode

When CRUISE switch is pressed and desired speed by using SET +/– is not set.

During Standby mode

	ACC indicator will be grayed out.
	“Adaptive Cruise Control Standby” pop-up message will be displayed in DID.
	Set speed will be displayed as “—”.

•

The vehicle will not maintain previous set speed or previous time gap to the vehicle ahead.

•

Press the ON/OFF switch again to deactivate ACC feature.

•

If ACC indicator illuminates in red, there could be a problem with ACC system. Visit nearby Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Pressing the ON/OFF switch when ACC in Standby/Active will deactivate the ACC feature.

•

When set + is pressed first, ACC set speed gets set to match the vehicle speed. 'Adaptive cruise control active ' message Pop-up. ACC time gap will be displayed in white color. ACC telltale displays in green color in the DID. Further press the set + / set- switch to set the speed.

•

ACC will maintain the vehicle speed as set by the driver. Once set, it will be confirmed by the ACC telltale light. After that no accelerator pedal input from driver need to be given.

At 10 km/h, when you press set +or set-, the ACC will get ACTIVE and ACC SET SPEED will be set to match the vehicle speed.

Later the driver can set their desired speed using set+ or set-.

ACC indicator will be displayed in green.

•

Set speed will be displayed as set by driver.

•

Time interval bars will be displayed.

ACC has two modes:

1. Speed Control Mode

During Speed Control Mode, time gap indicator will be displayed.

ACC operation When No Front Preceding vehicle detected ahead

When there is no front preceding vehicle detected ahead, ACC maintains the speed set by the driver.

2. Follow Control Mode

During Follow Mode, front preceding vehicle Indicator will be displayed if a front preceding vehicle is detected.

ACC operation When Front Preceding Vehicle detected ahead

When there is a preceding vehicle, ACC tries to maintain a safe gap to the front preceding vehicle by reducing the speed accordingly within comfortable deceleration limits.

ACC operation When Front Preceding Vehicle moved out from its lane

When the front preceding vehicle has moved out from your lane of travel, ACC accelerates and maintains vehicle speed to the set speed.

Whenever driver steers and system finds a new target i.e, front preceding vehicle. ACC takes time to pick the new target and react.

•

When there is a front preceding vehicle, user can set desired speed by pressing SET+/- switch even when vehicle speed is below 10 km/h as there is no minimum vehicle speed requirement.

•

When front preceding vehicle and your vehicle are in stopped condition, apply brake and press SET+/SET-. Note that ACC will remain in standstill until the front preceding vehicle moves.

When the SET +/SET– switch is pressed under the following conditions, ACC cannot be activated. Visual and audio alert will be provided to driver to inform the same.

Condition	Alert
When traveling below 10 km/h and a vehicle ahead is not Detected.
When front preceding vehicle is very close or far away from host vehicle. When the shift lever is not in D (Drive) Position. When the brakes are operated by the driver.


When braking system unavailable.
When driving above maximum ACC operational speed limit.
When driver door is open.
When Automatic Emergency braking is unavailable.
When driver seat belt is not buckled.
ACC interacts with other systems, such as braking, steering, EMS (Engine Management System), ACC Switch, etc. If any of these systems are not functioning properly, ACC cannot be activated.

How to increase Set Speed

Use one of the following methods to increase set speed:

•

Press and quickly release the SET+ switch to increase the set speed by 1 km/h.

•

Press and hold the SET+ switch to increase the set speed by 10 km/h. The set speed will be increased to the next nearest multiple of 10. Continuous hold / stuck of SET +/- button for 60 second will turn OFF ACC.

•

Release the switch when the desired set speed reached.

How to decrease Set Speed

Use one of the following methods to decrease set speed:

•

Press and quickly release the SET- switch to decrease the set speed by 1 km/h.

•

Press and hold the SET- switch to decrease the set speed by 10 km/h. The set speed will be decreased to the next nearest multiple of 10.

•

Release the switch when the desired set speed reached.

How to resume ACC to last set speed value

Press the RESUME switch

– ACC will resume back to the last set speed provided the conditions to engage ACC are satisfied.

How to change the Time Gap Level to the front preceding vehicle

For adjusting the time gap between Level 1 to Level 4, press time gap.

Time Gap Level 4->Time Gap Level 3 -> Time Gap Level 2->

Time Gap Level 1-> Time Gap Level 4

•

The set time gap value of the current ignition/driving cycle will be used for the next ignition/driving cycle.

•

When the system is used for the first time after starting the engine, the time gap value is set to the maximum value (Level 4).

How To Adjust ACC Sensitivity

The sensitivity of vehicle acceleration/deceleration can be adjusted to Late, Normal or Early in CID as shown below.

ACC STOP & GO (Only for EPB Variants)

ACC operation When front preceding vehicle is detected in models equipped with Electronic Park Brake

When a front preceding vehicle is detected, front preceding vehicle indicator along with time interval bars will be displayed in DID.

In slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic or when stopped at a traffic light, if the front preceding vehicle comes to stop, ACC decelerates to bring your vehicle also to stop within the limitations of the system. Your vehicle movement will resume automatically if the front preceding vehicle is not stopped for more than 3 second approximately.

If it takes more than 3 second for the front preceding vehicle to begin moving again, ACC will be set to Standby and the stop-hold function will activate. A pop-up alert message “Press Resume Switch or Pedal to Accelerate” will be displayed for driver to resume.

ACC can be engaged by any of the following methods when in stop-hold mode if front preceding vehicle is present at distance more than 2 m and less than 40 m:

Press RESUME button.

Slightly tap the accelerator pedal.

Do not use RESUME button to Set Speed immediate after ACC ON. Do use only SET+/SET-.

When in ACC stopped condition, if driver is trying to unbuckle seat belt/open doors/ change gear etc, then ACC may get disengaged and based on gear lever position, vehicle may crawl. Driver has to apply brake and control the vehicle.

ACC decelerates when there is too much of lateral acceleration.

When following the front preceding vehicle, if the front preceding vehicle disappears due to a cut-out maneuver, a pop-up message will be displayed as “Object Disappeared Pay Attention”.

Please pay attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.

If ACC changes targets from a moving front preceding vehicle to a stationary front preceding vehicle at speeds above 30 km/h, the system may not react to the stationary vehicle and will accelerate to the previously set speed. The driver must actively apply the brake to slow/stop the vehicle.

ACC operation when Accelerator pedal is pressed

Even when ACC is engaged, driver can press the accelerator pedal if he wishes to accelerate the vehicle rapidly. When driver presses accelerator pedal, the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed.

•

ACC is overridden hence Set Speed and Distance is not followed

•

ACC override pop-up will be displayed.

•

Set speed display will blink.

•

Set distance display will blink.

•

The front preceding vehicle indicator will turn off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open.

When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will exit from the override mode and ACC operation will be resumed.

ACC operation when Brake pedal is pressed

ACC is disengaged (ACC enters in Standby Mode): When the driver presses the brake pedal, it overrides the ACC system disengages and goes into standby mode. This allows the driver to have full control over the vehicle’s speed and braking. To resume ACC, the driver can use the Resume button on the steering wheel.

14.3.4 Automatic Cancellation of ACC

Under the following conditions ACC control will be cancelled automatically with an audio alert.

•

When the shift lever is not in D(Drive) position.

•

When the parking brake is applied

•

When Brake pedal is pressed.

•

When ESP is turned off

•

When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted.

•

When radar sensor area of the front bumper covered with dirt or is obstructed.

•

When accelerator pedal is depressed for more than 60 second continuously.

•

When collision mitigation system is in action.

•

When ESP operates.

•

When driver door is open.

•

When vehicle speed exceeds maximum ACC operating speed.

•

When driver seat belt is unbuckled.

•

When ACC is engaged, and your vehicle stopped, and after 3 second the front preceding vehicle moves and disappears and when the driver tries to resume ACC without the front preceding vehicle.

•

When driver tries to resume ACC when front preceding vehicle (moving/stopped) is not in detection range.

In above scenarios, the driver may be alerted by an audio alert and a message in the DID that ACC function is released/disengaged.

The driver is responsible for adapting to vehicle’s speed, apply the brakes when necessary and keep a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.

ACC disengages whenever there is an ESP intervention. For example: pot holes on a bumpy road.

	In some situations where ACC braking is not enough to follow the front preceding vehicle, an audio alert along with pop-up message will be given in the DID “Collision Possible Apply Brake”.
The driver has to apply brake to keep a safe distance.

In case of temporary abnormal conditions, ACC Status telltale will illuminate in Yellow color and ACC function will be disabled temporarily by showing up a pop-up “Adaptive Cruise Control Disabled due to Radar Limitation”.

The following table lists possible causes for this message being displayed and suitable actions

Causes	Action
The bumper in front of the radar is dirty or covered with snow/ice.	Clean/Clear the bumper in front of the radar.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.	No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar. Do not use ACC during heavy rain or snow.
Clogged water or snow from the surface of the road may interface with the radar signals.	No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect the function of the radar. Do not use ACC during these situations.
The bumper area in front of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display.	Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed.
External modification of the radar area where metal part blocks the radar area for longer duration.	Do not use ACC with such external modifications in front of Radar.

	In case of permanent failure, ACC Status telltale will illuminate in red color also and ACC function will be disabled permanently by showing up a pop-up “Adaptive Cruise Control Disabled Service Required” Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
In case of collision in front bumper, the radar position may change which results in degraded ACC performance. Visit nearest service center for radar calibration.

14.3.5 ACC System Limitations

•

Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions.

•

Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is always responsible for applying the brakes if the system does not detect front preceding vehicle.

•

ACC may not assist in close cut-in scenarios.

•

Adaptive Cruise Control does not react to people or animals. It also does not react to slow moving, parked or approaching vehicles, or stationary objects.

•

In case of a hit in bumper / full or partial blockage to RADAR, turn off ACC and get the vehicle serviced as early as possible.

Avoid using ACC under the following conditions

•

On roads where the traffic is heavy or there are sharp curves.

•

On slippery road surfaces.

•

During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) and poor visibility.

•

When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the bumper around the sensor.

•

On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set speed and in trying to maintain set speed, may result in overheating the brakes).

•

On repeated uphill and downhill roads.

•

When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration.

•

Interference by other radar sources installed in nearby protected areas like military, airports etc.

•

Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in demanding driving conditions, in slippery conditions, when there is a great deal of water or slush on the road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on highway on or off ramps.

ACC Limitation Scenarios

ACC may not function in following scenarios:

•

Close cut-in situation

Sudden entry of other road vehicle in to host vehicle’s lane may not be detected.

•

Situation of stopped vehicles

Sudden vicinity of stationary object in host vehicle’s lane may not be detected.

When the preceding vehicle that follows is cutting out, it detects the preceding vehicle (Vehicle-B) as a new preceding vehicle because of an irregular radar reflection are occurred in particular.

As Vehicle-B stops, the host vehicle stops on Vehicle-B.

At this time, since there is no collision with Vehicle-A, the driver may misunderstand that it is under normal control of Vehicle-A.

When Vehicle-B starts, host vehicle may start without considering the new stationary Vehicle-A because of irregular radar reflection.

•

Curve entry / exit situation

In the curve entry / exit situation, based on the curvature of road on which the host vehicle is moving differs from the curvature of the predicted road, so the adjacent lane can be selected as the control target and the preceding vehicle in the host lane may be missed

•

Curves with larger curvature

If the radius of curvature is very small, an inadequate or excessive acceleration/ deceleration may occur due to the limitation

•

Poor visibility

In case of poor visibility, driver must take the control of vehicle.

•

When a preceding vehicle enters an intersection

In an road intersection, target preceding vehicle may be lost and ACC may not function as intended. Driver must take the control of vehicle.

•

When the road gradient changes

In case of road gradient variation, preceding target vehicle may be lost and ACC may not function as intended. Driver must take the control of vehicle.

•

Sensor cover blockage

Any blockage to sensors, detection will degrade and ADAS features may not function as intended.

•

Long cargo loading vehicle

If the height of the preceding target vehicle is very high, the sensor may not detect it and ADAS functionality may vary. Driver should take control of vehicle.

•

Inability to recognize pedestrians

In case of Stop & Go situation, the host vehicle may not detect pedestrian. Driver should take control of vehicle.

•

Excessive braking of the preceding vehicle

ACC might not slow down your XUV7XO sufficiently if target starts to decelerate too fast.

If the preceding vehicle brakes beyond the ACC maximum deceleration limit, AEB may engage. However, driver shall be alert and take control vehicle.

•

Detection performance deterioration due to road side structures

If the front radar is exposed to the surrounding road structures (steel laminates, tunnels, construction sections, etc.) that may affect the detection performance, the front preceding vehicle may not be detected normally.

Any metal road structures / bridges, tunnels or toll plazas may vary the system functionality, Driver shall be alert and take control of the vehicle.

•

False deceleration or no deceleration

If radar misaligned vertically or horizontally, ACC may produce frequent false deceleration or no deceleration for front preceding vehicle. Visit nearest service center for radar alignment.

•

ACC does not slowdown for pot-holes and Speed breakers

•

ACC may not slow down for road curves

•

ACC may not slow down for barriers/blockades

•

ACC does not slow down for crossing or merging vehicles at angles more than 30°

•

ACC does not slowdown for oncoming/reversing front vehicles

•

ACC does not slowdown for animals

Adaptive Cruise Control does not react to special/modified vehicles such as Harvester, Tractor Trailor, Motorized Ice Cream Cart, construction vehicle, animals etc.

•

ACC may not reliably follow bicycle

•

ACC cannot react to stationary target

•

If a very slow moving target cutting in between your XUV7XO and stationary target then there is a chance that ACC system does not pick-up the slow moving target since ACC is not able to discriminate between slow moving target and stationary target.

•

If a target in front takes a sharp turn and goes out of Field of view, then your XUV7XO can start to accelerate fast.

•

ACC might not pick-up target with an offset or stationary vehicle

•

When XUV7XO follows two wheeler and two wheeler overtakes stationary target ahead, XUV7XO may not slow down due to stationary target detection limitation.

•

ACC cannot follow a motorized two-wheeler if two-wheeler speed is less than around 10 km/h.

•

Do not use ACC with an offset to the target vehicle.

•

Do not use ACC to follow motorbikes where there is no space for XUV7XO to navigate.

14.4 Collision Mitigation System

Collision Mitigation System alerts the driver by providing audio and visual warning when there is a possibility of collision with rear end of the preceding vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians detected ahead. if driver fails to take actions within a rational time, system will apply braking in certain situations to mitigate the collision.

Disclaimer

•

System can detect vehicles, cyclists, pedestrians and standing cattle but not in all situations. System’s capacity to assess certain traffic situations is a supplemental aid to the driver and does not function in all driving/traffic situations or weather/road conditions. It can never replace the driver’s attention to traffic conditions or his/her responsibility for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. Refer system limitation section for more information about system limitation. Read the manual carefully in detail before using the system.

•

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the system could result in serious injury or death.

•

The Collision Mitigation System is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for the driver. It is driver’s responsibility to monitor traffic conditions and drive the vehicle safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques.

•

System does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions.

•

System does not detect all kind of vehicles, bicyclists and pedestrians.

•

System is designed to intervene as late as possible i.e. in emergency to help avoid unnecessary activation.

•

System does not detect small animals like dog, monkey, calves, etc).

•

System may not detect standing cattle.

•

Vehicles, pedestrians, cyclists, cattle at an offset may not be detected by FCW/AEB system.

•

Collision Mitigation System works on prediction of possible collision with the objects in front of vehicle by assuming the objects movements in certain directions. Sometimes the objects movement direction may not match to the prediction and the system may react early and provide warning or perform braking even though the object may not be in the host vehicle path.

•

Only rear end of the preceding vehicles are identified by the system and warning or braking as needed will be provided by the system. System may not react or providing warning or braking for a crossing or oncoming vehicle. System may not react to a stationary vehicle if the vehicle is stationed in crossing or oncoming pose.

Collision Mitigation System comprises of the following functions:

Forward Collision Warning (FCW): When enabled, alerts the driver in case of a possible collision detected by the system.

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB): When enabled, can provide a braking assist to mitigate the collision detected by the system.

There are situations where the system may not detect a possible collision, driver has to take control of the vehicle always.

System Operation

Prerequisite for activation

AEB or FCW gets ready to be activated when turned ON from CID (go to App Drawer >> Driver Assistance >> Collision Warning >> Auto Emergency Braking / Forward Collision Warning) settings and when the following prerequisites are satisfied.

- The braking system is ready.

- Vehicle speed is within system operating limit.

- No other system failures or degradation of functions related to Collision mitigation systems like Braking system, Engine management system, Steering system, etc.

14.4.1 FCW and AEBS for Vehicles

To enable the system to detect rear end of preceding vehicles ahead, the vehicle driving speed must be at least 10 km/h.

Below 10 km/h FCW/AEB will not work.

System detects types of vehicles that are either stationary or moving in the same direction as your vehicle. In order to detect a vehicle in darkness, its headlights and taillights must be ON and clearly visible.

Minimum overlap with the bumper should be 50% for system to detect a front preceding vehicle. Minimum overlap with the bumper should be 50% for system to detect a motorbike/two wheeler.

Level 1 Warning

•

The driver is alerted to the risk of an imminent collision by first level of visual and audible warning.

The icon displayed as visual alert may show the object in the front as car even though the system may react for cars, pedestrians,two wheelers and cyclists.

Level 2 Warning

•

If the driver does not take action or the driver braking force is not enough to mitigate collision, system issues the second level of visual and audible warning and applies partial braking.

Level 3 Warning

•

After second level warning, If the driver does not take action or driver braking force is not enough and risk of a collision is imminent, the system applies harder braking along with third level of visual and audible warning.

System applying AEB braking can only mitigate a possible collision and does not guarantee in avoiding the collision. Driver has to take necessary braking or steering actions to avoid the collision.

During harder braking, there are possibilities that the occupants may experience a high amount of physical shock due to the braking force which may cause uncomfortable feeling or injury. Take necessary health checkups and precautions when experienced.

All the occupants should wear seat belts, as the system braking may lead of high level of motional inertia, where unbelted occupants are in a risk of getting injured.

Vehicle’s brake lights come on when braking is performed by the AEB system.

If driver applies hard brake during drive, dynamic braking system activates to boost braking force.

When Forward Collision Warning is enabled in CID, Driver Assist settings, the driver is alerted to the risk of an imminent collision by visual and audible warnings. Braking will not be provided in this setting.

When system has applied the brakes, a pop-up message will be displayed as “Automatic Emergency Braking Completed”.

If AEB system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at standstill for approximately 2 second before the brakes are released.

If the vehicle driving speed is above 85 km/h, AEB third level warning won’t come and system won’t apply full braking. In this case first and second level warning alone will be provided. Never wait for a warning or Collision Mitigation System to take action.

The maximum level of braking is limited to 50 km/h of speed drop. E.g. If the AEBS is initiated at 60 km/h, then by reaching 10 – 15 km/h the brakes will be released. Driver has to be in control of the vehicle always.

The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions:

•

When steering is applied to avoid a collision.

•

When the accelerator pedal is depressed.

•

When there is no longer a vehicle detected ahead.

•

When driver presses and releases brake pedal.

How to turn ON/OFF AEB/FCW System

Perform the following steps to turn the AEB/FCW system ON or OFF:

1. To enable FCW, in CID, go to ‘App Drawer >> Driver Assistance >> Assistance >> Collision Warning’, under Auto Emergency Braking select ‘Warning’.

2. To enable AEBS, in CID, go to ‘App Drawer >> Driver Assistance >> Assistance >> Collision Warning, under Auto Emergency Braking and select ‘Assist’.

When the AEB system is turned off, the AEBS OFF telltale will be ON in DID.

Auto Emergency braking Warning Timing

User can enable the collision warning timing in CID, go to ‘App Drawer >> Driver Assistance >> Assistance >> Collision Warning, under Auto Emergency Braking Warning Timing’ and adjust Early to Late by tapping on ‘-’/’+’.

Late - When this condition is selected, warning is provided at shorter time to collision.

Normal - When this condition is selected, warning is provided at higher time to collision than “Late” setting.

Early - When this condition is selected, warning is provided at higher time to collision than “Normal” setting. if you are experiencing frequent warning, you can change setting to “Normal” or “Late”.

There is a minimum time interval of 60 second required for system to provide successive AEB.

There is a chance for providing FCW warnings for some obstacles like Barricades and Cows since the RADAR may not be able to differentiate such big obstacles with respect to vehicles.

•

No automatic system can be guaranteed to function 100% correctly in all situations.

•

Never test Collision Mitigation System by driving toward a person or object. This could result in serious injury or death.

•

To help make Collision Mitigation System as effective as possible, it is recommended to always use the setting “Early”.

14.4.2 FCW and AEBS for Pedestrian

To enable the system to detect a pedestrian, the vehicle driving speed must be at least 10 km/h.

For pedestrian detection clear information about the person’s head, arms, shoulders, legs, the upper and lower parts of the body and a person’s normal pattern of movement are required. In order to detect a pedestrian, there must be a contrast to the background. If there is little contrast, the person may not be detected.

If major parts of the pedestrian’s body are not visible to the camera, person may not be detected.

In order to detect a pedestrian, the system must have a full view of the person’s entire body and the person must be at least 80 cm tall.

Fast moving pedestrians and pedestrians not in their walking pose are not detected by the system and hence there will not be any warning or braking provided by the system.

Minimum overlap should be 25% for system to detect a pedestrian.

System may not detect pedestrians in sitting, bent, crawling or lying poses.

If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 km/h, AEB second and third level warning won’t come for pedestrian. Hence system won’t apply full braking. If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 km/h and below 85 km/h, then first level warning alone will be provided. Never wait for a warning or for Collision Mitigation System to take action.

The maximum level of braking is limited to 50 km/h of speed drop, E. g: If the AEBS is initiated at 60 km/h, then by reaching 10 – 15 km/h the brakes will be released. Driver has to be in control of the vehicle always.

14.4.3 FCW and AEBS for Cyclists

To enable the system to detect a cyclist, the vehicle driving speed must be at least 10 km/h.

For cyclist detection, clear information about the cycle itself and the rider’s head, arms, shoulders, legs, the upper and lower parts of the body and a cyclist’s normal pattern of movement is required.

If major parts of the cyclist’s body are not visible to the camera, the system cannot detect the cyclist.

The cyclist should be of height greater than 3 feet and should be driving an adult cycle.

Fast moving cyclists are not detected by the system. Hence the system may not react by providing warning or braking for the fast moving cyclists.

If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 km/h, AEB second and third level warning won’t come for cyclist. Hence system won’t apply full braking. If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 km/h and below 85 km/h, then first level warning alone will be provided. Never wait for a warning or for Collision Mitigation System to take action.

14.4.4 FCW and AEBS for Vehicles — Junction Turning

To enable the system to detect an approaching vehicle in junction turning scenarios the vehicle driving speed must be between 10-30 km/h and oncoming vehicle should be clearly visible and moving in the speed range of 30 km/h to 70 km/h.

To detect an approaching vehicle in situations where there is a risk of a collision, that approaching vehicle must be within detection range and your vehicle must be in left lane making a right turn with the right turn indicator ON.

In junction turning scenarios, system applies braking and there is no warning.

Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the target ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help mitigate the consequences of a collision and cannot completely avoid the collision. The driver is responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed. Never wait for a warning or collision mitigation system to take action.

14.4.5 FCW and AEBS for Cow

For the cow detection, the vehicle driving speed must be at least 10 km/h and the height and width of cow shall be above 1 m and 0.5 m respectively.

In order for the system to detect cow, clear information about the cow itself and the cow’s head, forelegs, hindlegs and cow’s normal pattern of movement is required.

If major parts of the cow’s body is not visible to the camera, the system cannot detect properly.

Level 1 Warning:

The driver is alerted to the risk of an imminent collision by first level of visual and audible warning.

Level 2 Warning:

If the driver does not take action or the driver braking force is not enough to mitigate collision, system issues the second level of visual and audible warning and applies partial braking.

Level 3 Warning:

Group of cows and fast moving cows may not be detected by the system. Hence the system may not react by providing warning or braking for fast moving cows.

If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 km/h, AEBS second and third level warning won’t come for cow. Hence system won’t apply full braking. If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 km/h and below 85 km/h, then first level warning alone will be provided. Never wait for a warning or for Collision Mitigation System to take action.

Minimum overlap should be 25% for system to react to a cow.

14.4.6 Collision Mitigation System Troubleshooting

If any of below mentioned messages is displayed in the DID means that the system is not functioning properly and should be turned off.

However, message will not be displayed in all situations in which the camera/radar sensor is obstructed. For this reason, the driver must ensure that the area of the windshield in front of the camera and area on the bumper in front of radar sensor is always kept clean.

1. In case of temporarily abnormal conditions due to camera sensor, AEB warning lamp will be ON in yellow color and a pop up message will appear in DID that “Automatic Emergency Braking Function Limited due to Camera Blockage”.

The following table lists possible causes for this message being displayed and suitable actions:

Cause	Action
The area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is dirty or covered by ice or snow	Clean the windshield or remove the ice/snow
Thick fog or heavy rain /snow blocks reduce the camera sensor’s range of visibility	No action. The driver should be extra alert in condition of this type
There is dirt between the inside of the windshield and the camera sensor	Have the area of the windshield cleaned by Authorized Mahindra Service Center

•

If the warning lamp continues to illuminate after above action and engine restart, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for this service.

2. In case of temporarily abnormal conditions due to radar sensor, AEB warning lamp will be ON in yellow color and a pop up message will appear in DID that “Automatic Emergency Braking Disabled due to Radar Detection Limitation”.

The following table lists possible causes for this message being displayed and suitable actions:

Cause	Action
The bumper in front of the radar is dirty or covered with snow/ice	Clean/clear the bumper in front of the radar
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals	No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar
Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interface with the radar signals	No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect the function of the radar
The windshield in front of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display	Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed

If the warning lamp continues to illuminate after above action and engine restart, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for this service.

3. If system malfunctions, AEB warning lamp will be continuously ON in yellow color.

A pop up message will appear in DID that “Automatic Emergency Braking Disabled: Service required”. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

14.4.7 Collision Mitigation System Limitations

Collision Mitigation System is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations:

Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with below system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

•

Collision warning cannot detect all vehicles, cyclists, pedestrians, animals or general objects under all conditions.

•

System can not detect the following objects:

–

Small pedestrians (including small children).

–

Sitting or bent pedestrians will not be detected.

–

Pedestrians other than their walking or standing poses may not be detected.

–

Pedestrians in wheelchairs or using mobile transport such as scooters, child-operated toys, or skateboards

–

Pedestrians who are seated or otherwise not in a full upright standing or walking position.

–

Pedestrian who are partially obscured, wearing clothing that prevents a clear view of the person’s body contours.

–

Oncoming vehicles.

–

Crossing vehicles.

–

Merging vehicles.

–

Cutting in vehicles.

–

Specialized vehicles.

–

Obstacles on the roadside.

–

Vehicles that are irregular in shapes like hand carts, cycle carts, motorized carts, animal carts.

–

Vehicles that look irregular when loaded.

–

Vehicles that have long trailers above.

–

Two wheeler or bicycles without a rider.

–

Two wheeler carrying baggage extended beyond regular shape of two wheeler.

–

Obscured vehicles.

•

If the pedestrians/cows/general objects has limited contrast to their immediate background, warning or braking may be delayed or not come at all.

•

System may not react for fast moving vehicles, pedestrians and cows.

•

System cannot detect all cyclists in all situations, such as:

–

a partially obscured cyclist.

–

a cyclist whose clothing is in such a way that prevents clear view of the person’s body contours.

–

a cyclist transporting a large object.

•

System may not function in junction turning scenario under below conditions:

–

If the oncoming vehicle is detected at a late stage.

–

If the oncoming vehicle is partially obscured by another vehicle.

–

If the oncoming vehicle changes lane at a late stage.

•

System may not function if speed difference between the two vehicles is too small or too high.

•

System may not function properly or detect a target ahead in the following conditions:

–

Poor visibility (conditions such as rain, fog, snow, dust storms, sandstorms, etc.)

–

Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.

–

Driving on a bumpy road surface, such as an uneven dirt road,

–

If dirt, ice, snow or other material is covering the radar sensor area,

–

Interference by other radar sources.

–

The camera area of windshield is fogged up or covered with dirt, water drops, ice, snow, etc.

–

Strong light (such as, Direct sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles) enters the front camera.

–

A sudden change in brightness occurs (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or a shaded area or lightning flashes).

•

In case of a hit in bumper / full or partial blockage to RADAR, disable AEB and get the vehicle serviced as early as possible.

•

Whenever a trailer is connected to the vehicle, AEBS and LKA features must be disabled manually through CID settings, at every ignition cycle.

Collision Mitigation System limitation Scenarios

Collision Mitigation System may not function in following scenarios:

•

False decelerations or no decelerations

If radar misaligned vertically or horizontally, Collision mitigation system may produce frequent false warning or deceleration or no warning/ no deceleration for front preceding vehicle. Visit nearest service center for radar alignment.

•

When any vehicle moves greater than +/- 20° to host vehicle direction

If any vehicle moves at heading angle greater than +/- 20° to the host vehicle system may not consider it. Driver must be alert and take control.

•

When it is difficult to obtain view by the camera

Due to poor visibility by camera like sunlight or any other source of light on camera. System may not function as intended Driver must be alert and take control of the vehicle.

•

When the tail light of the front preceding vehicle is asymmetrical at night

At night, if the preceding vehicle’s tail lamps are not in symmetry or mounting positions are unusual, system may not function as intended. Driver shall be alert and take control of the vehicle.

•

Pedestrian suddenly jumping in to the host vehicle lane too closer to host vehicle

System may not consider if a pedestrian suddenly jumps in to the lane / area very closer to host vehicle. Driver shall be alert and take control of vehicle.

•

If a part of the body of the pedestrian is a covered or standing pedestrian

In the case of pedestrians whose body part is obscured by umbrellas, bags, special clothes, etc, detection may not be accurate & system may not function as intended. Driver shall be alert and take control of vehicle.

•

Difficult to distinguish pedestrians due to low illumination.

If the illumination is low / poor visibility, system may not function as intended. Driver shall be alert and take control of vehicle.

•

Fast moving pedestrians

System may not function as intended with fast moving pedestrians due to sensing limitations.

•

Pedestrians with lower height

System may not function as intended with pedestrians with lower height.

•

Risk of collision in proximity cut-in

There is a close-sensing blind spot, and there is a risk of collision at close cut-in of adjacent lane vehicles.

•

Intersection situation

The control target of the radar is selected as the control target only for the rear surface of the vehicle driving in the AEB vehicle driving direction. Therefore, there is a risk of collision for vehicles moving at right angles to the direction of intersection or for vehicles turning right.

•

The condition is that target is not detected at the road inclination change point

Due to the vertical angle limit of the radar, it is impossible to detect the front target (vehicle, pedestrian) in uphill and downhill hill.

•

The situation where the load is protruding from the rear of the vehicle

When a specific type of load is loaded or a special vehicle, it can collide if it is not selected as the control target due to the sensor detection limit.

•

When target can not be detected due to sensor contamination

In case of sensor (Radar, Camera) contamination, blockage can occur and collision of the front preceding vehicle and pedestrians is possible.

•

When driving on a large curve road

When driving on a large curve road, due to the sensor limit, the front preceding vehicle and the pedestrian can collide.

•

When it is impossible to obtain the driver’s field of vision

If the driver uses the AEB in the unconfined (snow, rain, fog, etc.), the sensor limit may cause a collision between the vehicle and pedestrians ahead.

•

Detection problems due to complicated structures around roads

If a construction section, railroad track, or other metallic object is on the road (Eg: tollgate, subway construction site, tunnel, lane-proximity guard rail, etc.) AEB/FCW will not work.

•

Collision Mitigation System does not react for pot-holes

•

Collision Mitigation System does not function for Speed Breakers

•

Collision Mitigation System may not always function for barricades/cone/barrels

•

Collision Mitigation System does not function for oncoming vehicles

•

Collision Mitigation System may not always function for animals

•

Collision Mitigation System does not function for small animals:

The Collision Mitigation System does not activate for small animals. Drivers must stay alert and take necessary actions to avoid collisions.

14.5 High Beam Assist

High beam assist function is intended to reduce the glare produced by the High Beam lamp which in turn aids the drivers of oncoming vehicles to maneuver safely.

High beam assist feature automatically turns high beam ON or OFF depending on the vehicle speed, intensity of the light source of preceding and oncoming vehicles and the surrounding light conditions

High beam assist is only intended to assist the driver. The driver is still responsible for controlling the headlights through manual ON/OFF depending on visibility requirements.

14.5.1 How to Enable and Disable HBA System

HBA Activation

Select High Beam Assist function from Settings>> Vehicle Settings >> Lights & Illumination >> Headlight Assist.

Turn Steering Column Head lamp Switch to ‘AUTO’ position.

HBA will activate when following conditions are met:

•

Enable ‘Head light Assist’ in CID.

•

Auto light switch is turned ON in the Combination Switch.

•

Night condition is detected and Low beam is already turned ON through the Light Sensor.

•

High beam switch is turned ON.

•

Vehicle speed is above 20 km/h.

When HBA feature is activated, HBA lamp will be ON.

Once HBA is activated, HBA feature will turn OFF High Beam when any of the light sources from oncoming / preceding vehicle or streetlights is detected in front of vehicle.

HBA feature will turn ON High Beam when:

•

No light source is detected by the camera from Oncoming/Preceding vehicle or from other light sources (depends on intensity) for few second.

The High Beam Assist system changes Low Beam to High Beam after Switch Delay Time (1 second).

If system malfunctions, a pop up message will appear in DID as “High Beam Assist Unavailable”. It is recommended that you visit a Authorized Mahindra Service Center in this case.

14.5.2 HBA System Limitations

HBA is subject to certain system limitations and may keep High beam OFF for certain limitations and ON for few other limitation conditions.

•

When the light from the on-coming or front preceding vehicle is not detected because of lamp damage, hidden from sight, etc.

•

When headlights or taillights are with non-standard color or Illuminance level or shape.

•

When the lamp of the on-coming or front preceding vehicle is covered with dust, mud, snow or water.

•

When visibility is poor due to fog, heavy rain or snow.

•

When head lamp aiming is not properly adjusted.

•

When driving on a narrow-curved road or rough road.

•

When driving downhill or uphill.

•

When vehicle is near bright street tower lamps, reflecting sign or mirror, flashing sign lamps.

•

When the vehicle is tilted may be due to a flat tyre or being towed.

•

When the light from bicycle is weak or located in long distance.

•

When the light from oncoming or preceding vehicle is very small or weak or located in low or too high position.

•

When windshield is dirty or if any object blocks the camera sensor.

•

When vehicle is in Construction area due to temporarily installed reflectors.

•

When vehicle is near traffic lights, signboards of buildings, lightning rods of construction sections, center line separation rods (reflection type), traffic signs (including variable speed LEDs), vehicle lights reflected on building glass or road reflectors.

14.6 Lane Sway Alert

Lane sway alert is a feature intended to detect if a driver is drowsy or long durations of continuous driving. It will provide a visual, audible and haptic warning to the driver.

Steps to Activate Lane Sway Alert System:

In Centre Information Display (CID), go to App Drawer >> Driver Assistance >> Driver Attention >> Lane Sway Alert.

System operation:

If the system detects continuous driving for 120 minute, the following HMI visual alert will be displayed. The warning will be displayed for a duration of 10 second.

If the system detects a drowsy driver, the following HMI visual alert will be displayed.

How to reset driver Drowsiness or Non-stop driving alert (Recommended).

Stopping the vehicle, turning ignition OFF and taking rest for more than 1 minute.

Stopping the vehicle, driver sitting in the vehicle & keeping it in park for 15 minute.

Stopping the vehicle, exiting the car. Taking a rest and re-entering.

•

The system will also stop providing the alert if it detects that the driver is not drowsy when driving.

14.7 Traffic Sign Recognition

Traffic Sign Recognition feature assists the driver by displaying Speed limits signs and general traffic signs in the DID.

TSR system is limited to the detection capabilities of Camera sensor. The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle as per the road regulations.

Traffic sign recognition can detect standard speed limit signs that are within the camera’s visual field.

TSR function can detect only standard traffic signs. Any deviation from standard sign board could lead to wrong detection by camera sensor.

How to Turn ON/OFF TSR System

To enable/disable the TSR, in CID go to ‘App Drawer >> Driver Assistance >> Speed Limit >> Traffic Sign Recognition.

14.7.1 Traffic Sign Display in DID

Speed: limit Signs

When the system recognizes a speed limit sign, it displays on DID. After a pre-defined time, the display will be greyed out to indicate that the sign is of past value.

Speed limit sign will be displayed in bottom of Driver information display.

When the system recognizes a speed limit sign, it displays on DID.

If no new Speed Limit Sign detected for some time, the icon changes to ‘No Recognition’ as shown in the image.

After a pre-defined time, road sign display is greyed out to indicate to driver that the sign is of past value.

Supplementary traffic signs:

Once camera detects below listed signs, it will be displayed on DID. After a pre-defined time, supplementary sign will be turned off.

Pedestrian Crossing		Give Way
Speed bump ahead		Men at Work
Stop Sign		Narrow Bridge ahead
No Entry		Slippery road
One Way		Overtake Not Allowed
No Parking		Overtake Allowed
School Zone

Accurate detection of above supplementary sign is subject to camera’s ability to detect and classify the signs which could get affected by multiple internal and external factors.

If system malfunctions, a pop up message will appear in DID that “Traffic Sign Recog. Unavailable”. It is recommended that you visit a Authorized Service Center in this case.

14.7.2 Traffic Sign Recognition System Limitations

The Traffic Sign Recognition is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations:

•

The traffic sign is located on a sharp curve.

•

The traffic sign is improperly positioned (i.e being turned over, blocked by an object, or damaged).

•

Another vehicle blocks the traffic sign.

•

The LED light of the traffic sign is broken.

•

The visibility is poor due to heavy rain, snow, fog or poor light around the sign.

•

The traffic sign do not conform to the standards.

•

The traffic sign cannot be distinguished due to shadow caused by overpass or trees.

•

There is bright light around the traffic sign.

•

The vehicle speed is too low or too high.

•

There is dirt, ice or frost on the front windshield, where the camera is installed.

•

The camera lens is blocked by an object, such as sticker, paper, or fallen leaf.

•

Host vehicle driven right after preceding vehicle.

•

The bus or truck, on which the speed sticker is attached, passes by your vehicle.

•

TSR function may not detect electronic sign board.

•

TSR function may not detect conditional sign board.

•

TSR function may not detect rectangular sign boards.

14.8 Speed Limit Assist (SLA)

SLA allows the user to adjust the ACC set speed based on the speed indicated by traffic signs.

If SLA is active and there is a difference between the set speed and the speed sign, an up or down arrow will be displayed in DID.

When the up arrow is displayed, the user can press the SET + button, and when the down arrow is displayed SET – button, the user can press the SET - button to adjust the ACC set speed.

When the opposite button is pressed, ACC will only increase or decrease the SET speed by 1 km/h.

How to Turn ON/OFF SLA System:

SLA can work when Adaptive Control is ON, Speed limit assist is set to Warning or Assist mode and Traffic Sign Recognition is enabled under Driver Assistance settings. To enable SLA, go to App drawer >> Driver Assistance >> Speed Limit >> Speed Limit Assist.

SLA can work in two modes:

Warning Mode:

If the vehicle’s actual speed exceeds the detected speed limit sign, a visual warning is triggered by blinking ACC set speed display in the DID.

Assist Mode:

If the vehicle’s actual speed is above or below the set tolerance based on speed limit sign, ACC can adjust the set speed once driver confirms by pressing Set +/Set - buttons.

Driver can set a speed limit tolerance between -10 km/h and +10 km/h to adjust the vehicle’s speed relative to the speed limit sign. For example, if TSR displays 40 km/h and the tolerance is set to -10, then 30 km/h will be set as ACC Set speed. For compliance with speed limits, it is recommended to use a offset setting of 0, -5, or -10 km/h.

To adjust the tolerance settings, go to Driver Assistance >> Speed Limit >> Speed Limit Tolerance.

SLA works only if ACC has a set speed and there is no target in front. If there is target in front it will follow the target.

SLA works for speed limit signs above 30 km/h.

SLA system is limited to the detection capabilities of Camera sensor. The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle as per the road regulations and shall remain in active control of the vehicle. SLA can detect standard speed limit signs that are within the camera sensor field of view.

14.9 Lane Assist

14.9.1 Lane Centering Function (LCF)

Lane centering function is intended to help the driver to keep the vehicle in center of a traffic lane’s side marker lines by providing the required steering assist.

LCF can be turned ON by pressing the lateral control button on the right-hand side of the steering wheel switch bank.

When LCF is ON, the LCF telltale will be displayed in the DID.

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of system could result in serious injury or death.

Lane centering function is not a self-driving system. Within the limits of its capabilities, as described in this manual, it helps the driver with certain driving activities.

Lane centering function is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to correct careless, inattentive driver.

Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so you can be ready to steer at any time. The driver is always responsible for staying in a lane and for assessing traffic situations.

Lane centering function must only be used where there are clearly visible traffic lane side marker lines on both sides of the current traffic lane. In other circumstances there is an increased risk of collision with surrounding obstacles that are not detected by the system.

System Operation

1. Lane Centering can operate at the host vehicle’s speed from 0 km/h to 180 km/h.

2. Lane centering can be enabled only if driver wears seat belt and all doors are closed.

3. If speed/road/vehicle dynamic conditions are not satisfied, Lane centering function will be in STANDBY mode and Lane centering function indicator light will illuminate in white.

4. If both lane markers are detected and all the road and vehicle related activation conditions are satisfied, system performs lane centering and indicator light will illuminate in green.

When system performs lane centering, steering wheel indicator will illuminate in green.

If system was assisting and changing to Standby due to any reasons, then Lane Centering Function will stop providing assist and indicator light will blink in green for few seconds.

Green lane marking will appear in drive assist screen of the DID, when Lane centering function is in active state.

If lane centering was active and road is straight, Lane centering function may be provided for some more time even though lane markings are not available.

Lane centering will not work if turn indicators or hazard switch is activated.

Lane centering may not work on too narrow or very wide roads.

Lane centering function may not keep the vehicle centered in the lane in highly curved roads and in medium curved roads at higher speeds.

Sometimes at roads where there is a merge/split or when the vehicle approaches a lane marked road or leaves a lane marked road, Lane centering function may pull the vehicle to either of the sides. The driver is always expected to be available to take over control in such extreme situations.

Hands-off Warning for Lane Centering Function

When driver does not hold the steering wheel with adequate torque, Lane Centering Function triggers hands off warning and it is continued until the driver holds back the steering wheel.

The first-stage warning is triggered a few seconds after hands-off is detected.

The second-stage warning, accompanied by an audio alert, will be activated if the driver continues not to hold the steering wheel after the first-stage warning.

The third-stage warning, accompanied by an audio alert, is activated if the driver continues to neglect holding the steering wheel after the second-stage warning.

•

Do not wait for the system to provide Visual/audio alerts to hold the steering wheel. The driver is always responsible for having control of the vehicle.

•

In some rare situations when the system is unable to do proper judgement, system may generate visual / audio alerts even when the driver holds the steering wheel as a precautionary measure.

The driver is always responsible for steering the vehicle and maintaining a suitable speed and distance to the vehicle ahead and must intervene, if necessary, even if Lane centering function is being used.

The system will provide only a mild steering torque within the operating limits. This torque may not be sufficient during sharper curves. The system may stop providing assist if it determines the torque provided is not sufficient to pull back to the lane. The driver is always responsible for steering the vehicle and bringing the vehicle back to lane.

Lane centering function may not detect obstacles at the side of the vehicle and may try to pull back the vehicle laterally to the center of lane even though another vehicle may be occupying the lane at the side. This could lead to a possible collision. A driver should always be in control of the steering wheel and should provide additional torque to override Lane centering function in such situations.

There could be vertical structures like curbs, medians etc. at the end of lane marking and assist provided by Lane Centering Function may not be sufficient to pull back the vehicle before the vehicle leaves the lane. Users must take control of steering always and provide necessary steering to avoid lane deviations or crashes.

Lane Centering Function Automatic Cancellation

Under the following conditions LCF will get automatically cancelled,

•

The maximum speed that LCF supports is exceeded.

•

When driver shifts out of Drive gear.

•

When driver seat belt is unbuckled.

•

When doors are unlocked (in driving condition).

•

An Automatic Emergency Braking event occurs.

•

When turn indicator or hazard is activated.

•

When interface systems are not available.

•

When driver steers manually.

•

When vehicle dynamics/road conditions are not suitable for Lane centering operation.

When there is any failure in the system, LCF malfunction telltale (in Amber color) appears on DID screen. Refer Camera Maintenance and Troubleshooting section for more details.

Lane Centering function Limitations

Lane centering function is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with below system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

•

When there is poor visibility due to rain, snow, fog etc or when the camera sensor is obstructed, covered or damaged.

•

When driving on hills.

•

When the road has sharp curves or is excessively rough.

•

When bright light (such as direct sunlight/high beam from oncoming vehicles) interferes with the camera’s view.

•

When driving on winding or uneven roads.

•

When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.

•

When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.

•

When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.

•

On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; nonstandard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.

•

On roads where the discontinued lane markers are still detectable.

•

On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.

•

When the vehicle’s traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.

•

When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.

•

Lane centering function will not work properly when there is a heavy cross wind.

•

Lane centering function may not work when the lane marking color is other than white or yellow on both sides of the road.

•

When the visibility of lane is blocked by a vehicle in front, Lane centering function cannot do lane centering.

•

When lane markings are available on only one side or not available at all.

Lane centering function can activate Lane centering from deactivated state only if both lanes available on the road. Lane centering function cannot activate Lane centering from deactivated state if lanes are not available on both sides.

14.9.2 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Lane Keep Assist (LKA)

The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system provides visual, audio and haptic alerts to the driver once the system detects that the vehicle is crossing the lane boundary unintentionally which is determined based on whether the turn signal towards the direction of departure is turned ON or not.

The Lane Keep Assist (LKA) system provides corrective steering to prevent the vehicle from departing the lane if the system judges that the departure is unintentional from driver’s side.

•

The user can choose to have either Warning or Assist feature.

•

Driver can choose to mute the audible warning by following below steps.

In Center Information Display (CID), go to App Drawer >> Driver Assistance >> Response >> Warning Volume.

It is important to know that the Lane Keep Assist system shall work only if the lane markings on the road are clearly visible.

The Lane Keep Assist function is meant to provide assist to the driver and cannot take full control of the steering system.

It is driver’s responsibility to stay alert and be in active control of the vehicle throughout the drive.

Steps to Enable Lane Keep Assist System

In Center Information Display (CID), go to App Drawer >> Driver Assistance >> Lane Assist >> Lane Keep Assist.

Select Assist to enable both Lane Keep Assist as well as Lane Departure Warning.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) automatically provides steering assistance when it detects unintentional lane departure, helping to keep the vehicle within its lane and prevent unintended lane changes.

Select Warning to enable Lane Departure Warning alone.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) provides an audible alert and steering wheel vibration when it detects unintentional lane departure. The driver remains responsible for steering the vehicle back into the lane.

Select OFF to disable both Lane departure warning and Lane Keep assist.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) will turn off and no warning or assistance will be provided. Telltale will illuminate on the DID.

When Lane Keep Assist is disabled, LKAS OFF indicator will be displayed in DID.

System Operation

When the system can detect the lanes and LDW/LKA feature is active the lane marking in DID will be highlighted in green.

When system cannot detect lanes or if system is unavailable due to speed being less than 60 km/h, the marker lines will be gray or white respectively.

LDW Operation in "Warning " mode

If both side lanes are not detected or the speed or road conditions are not satisfied, LDW feature will be in STANDBY mode and LDW indicator light will illuminate in white.

If any of the lane markers are detected and vehicle speed is above 60 km/h and all the other road parameter values are satisfied, LDW feature is ready for operation and LDW indicator light will illuminate in green.

When vehicle approaches either the left or the right lane boundary, the LDW indicator on the DID will blink in green color, and lane marking color of respective side will change to orange. Haptic and audio alert will also be provided to warn the driver about lane departure.

The warning will be stopped either when vehicle changes the lane completely or if the vehicle returns back to original lane.

Lane Departure Warning will not be provided or stopped if already being provided, if in case either turn signal or hazard switch is turned ON.

Lane departure warning shall be resumed in approximately 4 seconds after turning OFF the turn signal.

Lane Departure Warning may be provided for road edges or road marks which looks like lane boundaries.

The maximum warning time is limited to 2.2 sec. To provide re-warning, vehicle should have been out of warning region at least once. i.e. Vehicle has to be in or near to center of the lane.

LKA Operation in "Assist" mode

If both side lanes are not detected or the speed /road/vehicle dynamic conditions are not satisfied, LKA feature will be in STANDBY mode and LKA indicator light will illuminate in white.

If both lane markers are detected, vehicle speed is above 60 km/h and all the road and vehicle related activation conditions are satisfied, LKA system is ready to provide assist and LKA indicator light will illuminate in green.

When the system detects an unintentional departure of the vehicle from its lane, a slight counter steering torque is provided to prevent the departure and the driver is notified by blinking the LKA indicator on the DID in green color. Also visual and audible alerts are provided if vehicle is about to cross the lane boundary.

The warning and assist will be stopped either when vehicle changes the lane completely or if the vehicle is returned back to original lane.

When LKA system provides steering assist, steering wheel indicator will illuminate in green in DID.

•

Lane Keep Assist will not be provided or stopped if already being provided, if in case either turn indicator signal or hazard switch is turned ON.

•

Lane Keep Assist shall be resumed again only once vehicle has returned back to lane and 4 second is completed after turning OFF the turn indicator signal.

•

LKA may be provided for road markings if those are looking for like lane boundaries. LKA may be provided for road edges/vertical road edges (cones/curbs/medians/guard rails) if the system detects them accurately, but not always guaranteed.

•

LKA will not be provided if the vehicle approaches the lane boundary with a higher heading angle.

•

LKA won’t be provided in the types of roads if road edge/vertical road edge is present on one side and neither road edge/vertical road edge nor lane marking is present on the other side.

•

The audible alert can be disabled through settings in the CID if the driver wishes to do so.

•

LKA and LDW shall be activated above 60 km/h and gets deactivated below 55 km/h.

•

If the vehicle dynamics conditions are not safe for the operation of LKA, then LKA may not be provided at all or may get cancelled if it is already being provided.

•

Similarly, when Left turn /Right turn/Hazard is activated LKA will not be provided or will be cancelled if already being provided.

•

The Lane Keep Assist torque will be adjusted according to the driver applied torque to reduce discomfort and to provide precedence to driver control.

•

If the driver intentionally tries to cross the lane boundary by applying more torque, then assist will be cancelled. In such conditions warning alone will be provided once the vehicle crosses the lane boundary.

•

If the driver is constantly holding the steering wheel very lightly while the LKA intervention is being provided, system may assume that the driver is not attentive enough and will provide visual alert to the driver as in image below:

•

If the driver continues to hold the steering wheel lightly for a next intervention occurring within 3 minutes, then in addition to the visual alert, audio alert will also be provided until the system makes sure that driver is in full control.

•

If lane marking is suddenly not available or if lane widens suddenly, then for a short duration virtual lanes may get created and assist/warning may be provided once the vehicle approaches/crosses the virtual lane boundary.

•

The preference for steering control and alerts will be given to Smart Pilot Assist over Lane Keep Assist if Smart Pilot Assist is equipped and enabled by driver. Please go through Smart Pilot chapter for more details.

•

Do not wait for system to provide Visual /audio alerts to hold the steering wheel. Driver is always responsible to have control of the vehicle.

•

In some rare situations when system is unable to do proper judgement, system may generate visual / audio alerts even when the driver holds the steering wheel as a precautionary measure.

•

System will provide only a mild steering torque within the operating limits. This torque may not be sufficient during sharper curves. System may stop providing assist if it determines the torque provided is not sufficient to pull back to the lane. Driver is always responsible to steer the vehicle and bring vehicle back to lane.

LKA/LDW will not be provided for parked vehicles, barricades and barrels on the side of road.

If system malfunctions in Warning mode, LDW indicator light will illuminate in Amber color. Please refer Camera Maintenance and Trouble shooting section for rectification method.

In case of system malfunctions, do not attempt repair/ replacement on your own. Please get the vehicle inspected from an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

If in system malfunctions in Assist mode, LKA indicator light will illuminate in Amber color. Please refer Camera Maintenance and Trouble shooting section for rectification method.

LKA may not detect obstacles at the side of the vehicle and may try to pull back the vehicle laterally to the center of lane even though another vehicle may be occupying the lane at the side. This could lead to a possible collision. Driver should always be in control of the steering wheel and shall provide additional torque to override LKA in such situations.

There could be vertical structures like curbs, medians etc. at the end of lane marking and assist provided by LKA system may not be sufficient to pull back the vehicle before the vehicle leaves the lane. User must take control of steering always and provide necessary steering to avoid lane deviations or crash.

Lane Keep Assist Sensitivity

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Sensitivity refers to the intensity of lane assist torque experienced by the driver in the event of lane departure.

LKA sensitivity can be adjusted via App Drawer >> Driver Assistance >> Lane Assist >> Lane Keep Assist sensitivity.

The LKA options for the levels of sensitivity include the following:

Early (Mild) Sensitivity:

Minimal assist torque is provided by the system when there is a lane departure, where driver can easily override the system with minimal effort, allowing greater control flexibility. This is ideal for drivers who prefer subtle guidance and minimal intervention.

Normal Sensitivity:

Balanced level of assist torque is provided by the system when there is a lane departure, where driver can override the system with moderate effort. This is ideal for drivers who prefer to have a balance between system provided assist and manual control.

Late (Strong) Sensitivity:

Higher level of assist torque is provided by the system when there is a lane departure, where driver override also happens with slightly higher effort.

Lane Keep Assist System Limitations

LKA and LDW System is intended to assist the driver and cannot function as intended in all kinds of driving, weather, traffic and road conditions as mentioned below.

•

Road under construction.

•

Reduced visibility due to bad weather on account of rain, fog, snow, etc.

•

Roads with indistinct/faded lane markings.

•

Road sections with sharp curves.

•

Narrow roads.

•

High speed driving especially in sharp curves.

•

Road sections where there are turn lanes or when the original lane merges or separates.

•

Passing through tunnels when brightness changes suddenly.

•

Horizontal or vertical slope.

•

Preceding vehicle obstructing lane visibility.

•

Improper headlight aiming/headlight covered with dirt.

•

Any other environmental conditions affecting camera vision.

•

Poor visibility due to sun glare or blockage in lens.

•

Whenever a trailer is connected to the vehicle, AEBS and LKA features must be disabled manually through CID settings, at every ignition cycle.

•

Lane Keep Assist functions will not work properly when there is a heavy cross wind.

•

Lane Keep Assist function may not work when the lane marking color is other than white and yellow.

In such situations, it may be advisable to turn the function OFF or driver shall take complete control of vehicle.

14.10 Front Vehicle Start Alert (FVSA)

Front Vehicle Start Alert (FVSA) is a driver assistance feature that notifies the driver when the vehicle ahead begins to move. It is especially helpful at traffic signals when the driver may not notice the vehicle ahead starting. The system alerts the driver through audible, haptic, and visual warnings.

Steps to activate Front Vehicle Start Alert:

In Center Information Display (CID), go to App Drawer >> Driver Assistance >> Driver Attention >> Front vehicle start alert.

Whenever the vehicle is restarted, the Front Vehicle Start Alert function retains the last setting mode in the driver attention menu.

FVSA enabling conditions

Front Camera Module installed in the windshield of the vehicle helps in the detection of vehicles in front of host vehicle and provides warning to the driver about their movement ahead. Front Vehicle Start Alert gets activated when the following conditions are met.

•

Vehicle is stationary and should be in Park/Drive/Neutral mode.

•

The distance between the vehicle and target vehicle shall be within 5 meters.

•

The speed of target vehicle shall be above 2 km/h.

On detecting the movement of preceding vehicle satisfying all the above conditions, a pop-up warning is given in the DID along with an audible warning and haptic steering vibration.

The Front Vehicle Start Alert function does not provide alert when the vehicle is not in Drive gear.

Do not rely completely on this function to get notifications for the front vehicle movement. Driver shall be always careful and responsible to check whether the vehicle in the front is moving.

System Limitations

Front Vehicle Start Alert Function is subjected to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations.

•

System may not operate properly when there is inclement weather, such as snow and rain that could block the visibility of the front camera.

•

FVSA does not work if there is no front vehicle present when the featured is enabled. FVSA system works only when the front preceding vehicle and host vehicle has come to complete stop, i.e if either the front vehicle or host vehicle is in continuous motion, FVSA will not work'.

14.11 Smart Pilot Assist System (If Equipped)

Smart Pilot Assist system is intended to help the driver to keep the vehicle in center of a traffic lane’s side marker lines by providing steering assist as well as maintaining a set time interval.

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of system could result in serious injury or death.

•

Smart Pilot Assist System is not a self-driving system. Within the limits of its capabilities, as described in this manual, it helps the driver with certain driving activities.

•

Smart Pilot Assist system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to correct careless, inattentive of driver.

•

Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.

•

Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so you can be ready to steer at any time. The driver is always responsible for staying in a lane and for assessing traffic situations.

•

Smart Pilot Assist must only be used where there are clearly visible traffic lane side marker lines on both sides of the current traffic lane. In other circumstances there is an increased risk of collision with surrounding obstacles that are not detected by the system.

How to activate Smart Pilot Assist

Smart Pilot Assist auto turns on if both ACC and LCF features are enabled and the perquisites are met.

System Operation

Smart Pilot Assist system is combination of Adaptive Cruise Control and Lane Centering Function.

If speed/road/vehicle dynamic conditions are not satisfied, Smart Pilot Assist will be in STANDBY mode and Smart Pilot Assist indicator light will illuminate in white.

If both lane markers are detected and all the road and vehicle related activation conditions are satisfied, system performs lane centering and indicator light will illuminate in green.

When system performs lane centering, steering wheel indicator will illuminate in green.

If system was assisting and transiting to Standby due to any reasons, then Smart Pilot Assist will stop providing assist and indicator light will blink in white for few second.

If a slower moving vehicle is detected ahead during lane centering, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front as per the set time gap.

When lane markings are not available, system will follow set speed and set time gap as set by the driver for ACC.

Always use a time interval that is suitable in current traffic conditions. A short time interval gives the driver limited reaction time if an unexpected situation occurs in traffic. System will be deactivated/off when ACC system is turned off or Smart Pilot Assist is deselected from the settings or when 3rd stage hands-off warning displays.
When ACC is disengaged by pressing brake pedal, Smart Pilot Assist also gets into standby.

If lane centering was active and road is straight, Smart Pilot Assist may be provided for some more time even though lane markings are not available.

Smart Pilot Assist may follow preceding vehicle if lanes are not detected properly and following conditions are satisfied.

•

Lane centering was active before lane detection got dropped.

•

Preceding vehicle speed is less than around 75 km/h.

•

Preceding vehicle is close enough for system to follow. Smart Pilot Assist may stop to follow preceding vehicle if above conditions are not satisfied or if the preceding vehicle has changed the path.

Hands-off Detection & Warning : When driver does not hold the steering wheel with adequate torque, Smart Pilot Assist triggers hands off warning and it is continued until the driver holds back the steering wheel.

First stage warning will be provided immediately once hands off is detected.
Second stage warning with audio alert will be provided if driver is not holding the steering wheel even after the first stage warning.
Third stage warning with audio alert will be provided when driver does not hold the steering wheel even after second stage warning. Here after Smart Pilot Assist and ACC will go to Standby.

•

Do not wait for system to provide Visual /audio alerts to hold the steering wheel. Driver is always responsible to have control of the vehicle.

•

In some rare situations when system is unable to do proper judgement, system may generate visual / audio alerts even when the driver holds the steering wheel as a precautionary measure.

The driver is always responsible for steering the vehicle and maintaining a suitable speed and distance to the vehicle ahead and must intervene if necessary, even if Smart Pilot Assist is being used.

Due to the limitations of the camera and radar sensor, the system may apply the brakes in your vehicle suddenly or not at all.

Smart Pilot Assist regulates your vehicle’s speed using the accelerator pedal and the brakes. Please be aware that there may be a faint sound from the brakes when the system is using them.

Smart Pilot Assist may not detect obstacles at the side of the vehicle and may try to pull back the vehicle laterally to the center of lane even though another vehicle may be occupying the lane at the side. This could lead to a possible collision. Driver should always be in control of the steering wheel and shall provide additional torque to override Smart Pilot Assist in such situations.

There could be vertical structures like curbs, medians etc. at the end of lane marking and assist provided by Smart Pilot Assist system may not be sufficient enough to pull back the vehicle before the vehicle leaves the lane. User has to take control of steering always and provide necessary steering to avoid lane deviations or crash.

Smart Pilot Assist Automatic Cancellation

Smart Pilot Assist cancels and goes to standby when:

•

ACC system cancels.

•

The maximum speed that Smart Pilot Assist supports is exceeded.

•

When driver shifts out of Drive gear.

•

An Automatic Emergency Braking event occurs.

•

When turn indicator or hazard is activated.

•

When interface systems are not available.

•

When driver steers manually.

•

When vehicle dynamics/road conditions are not suitable for Smart Pilot Assist Operation.

When Smart Pilot Assist cancels, the Smart Pilot Assist indicator changes to White color to indicate that system is no longer active.

When there is any failure in the system, below pop-up message appears on DID and Smart Pilot Assist indicator illuminate in Amber color. Visit nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

14.11.1 Smart Pilot Assist System Limitations

Smart Pilot Assist is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations:

Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with below system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

Note: All the limitations of ACC also apply for Smart Pilot Assist.

•

Smart Pilot Assist is unable to accurately determine lane markings due to poor visibility (heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.), or an obstructed, covered, or damaged camera or sensor.

•

When driving on hills.

•

The road has sharp curves or is excessively rough.

•

Bright light (such as direct sunlight) is interfering with the camera’s view.

•

The sensors are affected by other electrical equipment or devices that generate ultrasonic waves.

•

When driving on winding or uneven roads.

•

When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.

•

When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.

•

When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.

•

On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.

•

On roads where the discontinued lane markers are still detectable.

•

On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.

•

When the vehicle’s traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.

•

When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.

•

Smart Pilot Assist function will not work properly when there is a heavy cross wind.

•

Smart Pilot Assist function may not work when the lane marking color is other than white or yellow on both the sides of the road.

Smart Pilot Assist system can activate Lane centering from deactivated state only if lanes are available on both sides. Smart Pilot Assist cannot activate Lane centering from deactivated state if lanes are not available on both sides or if lane is available only on one side.

– When the visibility of lane is blocked by a vehicle in front, Smart Pilot Assist cannot do lane centering.

15 EMERGENCIES

15.1 Hazard Warning Flashers

The hazard warning flasher button is in the central bezel switch bank. Press the button to turn ON the hazard warning flashers, all directional turn signals will flash to warn oncoming traffic.

This is an emergency warning system and should be used only when there is an emergency. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is a safety hazard for other motorists. Hazard warning flasher will work in all positions of the ignition key and even when the vehicle is fully locked.

With extended use, the hazard warning flasher may drain your vehicle battery.

15.2 Towing

Tow hook is a screw on type, and it is available in the tool kit organizer behind the rear seats on the floor.

Front Tow Hook

Rear Tow Hook

Remove/pry out the tow hook cover in the Front/Rear bumper using a screwdriver, screw in the tow eye in the anti-clockwise direction (tow eye is LH threaded) by holding the cover and tighten. Fasten a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles to the towing hook.

The rear tow hook should be used when your vehicle is utilized for towing other vehicles.

If your vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service. If a towing service is unavailable in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a towing cable or chain.

15.2.1 Towing Equipment

Towing equipment are of two types:

Sling-type equipment - The tow truck uses metal cables with hooks on both ends. These hooks go around parts of the frame or suspension and lift the end of the vehicle off the ground. This is not a good method of towing as it may damage the vehicle's suspension and body. Avoid a tow with sling type equipment.

Flat-bed equipment - Your vehicle is loaded on the back of a truck. This is the safest and best way of towing.

Towing Option	2WD	Towing Condition	Wheels OFF the Ground	4WD Models
	ü	On Trailer	ALL	ü
	O	Flat Tow	NONE	O
	ü	Dolly Tow	Front	O
	O	Dolly Tow	REAR	O

15.3 Emergency Assistance

In case of emergencies, driver/customer can follow the below steps to connect with our Emergency assistance service either from the vehicle or through mobile app.

Emergency Assistance from Vehicle

e-Call# :

e-Call is initiated when a valid crash event is registered. Airbags may or may not be deployed based on the severity and direction of the event. For more details on airbags, refer to the safety section.

In an unfortunate event of your vehicle meeting with an accident, triggering the airbags, your vehicle will initiate the following actions -

Call will be triggered automatically from your vehicle to 108* Ambulance Service for medical assistance.

* [108] number is the default option. This number can be changed based on your preference/location. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

SOS call from vehicle

For SOS call, the driver can either operate the switch located in the overhead console near the interior rear-view mirror or through CID.

Precautions in the Event of a Fire

If your vehicle is on fire while driving on the road, then follow the below points:

•

Immediately bring the vehicle to a stop on the side of the road and turn off the ignition.

•

As soon as you can, exit the vehicle. You should also help the other passengers to exit the vehicle securely. In addition, you can unlock all the windows and doors before turning off the Ignition.

•

Move yourself away from the flaming vehicle. A vehicle could explode because it carries High Voltage Battery Pack. Keep distance from the flaming vehicle accordingly. Additionally, if at all possible, warn approaching vehicles of the hazard.

•

If the fire is small and slow, use a fire extinguisher in ABC type. If it is impossible to extinguish the fire in the early stage, Keep a safe distance from the vehicle and immediately call the fire service. Also, inform them that an electric vehicle is involved.

•

Never open the hood or boot of a burning vehicle to try and put out the fire. If you attempt to open the boot or bonnet when there is a fire in the motor compartment or underneath the vehicle, the flames may flare up and cause burns. Immediately contact the fire service department.

•

Never approach a burning vehicle to collect personal items. If you don’t keep a safe distance from a burning vehicle, an explosion could hurt you since toxic vapours from the burning vehicle are harmful.

•

You can call the Authorized Mahindra Service Center once the fire has been extinguished. To help you move the damaged vehicle, describe the situation and extent of the damage to the service centre or Adrenox.

Precautions in the Event of an Accident

•

Make sure the vehicle is in park position “P”, the parking brake is engaged, and the Ignition is off.

•

Do not attempt to restart or move the vehicle if there is visible damage, smoke, or an unusual smell.

•

Mahindra is not responsible for any damage, injuries, or liabilities resulting from failure to follow these safety precautions.

•

If you notice any coolant leaks and damage in refrigerant lines, do not drive the vehicle and contact Adrenox.

•

If your vehicle is being recovered by a Road Side Assistance (RSA), please contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further guidance.

•

If water enters inside the vehicle or fully submerged in water, do not drive the vehicle. Contact RSA / Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

If your vehicle becomes submerged underwater, avoid trying to open the doors immediately due to the water pressure.

Be mindful of potential electric shock risks. Avoid touching any exposed electrical components or wiring while exiting the vehicle. Contact emergency services for assistance as soon as possible.

Precautions while driving the vehicle in water-logged and/ or flooded area

Never attempt to start the vehicle.

•

Never drive through water when it flows above the bottom portion of the bumper or above the tyre center line.

•

The water surface should not be higher than the lower edge of the underbody.

•

High voltage battery and electrical/electronics components will get damaged internally if attempts are made to cross through deep water.

•

Wet brake discs have a lower coefficient of friction resulting in reduced braking efficiency. Tap the brake pedal while driving to remove the moisture in brake disc surface.

•

You must slow down while driving through shallow water. Speeding may cause water to splash onto the windshield, obstructing your vision. In extreme conditions, you may get a water wedge formation between the road and tyre causing loss of control in the vehicle.

15.4 Vehicle Does Not Start - Checks

Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the correct starting procedure and that you have sufficient fuel.

If the engine is not cranking or is cranking too slowly / intermittently

Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean.

If the battery terminals are firmly fastened, switch ON the interior lamps.

If the lamps do not illuminate, glow dim or go OFF when the starter is cranked, then it indicates a weak or discharged battery. Try jump starting. Follow ‘jump starting’ instructions given later in this chapter.

Check the fuses in the Engine Compartment Fuse Box and Instrument Panel Fuse Box.

If the engine cranks normally, but does not start

If the engine is cranking normally, but if the engine does not start even after repeated cranking, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the engine for more than 15 second at a time. Wait 10 to 15 second before trying again.

If the engine stalls while driving

•

Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.

•

Turn ON your hazard warning flashers and check for any malfunction lamps in the instrument cluster.

•

Turn the ignition OFF, wait for approximately 90 second and try starting the engine again.

•

If the vehicle still does not start, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

If the engine stalls while running, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be much harder than usual.

If the engine speed does not increase

•

If the engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal is depressed, there may be a problem in the Engine Management System, electrical or electronic controls.

•

In case of certain faults, the engine may go to limp home mode, which is indicated by the check engine lamp.

•

Have your vehicle checked by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center as soon as possible.

15.5 Engine Overheating

If the temperature gauge moves beyond the normal operating range toward “H” mark. it indicates the engine overheating that may damage the engine.

When the engine overheats, the Engine Management System reduces engine power substantially and may even shut the engine OFF; it is dangerous to continue driving when the engine has overheated. You need to first cool the engine down before starting to drive again.

Follow the below instructions to cool the engine down:

•

Progressively reduce the vehicle speed and bring the vehicle to a stop at the side of the road.

•

Turn ON the hazard warning flashers.

•

Keep the engine running at idle.

•

Engage the parking brake.

•

Switch off the air conditioner.

•

Wait till the engine coolant temperature drops sufficiently such that the temperature gauge is around halfway between C and H.

Now switch the engine OFF and carefully open the bonnet/hood to visibly inspect the engine cooling system parts. Be cautious while doing an inspection as vehicle parts will still be too hot. Verify that the engine coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is maintained between the ‘Min’ and ‘Max’ mark. Check for possible fluid leakages. Check for damages to heat exchangers and connecting hoses. Also verify that the radiator shrouds, cooling fan blades and the engine belt all are in good condition.

If any evidence of failure is observed, contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center for help. In case, no system leakage/ failure is suspected, driving can be continued.

Either due to severe operating conditions or due to any system leakages or failures, the engine can get overheated. However, if the engine is getting overheated repeatedly, even in normal operating conditions, get the vehicle checked by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center as soon as possible.

Refer to the ‘High Engine Coolant Temperature’ section under the ‘Driver Information Display’ chapter for details.

If the high engine coolant temperature warning is ignored, the engine shuts OFF abruptly to safeguard engine components from overheating and consequent failure. Abrupt engine shut-off can lead to uncontrollable driving condition and accidents.

Stay clear of hot and rotating vehicle parts while visually inspecting the vehicle. The coolant inside the cooling system is under high pressure and temperature. Never open the pressure cap of the degassing tank when the engine is hot. Not taking precautions may lead to serious injury to your skin/eyes.

For optimum performance of the cooling system, you must maintain the required coolant level and use only recommended engine coolant.

15.6 Jump Starting

Jump start can be performed when the battery charge is low which can be confirmed by performing the following operations:

Turn headlamp ON and check whether lights are dim.

Try to start the vehicle and check whether engine cranks slowly or not crank at all.

Open the bonnet and locate the battery.

It may be necessary to remove the disabled vehicle’s battery cables from the battery terminals and clean both cables and terminals. Use a stiff wire brush to remove all corrosion. Reconnect the cables to the battery terminals before jump starting the vehicle.

The positive terminal will be marked with a plus sign (+) and will usually have a RED cable attached on it.

The negative terminal will be marked with a minus sign (-) and will usually have a BLACK cable attached to it.

A standalone booster battery can be used to start the engine when the vehicle battery is low.

Take jumper cables and unwind the red and black cables.

Wear safety gear and connect one end of red clamp of the jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery and other end to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.

Similarly, connect one end of black clamp of the jumper cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery and other end to the negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery.

10.

Once the jump starting assembly is done, crank the engine for starting.

11.

Once the vehicle gets started, carefully remove the jumper cables in the reverse order of attachment.

12.

Disconnect the black clamp of the jumper cable from the negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery and the other end of the black clamp from the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery.

13.

Similarly, disconnect the red clamp of the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery and the other end of the red clamp from the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.

14.

Close the bonnet.

15.

Keep the vehicle’s engine running and slightly accelerate the vehicle to charge the battery.

If the problem persists on next starting cycle, please visit Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

•

Once the vehicle gets started, carefully remove the jumper cables in the reverse order of attachment.

Make sure none of the cables are dangling into the engine compartment, where they could be exposed to moving parts.

•

Remove the jumper cables once the vehicle starts. Do this in the reverse of the order in which they were attached, and don't let any of the cables or clamps touch each other (or dangle into the engine compartment).

•

Disconnect the black clamp of the jumper cable from the negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery.

•

Disconnect the other end of the black clamp from the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery.

•

Disconnect the red clamp of the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.

•

Disconnect the other end of the red clamp from the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery

Replace any positive (+) red post protective covers if applicable (You have had to remove or open these in the beginning) These covers help prevent accidental short circuiting of the battery.

•

Keep the vehicle's engine running. Run the vehicle above idle (slightly revved up with your foot on the accelerator). This should give the battery enough charge to start the vehicle again. If it does not start, either your battery might be dead or faulty alternator.

Improper jump starting procedures can result in battery explosion and acid burn hazard.

Loosely connected battery cables could damage the electronic control units.

To disconnect battery terminals, wait for at least 2 minute to allow discharge of high voltage or it could lead to personal injury.

While disconnecting, always disconnect the -VE terminal first and while connecting, always connect the -VE terminal last.

Do not connect battery terminals with opposite polarity, it will lead to alternator, Electronic control unit failures.

Towing a vehicle to start could be dangerous. The vehicle being towed could surge forward when the engine starts, causing the two vehicles to collide, injuring the occupants.

Modern vehicles with electronic management systems should not be jump started without ‘protected’ jump starter leads.

15.7 Limp Home Mode

Limp Home Mode is an emergency declared by the EMS (Engine Management System) due to failure or malfunction of one/more critical sensors/actuators. In this mode, the EMS (Engine Management System) will revert back to basic minimum requirement (fuel quantity / injection timings) to aid the driver to bring the vehicle back to the nearest workshop. The drivability and fuel consumption will be greatly affected.

If vehicle acceleration worsens or if there is a drop in vehicle performance, there might be a malfunction in the engine management system which triggers/activates the Limp Home Mode. This condition is accompanied by the check engine lamp illuminating in the instrument cluster. In this mode, the vehicle speed is limited, and the accelerator pedal may not function normally. It is recommended you contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately for assistance.

If the above telltale is ON/blinking, It indicates an emergency situation declared by the EMS (Engine Management System) due to failure of one/more critical sensors/actuators and triggers/activates the Limp Home Mode.

15.8 Fuses & Relays

A fuse is electric protection device. A fuse is placed in an electrical circuit, so that when current flow exceeds the rating of the fuse, it blows off. The element in the fuse melts, opening the circuit and preventing other components of the circuit from being damaged by the over current. The size of the metal fuse element determines the rating. Once a fuse blows off, it must be replaced with a new one.

1. Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment OFF before touching or attempting to change a fuse.

2. Fuse puller is available at the engine compartment fuse box.

Fit replacement fuse with the same rating as the one you have removed.

You can identify a blown fuse by a break in the filament. All fuses except high current fuses are push fit. A fuse puller should be used to remove the fuse from its position.

15.8.1 Engine Compartment Fuse Box

Engine compartment fuse box is located adjacent to vehicle battery. Release the lock to access the fuse box contents. Remove the fuse box cover by pressing the clips from both sides using both hands simultaneously. Spare fuses are provided in the fuse box for replacement of blown fuses. Ensure the correct rating fuse is replaced with the blown fuse.

Fuse No.	Circuit	Fuse Rating
F1	EMS Batt 1 (Diesel)	15A
F1	EMS Batt 1 (Petrol)	30A
F2	EMS Batt 2 (Diesel)	10A
F2	VVTIN/EX, VOP, Canister (Petrol)	10A
F3	HFM/FMU/FEED Pump Relay (Diesel)	10A
F3	Ignition Coils (Petrol)	15A
F4	BMS*	5A
F5	Rear Wiper *	10A
F6	EMS ECU Permanent Batt	5A
F7	Front Wiper *	15A
F8	Horn	20A
F9	Head Lamp RH	15A
F10	Head Lamp LH	15A
F11	TCU Batt (AT only)	15A
F12	EMS Loads – Relay /WIF/EGR/VOP/PCJ (Diesel)	15A
F12	EMS Loads – Lambda/(Petrol)	10A
F13	Brake Lamp (Switch)	10A
F14	Front Blower	40A
F15	Spare	_
F16	ABS Valve (ABS ESP)	25A
F16	ABS Valve (ESP EPB)	40A
F17	Spare	_
F18	ABS Pump	40A
F19	Spare	_
F20	EMS Main	40A
F21 – F24	Spare	_
F25	SCR Relay (Diesel)* Intercooler Fan (Petrol)	10A
F26 – 29	Spare	_
F30	AC compressor EVDC	10A
F31	Fuel Pump	20A
F32–F35	Spare	_
F36	Shifter Solenoid (AT Only)	5A
F37	Starter	30A
F38	Glow plug (Diesel Only)	50A
F39	Main Batt-3	60A
F40	Cooling Fan Low Speed	40A
F41	Main Batt - 2	60A
F42	Main Batt - 4	60A
F43	Main Batt - 1	60A
F44	ABS IGN	5A
F45	TCU IGN (AT Only)	5A
F46	EMS IGN	5A
F47	Water Pump*/SCR Relay (Diesel)	15A
F47	Turbo Rec Valve /IC Fan Relay (Petrol)	10A
F48	NOx (Diesel)	10A
F48	EMS Relay Loads (Petrol)	5A
F49	EPS	125A
F50	Radiator Fan (High Speed)	60A/80A**
F51	Alternator	150A
* - Based on applicability
** - Export Variant

Relay No.	Relay Type	Application Detail
R1	ISO Micro Relay (35A)	Rear Wiper*
R2	ISO Power Relay (70A)	Cooling Fan High Speed
R3	ISO Power Relay (70A)	Glow Plug (Diesel Only)
R6	Ultra Micro Relay (20A)	Intercooler Fan (Petrol Only)
R8	Ultra Micro Relay (20A)	Shifter Solenoid (AT Only)
R11	Ultra Micro Relay (20A)	Fuel Pump
R13	Ultra Micro Relay (20A)	Horn Relay
R14	Mini Relay (40A)	EMS Main
R15	Mini Relay (40A)	Cooling Fan Low Speed
R16	Mini Relay (40A)	Front Blower
R19	ISO Micro Relay(20A/10A)	Front Wiper Low *
R20	ISO Micro Relay(20A/10A)	Front Wiper High *
R22	ISO Micro Relay (35A)	Starter
R23	Ultra Micro Relay (20A)	AC Compressor
R25	Ultra Micro Relay (20A)	SCR (Diesel only)
R4, R5, R7, R9, R10, R12, R17, R18, R21, R24, R26 & R27		Spares
* - Based on applicability

15.8.2 Instrument Panel Fuse Box Opening Procedure

Wide open the driver door and slide the driver seat backwards. This fuse box as located below the Instrument Panel on the driver side.

Follow the below procedure to access the IP fuse box:

•

Partially detach the front RHS side door static panel seal.

•

Pull and remove the IP RH side cover.

•

Using a star screw driver, loosen and remove the IP driver lower trim bottom mounting star screws.

•

Partially detach the IP driver lower trim assembly.

•

Remove all the electrical connectors from IP driver lower trim and outward the panel to access the Instrument Panel fuse box.

Fuse No.	Circuit	Fuse Rating
F1	USB/USB SEAT	5A/20A
F2	Rear Power Window/Mid Zone	30A
F3	Power Window LH	30A
F4	Ambient Light *	15A
F5	Accessory Power	25A
F6	Power Window RH	30A
F7	ORVM ,Power LIN Switch, WLC	5A/10A
F8	Spare	5A
F9	ADAS Bs +*	7.5A
F10	ITM Batt*	15A
F11	Roof Lamp	5A
F12	Spare	10A
F13	Spare	10A
F14	Infotainment Batt/HPC-C	15A/20A
F15	MBFM Batt 5/Mid Zone Batt 1*	15A/20A
F16	MBFM Batt 1/Front Zone Batt 1	25A
F17	MBFM Batt 2/Front Zone Batt 4	30A/25A
F18	T-BOX/CFS/SWS*	5A
F19	Immo Batt*	10A
F20	ICC Batt*	5A
F21	IGN - HVAC, Amplifier, Infotainment, T-Box	5A
F22	IGN - MBFM/Mid Zone, Gateway / HPC-V, Cluster, Infotainment / HPC-C	5A
F23	MBFM Batt 4 / Front Zone Batt 3	20A
F24	MBFM Batt 3 / Front Zone Batt 2	30A
F25	Gateway Batt / HPC-V	5A
F26	Batt - Cluster, Display	7.5A
F27	Ignition Switch Batt*	10A
F28	Batt — Power Seat Switch, OBD, HVAC, PW LIN SW	5A
F29	RLS Batt *	5A
F30	Rear Blower Batt	10A
F31	Batt - Key Lock Solenoid AT, ITS	5A
F32	Spare	20A
F33	Airbag Batt	10A
F34	ESCL Batt *	7.5A
F35	Eng Comp IGN	10A
F36	IGN - Airbag	5A
F37	IGN - RVC / ADAS, WLC	5A/7.5A
F38	Rear Seat Vent	10A
F39	IGN - EPS	5A
F40	IGN - CB Switch, Reverse Lamp MT, DS Switch	7.5A
F41	IGN - PKE/IMMO	5A
F42	IGN - ITM, EPB Switch, Seat Vent	5A
F43	IGN - Reverse Lamp AT	10A
F44	ACC - Amp, HVAC, Infotainment, T-Box	5A
F45	SPARE	25A
F46	Spare	10A
F47	ACC - Rear Power Socket	15A
F48	Spare	10A
F49	ACC - PKE, ICC	5A
F50	Start	5A
F51	Spare	25A
F52	Spare	30A
F53	Mid Zone Batt 4*	15A
F54	Amplifier Batt*	30A
* - Based on applicability

15.9 Changing a Flat Tyre

In case of a flat tyre during driving, reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place well away from traffic. Park on a level spot with firm ground. Stop the engine and turn ON your hazard warning flashers.

Firmly apply the parking brake. Have everyone come out of the vehicle on the side away from traffic.

Never stop your vehicle in a traffic lane to change a tyre. You could be hit by an oncoming vehicle. Keep driving until you reach a safe location.

Lifting a vehicle to change a tyre or perform maintenance is very dangerous if you do not have the requisite tools, safety equipment and training. The jack provided along with the vehicle is to be used only for changing a spare tyre. It is never to be used to perform any other maintenance or repair on the vehicle.

Never place any part of your body under any portion of the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack. You could be crushed by the vehicle if it falls off a jack. Keep bystanders away from the vehicle.

Find level, solid ground that is clear of oncoming traffic. If you cannot find a safe place to stop, it is better to drive on a flat tyre and damage the rim than it is to risk being hit by oncoming traffic. After changing a flat Tyre, never store the tyre or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle. This loose equipment could strike an occupant in the event of a sudden stop or collision. Store all of these items in the proper place.

The following sections outline the procedure for changing a flat tyre;

15.9.1 Warning Triangle

The warning triangle is a necessary device for your safety.

It is placed in the tool kit organizer behind the rear seats on the floor.

When you pull over your vehicle to a safe place, set up a warning triangle behind your vehicle. (Daytime: 100 meter behind, Night: 200 meter behind).

When the Vehicle has a Serious Problem during Driving

Turn on the hazard flasher and move the vehicle out of traffic to a safe place. Set up the warning triangle behind your vehicle (Daytime: 100 Meters, Night: 200 Meters) to warn other vehicles.

Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay away from the traffic. When your safety is secured, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for your emergency service.

15.9.2 Tool Kit

The tool kit is placed in the tool kit organizer behind the rear seats on the floor. It consist of jack, Screwdriver (+and-), Jack operating lever, Tow bar, DEO Spanner (10 mm x 12 mm) and Wheel spanner.

A	Jack Assembly
B	Wheel Spanner
C	DEO Spanner 10 mm x 12 mm
D	Diesel Filter water drain Tool*
E	Screwdriver
F	Jack Operating Lever
G	Tow Bar
* – Diesel Variant Only

Jack is located on the tool kit organizer behind the rear seats on the floor. To remove the jack out, follow the process below:

Lift the Luggage floor Lid as shown in the illustration.

Take the jack out from the tool kit organizer.

15.9.3 Spare Wheel Removal

1. Spare wheel is located below the floor at the rear end of the vehicle. It is held in place by a securing nut underneath the rear luggage compartment floor carpet.

2. Locate the plug covering the securing nut below the rear luggage compartment floor carpet and remove the plug.

3. Loosen the securing nut anti-clockwise to winch down/lower the secured spare wheel to the ground.

•

Tilt and Remove the securing bracket out of the spare wheel hub.

•

Remove/pull away the spare wheel.

The spare wheel provided on your vehicle is for temporary purpose only. Do not use the spare wheel for continuous running.

When using the temporary spare wheel

•

Temporary spare wheel provided is specifically designed for your vehicle.

•

Do not use more than one temporary spare wheel simultaneously.

•

Drive the shortest possible distance with temporary spare wheel.

•

While using temporary spare wheel reduce speed, avoid sharp cornering, avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.

•

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h when a temporary spare wheel is installed on the vehicle.

The temporary Spare Wheel is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

Refer to “Temporary Spare Wheel” section in the ‘Starting and Driving’ chapter for more details.

The spare wheel provided on your vehicle is smaller in size (T155/90 R18 113M) and for temporary purpose only. Do not use the spare wheel for continuous running.

15.9.4 Wheel Bolt Loosening

Before loosening the wheel bolt, Wheel cover/cap must be removed. To remove the wheel cover, wrap the tip of a screwdriver with cloth, insert it near the lugs of the wheel cover and pry the cover away from the wheel.

Do not try to pry off the wheel cover by hand alone. Take due care in handling the wheel cover to avoid unexpected personal injury.

Always loosen the wheel bolts before raising the vehicle. Turn the wheel bolts anti-clockwise to loosen as per the sequence.

To get maximum leverage, fit the spanner to the bolt so that the handle is on the left side. Grab the spanner near the end of the handle and push down on the handle. Be careful that the spanner does not slip off the bolt. Do not remove the bolts but loosen them by one or two turns.

Do not apply force with your legs (or stand) on the wheel spanner while tightening or loosening the wheel bolts.

A: Flat Tyre

B: Chocks Blocks

Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tyre to keep the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up. When blocking the wheel, place a wheel block in front of one of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels.

15.9.5 Jacking

1. Locate the jack points in the front or rear as needed. They can be identified by a slot used to fit the jack precisely.

2. Position the jack at the correct jacking point. Ensure sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid place.

3. To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle into the jack. Fit the other end of the lever into the square slot of the wheel spanner and turn it clockwise to expand the jack.

Ensure no one is in the vehicle. Raise it high enough so that the spare tyre can be installed. Remember, you will need more ground clearance when putting on the spare tyre than when removing the flat tyre.

Make sure to set the jack properly in the jacking point. Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the underbody of vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause personal injury.

•

Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during wheel changing.

•

When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the jack.

•

Do not raise the jack with someone in the vehicle.

•

Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and change the wheel.

•

Follow jacking instructions.

•

Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.

Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone.

Remove the wheel bolts. Lift the flat tyre straight off and place it aside. Roll the spare wheel into position and align the holes in the wheel with the hub. Lift up the wheel and get at least the top bolt inserted through its hole. Wiggle the wheel and press it back for fitting balance bolts.

Before putting on the wheels, remove any corrosion on the mounting surfaces with a wire brush or such. Installation of wheels without good metal to metal contact at the mounting surface can cause wheel bolts to loosen and eventually cause a wheel to come off while driving.

Reinstall the wheel bolts with the tapered end inward and tighten by hand. Press the wheel inward and tighten the wheel bolts further.

Never use oil or grease on the bolts. Doing so the spanner slips, damaging the bolts and may cause personal injuries. Also, bolts may loosen, and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt, clean before installing wheel bolts.

Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the wheel bolts using the wheel spanner. Turn the jack-operating lever anti-clockwise using the wheel spanner to lower the vehicle, making sure the handle remains firmly fitted onto the jack handle extension. Do not use other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot. Make sure the spanner is securely engaged over the bolt.

Tighten each bolt a little at a time in the diagonally opposite order as shown. Repeat the process until all the bolts are tight.

Improperly or loosely tightened wheel bolts are dangerous. The wheel could wobble or come off. This could result in loss of vehicle control and cause a serious accident. Always make sure all the wheel bolts are properly/securely tightened to the specified torque.

When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of your body and all other persons are clear off the vehicle as it is lowered to the ground. Have the wheel bolts tightened with the torque spanner to 83-104 Nm, as soon as possible after changing wheels.

Restore the tools (jack, wheel spanner, punctured tyre, etc.) in their storage locations.

Drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the correct pressure. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting tyre pressure, dirt and moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage or valve damage.

Remove the centre cap from the alloy wheel before fixing it to the spare wheel location. From the inner side of the wheel, gently tap the cap with the wheel spanner.

16 MAINTENANCE

16.1 Dimensions

16.2 Technical Specifications

Technical Specifications
ENGINE	Diesel (MT/AT/AWD)	Petrol (MT/AT)
Displacement/Cubic Capacity	2184 cm³	1997 cm³
Type	4 Stroke, Turbocharged, DI engine	4 Stroke, Gasoline Direct Injection
Compression Ratio	16 ± 0.5: 1	9.5 ± 0.5: 1
Max. Engine Output	114 kW @ 3750 r/min or 136 kW @ 3500 r/min	149.2 kW @ 5000 ± 50 r/min
Max. Torque	420 Nm / 450	380 Nm
TRANSMISSION
Type	6 Speed Manual/ 6 Speed Automatic
No. of Gears	6 Forward, 1 Reverse
STEERING
Type/Description	Column mounted Electric Power Steering
SUSPENSION
Type/Description	Front: Independent Suspension McPherson Strut Rear: Independent Rear Suspension
BRAKES
Service Brake	Hydraulic & Vacuum assisted Booster with ABS & with ESP
Front/Rear	Disc
Parking Brake	Mechanical Hand Operated (Conventional Type) (or) Electric Parking brake
WHEELS & TYRES
Rim	Regular (Alloy & Steel) –7J X 17”, 7J X 18”, 7J X 19” Spare wheel –4.5J x 18
Tyres	Regular – P235/65 R17, P235/60 R18, 235/55 R19 Spare Wheel –T155 /90 R18
Type	Radial Tubeless
Laden Tyre Pressure (Psi)	Front / Rear - 32 Psi (Up to 5 Persons), Front / Rear - 35 (6 Persons to Fully Laden) Spare Wheel Tyre – 60
FUEL
Fuel Tank Capacity	60 Liter
DEF Tank Capacity	20 Liter (only for Diesel)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
System Voltage	12V
Battery Rating	72 Ah / 90 Ah

16.3 Bulb Specification

Lamp Bulb	Wattage	Bulb Type	No. of Bulbs per Vehicle
Head Lamp - High Beam	12V 55W	H7 55W/LED	2
Head Lamp - Low Beam	12V 55W	H7 55W/LED	2
DRL / Position Lamp		LED	—
Turn Signal Lamp (Front)	12V 24W	PY24W	2
Turn Signal Lamp (Front)		LED
Turn Signal Lamp (Front)		Sequential LED Light blade
Turn Signal Lamp (Rear)		LEDs
Side Turn Indicator Lamp		LEDs
Front Position Lamp	12V 5W	W5W	2
Front Fog Lamp		LEDs
Front Cornering Lamp		LEDs
Rear Position Lamp - Tail Gate		LEDs
Rear Position Lamp - Quarter Slide		LEDs
Stop Lamp - Body Side	12V 21W	P21W	2
Reverse Lamp	12V 16W	W16W	2
Registration Plate Lamp		LEDs
High Mounted Stop Lamp		LEDs

16.4 General Owner’s Information

Your vehicle has been designed for fewer maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time and money. However, each regular maintenance, as well as day-to-day care is more important to ensure a smooth, trouble-free, safe and economical operation. It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified maintenance, including general maintenance service is performed. Note that both the new vehicle limited warranty and emission control system limited warranties specify that proper maintenance and care must be performed. See Warranty and Service Information Guide for complete warranty information.

Where to go for service?

Mahindra technicians are well trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips and in Authorized Mahindra Service Center training programmes. They learn to work on Mahindra vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Authorized Mahindra Service Center department does the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle reliably and economically.

Get the most from your vehicle with routine maintenance: Routine maintenance is the best way to help ensure you get the performance, dependability, long life and better resale value you expect from your vehicle. This is exactly why we’ve put together this Maintenance Section. It outlines the services required to properly maintain your vehicle and when they should be performed. The focus is on maintaining your vehicle while it’s running great, which goes a long way toward preventing major repairs and expenses later.

Here are a few suggestions to help you get started on routine maintenance:

•

Familiarize yourself with your vehicle by going through your Owner’s Manual.

•

Take a few minute to review this Maintenance Section.

•

Make it a habit to use this manual to record scheduled maintenance in the warranty and Service Information Guide.

•

Consult with your Authorized Mahindra Service Center for all your vehicle’s needs.

Suggestions for Obtaining Service for your Vehicle

Prepare for the Appointment: If you have warranty work to be done, be sure to have the right papers with you. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history.

Prepare a List: Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the Service adviser/Relationship manager know about it.

Be Reasonable with Requests: If your list has several items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the Service adviser/Relationship manager and list the items in order of priority.

Need Assistance?: It is recommended talking to an Authorized Mahindra Service Center service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process. If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

If an Authorized Mahindra Service Center is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact any Mahindra Customer Care Executive. They would need the following information:

Owner’s name and address, owner’s telephone number (home and office), Authorized Mahindra Service Center name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), vehicle delivery date and mileage.

Warranty Information: Read the Warranty Information given in the ‘Warranty and Service Information Guide’ for the terms and provisions of Mahindra warranties applicable to this vehicle. Mahindra genuine parts, fluids, lubricants and accessories are available at any Authorized Mahindra Service Center. They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best.

Protect your Warranty: Routine maintenance is not only the best way to help keep your vehicle performing as intended, it’s also the best way to protect your warranty. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance specified in the warranty and Service Information Guide will invalidate warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance. We can’t stress enough how important it is to keep records of all maintenance. Damage or failures due to neglect or lack of proper maintenance are not covered under warranty.

Keeping maintenance records is easy with the ‘Warranty and Service Information Guide’.

It’s important to document the maintenance of your vehicle. For your convenience to maintain records of service, the scheduled maintenance coupons are provided in the service coupon booklet. Every time you bring your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance, be sure to present this booklet and certify the work. Also record the date of service and mileage at the time of service. This will make record keeping easy and, should your vehicle ever require warranty coverage, you will have all the documentation to show you’ve properly maintained it.

Oils, Fluids and Flushing: In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic by itself, and does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating and/or foreign material contamination should be inspected immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory trained technicians at your Authorized Mahindra Service Center. Your vehicle’s oils and fluids should be changed at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair.

Chemicals and Additives: Non-Mahindra approved chemicals or additives are not required for factory recommended maintenance. In fact, Mahindra recommends against the use of such additive products unless specifically recommended by Mahindra for a particular application.

Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features. That’s why it’s important to rely on your Authorized Mahindra Service Center to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.

When planning your maintenance services, consider your Authorized Mahindra Service Center for all your vehicle’s needs.

Get the most from your Service and Maintenance visits: Getting your vehicle serviced at a Authorized Mahindra Service Center adds great value to your vehicle in number of ways. Hence, it is recommended to service your vehicle at a Authorized Mahindra Service Center only.

Maintenance Interval: Mahindra establishes recommended maintenance intervals based upon engineering testing to determine the most appropriate mileage to perform the various maintenance services. This protects your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you. Mahindra recommends that you do not deviate from the maintenance schedules presented in this Maintenance Schedule.

Vehicle Self Maintenance - General Precautions

•

Refer to relevant sections of the manual before starting.

•

Set the parking brake.

•

Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.

•

Turn OFF the engine and remove the key.

•

Stay clear of hot vehicle parts.

•

Avoid repeated contact with fluids.

•

Do not let fuel, coolant and other fluids spill over electrical and hot vehicle parts.

•

Keep all open flames and other burning material like cigarettes away from the battery and all fuel-related parts.

Do not start/run the engine when any engine/peripheral parts are removed.

16.5 Engine Compartment

Petrol Layout

A	Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir	D	Engine Oil Filling Cap	G	Engine Compartment Fuse Box
B	Degassing Tank	E	Engine Oil Dipstick		* — if equipped
C	Brake / clutch * Fluid Reservoir	F	Battery

Diesel Layout

A	Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir	D	Engine Oil Filling Cap	G	Engine Compartment Fuse Box
B	Degassing Tank	E	Engine Oil Dipstick		* — if equipped
C	Brake / clutch * Fluid Reservoir	F	Battery

16.6 General Maintenance

Exercise extreme caution when the hood is open and engine is ON.

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed frequently. In addition to checking the items listed below, if you notice any unusual noise, fluid leakages, smell or vibration, you should investigate the cause or take your vehicle to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center or a qualified service shop immediately.

Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you intend to run the engine.

In the Engine Compartment

•

Front windshield washer fluid level

•

Engine coolant level

•

Battery condition

•

Brake/Clutch fluid level

•

Engine oil level

•

Fluid leaks

•

Hoses, joints and pipes for any abnormalities

Inside the Vehicle

•

Lights

•

Warning lamps

•

Windshield wiper and wash

•

Steering wheel

•

Seats/Seat belts

•

Accelerator pedal/Brake pedal

•

Brakes

•

Parking brake

•

Gear lever shift mechanism

Outside the Vehicle

•

Lamps

•

Fluid leaks

•

Doors and engine bonnet latches

•

Tyre inflation pressure

•

Tyre surface/thread and wheel Bolts

16.7 In the Engine Compartment

Fluid Leaks: Check the engine compartment and the underbody of the vehicle for any leaks. If you smell fuel vapor or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected immediately.

Engine Oil: Engine oil has the primary functions of lubricating and cooling the inside of the engine. It plays a major role in maintaining the engine in proper working order. Therefore, it is essential to check the engine oil regularly.

Engine Oil Consumption: It is normal for engines to consume some engine oil during operation. Causes of consumption in a normal engine are as follows:

•

Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders. Thin films of oil, left over when pistons move in cylinders, are sucked into the combustion chamber due to high negative pressure generated when the vehicle is decelerating. This oil gets burnt in the combustion chamber.

•

Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of intake valves. Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber together with the intake air and is burnt there.

•

Engine oil consumption depends upon the viscosity and quality of the oil, and upon the conditions in which the vehicle is driven. Oil consumption will be more due to high speed driving and frequent acceleration and deceleration. A new engine may consume more oil since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls are not conditioned.

16.7.1 Checking/Topping the Engine Oil

•

Make sure the vehicle is on ground level.

•

Turn the engine OFF and wait a few minute for the oil to settle down into the oil sump.

•

Apply the parking brake.

•

Open the bonnet, use stay rod to support the bonnet. Protect yourself from engine heat.

•

Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick.

•

Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.

•

If the oil level is between “Min” and “Max” marks, the oil level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL

•

To access the engine oil filling remove the engine top cover.

•

If the oil level is below or near the “Min” mark, add enough oil through the oil filler cap to raise the level within the “Min” and “Max” marks. Wait for few minute after every top-up for the oil to settle down before checking the level.

•

Oil levels above the “Max” mark may cause engine damage/poor performance. Put the dipstick and the oil filler cap back and ensure it is fully/properly seated

Kindly refer the Warranty and Service Information Guide for Engine oil capacity and grade.

Draining/Changing of engine oil should always be done by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

To avoid possible oil loss and injury due to hot blow-by gas, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.

16.7.2 Checking/Topping Engine Coolant Level

•

Park the vehicle on flat-horizontal surface. Keep the parking brake fully engaged. Shut-off the engine.

•

Wait till the engine cools down and hence coolant temperature comes down to normal room temperature.

•

The coolant level should be between “MIN” and “MAX” marking provided on the degassing tank.

•

In case the coolant level is below the “MIN” marking, the coolant should be topped-up.

•

The coolant should be filled till the level rises above the ‘MIN’ but remain below the “MAX” marking on the degassing tank.

•

However, if the degassing tank is found to be near empty, it is recommended that the system be checked at Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Kindly refer the Warranty and Service Information Guide for Engine Coolant capacity and grade.

Top-up only with recommended Ready To Use (RTU) coolants for ensuring performance, anti-freezing and corrosion protection. Do not add water directly. Mixing with other brand of coolants is not recommended and should be avoided.

Draining or changing of engine coolant should always be done by Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

Never open the pressure cap when the engine is hot. Hot coolant may splash resulting in serious personal injury or severe burns by the erupting liquid.

16.7.3 Checking/Topping Brake/Clutch Fluid

The brake and clutch systems are supplied fluid from the same reservoir (Applicable for manual transmission vehicle).

The brake fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when the brake components are replaced. Fluid levels between the “MIN” and “MAX” lines are within the normal operating range; there is no need to add fluid.

If the fluid levels are below the “MIN” mark, the performance of the systems could be compromised; the brake/clutch operation could be spongy and gear change harder. Top-up the recommended brake/clutch fluid till the “MAX” mark or contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

Carefully clean the cap on the reservoir before you remove it and be sure no debris fall in the reservoir. Do not keep the reservoir open for longer than necessary to add brake fluid.

Use only brake/clutch fluid that meets Mahindra specifications.

Kindly refer the Warranty and Service Information Guide for Brake/Clutch Fluid capacity and grade.

Draining or changing of brake fluid should always be done by Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

16.7.4 Windshield Washer Fluid Top-up

Top-up the windshield washer reservoirs as and when required.

The windshield washer is located behind the RH Head lamp in the engine bay.

In very cold weather conditions, fill the reservoir with washer fluid premixed with anti-freeze.

If you operate your vehicle in very low temperatures, use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection. Failure to use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.

16.7.5 Fuel Filter Water Drain (Diesel)

The fuel filter needs to be drained when there is water entry in the fuel filter and respective tell tale ON in DID. Follow the below procedure to drain the water;

Park the vehicle on a ground level.

Apply Parking brake and block the wheels.

Switch off the ignition.

Turn the drain plug (Tool is available in the tool kit) anti-clockwise 3–4 rounds, but DO NOT remove the plug.

Wait till the water drains (few second).

Turn the drain plug clockwise to close and tighten the plug firmly.

16.8 Maintenance - Inside the Vehicle

Lights: Make sure the Head lights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights and other lights are all working. Check headlight aim.

Warning Messages and Lamps: Check all warning lamps appearing in the DID. Refer to the relevant sections in this manual for further details.

Seats: Check that all seat controls such as seat adjusters, seat back recliner, etc. operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in any position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position.

Seat Belts: Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.

Accelerator Pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation, uneven pedal effort or stickiness. Check the foot well and remove obstructions, if any.

Brake/Clutch Pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and proper clearance. Check the foot well and remove obstructions, if any.

16.9 Maintenance - Outside the Vehicle

The following checks should be carried out from time to time, unless otherwise specified.

Lamps: Check and ensure proper functioning of all exterior lamps.

Fluid Leaks: Check the engine compartment and the underbody of the vehicle for any leaks. If you smell fuel vapor or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected immediately.

Doors and Engine Hood: Check all doors and latches including the tailgate for proper functioning. Make sure the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.

Tyre Inflation Pressure: Check the Tyre pressure with a pressure gauge every week.

16.10 Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a Authorized Mahindra Service Center genuine battery. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals.

If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. To prevent corrosion, apply petroleum jelly to the battery terminals. Tighten loose terminals and hold down clamp nuts only enough to keep the battery firmly in place. Tightening excessively may damage the battery terminals.

For Best Battery Service

•

Keep the battery securely mounted.

•

Keep the battery top clean and dry.

•

Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.

•

Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda.

Do not disconnect battery terminals while the engine is running. This will adversely affect all electronic controllers.

While removing the battery, always disconnect the negative terminal first. And while installing the battery, ensure the negative terminal is connected last.

It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time. This will minimise the discharge of your battery during storage.

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery acid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in the eyes or on the skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water.

A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep any flame or spark away from the vent holes.

Keep batteries out of reach of children. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead components. Wash hands after handling batteries.

If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed, the clock (if equipped) and the preset radio (if equipped) stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected.

The replacement battery must meet the specification of the originally fitted battery.

The company shall not be liable/responsible for any damages/ injuries, including consequential damages/ injuries, resulting due to fitment of non OEM approved batteries

Checking the Electrolyte Level

Check the electrolyte level and specific gravity at intervals of three months. Check all the six cells for proper electrolyte levels. If the level is below the lower marker, add distilled water until the level reaches the upper marker.

Adding distilled water:

•

Remove the vent plugs.

•

Add distilled water to all the cells that require the fluid and secure the plugs properly.

16.11 Wiper Blades

Lift the wiper arm from its position. Expose the blade lip for inspection. Clean the wiper blade lips with water applied with a soft sponge. If the wiper blade is not wiping the glass satisfactorily or is worn-out, cut, cracked or bulging, get it replaced at a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

16.11.1 Changing the Wiper Blade

Lift the arm and position the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm.

Press the retaining clip in the opposite direction, disengage the wiper blade and pull it off the arm.

Hold the end of the rubber and pull until the tabs are free of the metal support.

Carefully insert the new blade rubber. Then install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

To prevent damage to the windshield, don’t let the wiper arm slap down on to it.

16.12 Appearance Care and Protection

16.12.1 Washing the Exterior

•

Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH soap.

•

Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces.

•

Never wash a vehicle that is ‘hot to the touch’ or during exposure to strong, direct sunlight.

•

Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results.

•

Dry the vehicle with a chamois cloth or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting.

•

It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle.

•

Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings and insect deposits; they can cause damage to the vehicle’s paint work and trim over time.

16.12.2 Engine Compartment

Do not wash the engine or engine compartment or underbody with pressurized water.

16.12.3 Exterior Chrome

•

Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo.

•

Use the custom bright metal cleaners, available at Authorized Mahindra Service Center. Apply the product as you would wax to clean chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few minute, and then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.

•

Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can leave scratches on the chrome surface.

•

After polishing the chrome parts, you can also apply a coating of Premium Liquid Wax, available at Authorized Mahindra Service Center, or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental effects.

16.12.4 General

•

Do not wipe the painted surface with a dry cloth/ dirty cloth.

•

Ensure all cameras, radars, and sensors are free from obstruction before, during, and after vehicle washing.

16.12.5 Waxing your vehicle

•

Wax the high gloss painted surface of your vehicle once or twice a year.

•

We recommend that you only use an approved quality wax that does not contain abrasives.

•

For additional information and assistance, we recommend that you contact a Mahindra authorized dealer.

•

When washing and waxing, park your vehicle in a shaded area out of direct sunlight.

•

Avoid waxing unpainted or low-gloss black coloured parts, they discolour over time.

16.12.6 Polishing

•

Polishing should be performed only when the vehicle’s paint appears dull and adequate gloss cannot be restored using waxing materials.

•

If the polishing agent used does not contain preservative components, ensure the vehicle is waxed afterward to protect the paint surface.

•

Do not apply polishing agents or hard wax on unpainted parts or plastic components.

16.12.7 Do’s and Dont’s

•

Vehicle should be washed using a car shampoo that has a mild neutral (Zero) pH with a clean sponge or microfiber cloth to avoid scratching the vehicle’s surface.

•

Do not use detergent or hard shampoos when washing the vehicle, as they can damage the paint finish. Instead, only use a mild, neutral pH car shampoo

•

External contaminants such as bird droppings, adhesives, insects, and tree sap should be removed promptly and gently from the painted surface before pre-washing. Avoid applying excessive pressure to prevent damage to the paint.

•

Dry dust should not be wiped off, it may lead to permanent scratch marks, which are especially noticeable on matte colours compared to glossy colours.

•

If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash the vehicle with only water to remove excess dirt before proceeding with a full wash.

•

Avoid using automatic car washers with high-pressure brushes, as they can damage the vehicle's surface. It's advisable to use automatic car washers without high-pressure brushes for a gentler cleaning process.

•

Do not apply paint protectors such as wax polish, ceramic coating, or any other surface treatments on matte painted surfaces, as they can cause permanent damage to the paint film.

•

Avoid using paper towels, dirty, or rough cloths to clean or wipe the car, as they can cause scratches. It’s recommended to use only microfiber cloths or sponges for a safe and effective clean.

•

It's recommended not to apply anything to the painted surface, such as stickers, foils, magnetic labels, or masking tapes, as they can cause adhesive transfer, potentially leaving permanent stains.

•

It is advisable to protect vehicle from Greasy, Oily products which may leave stains on paint film, difficult to remove.

•

Recommended to visit an Authorized Mahindra workshops for any paint related repairs.

16.12.8 Paint Chips

•

Authorized Mahindra Service Center have the exact touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.

•

Take your vehicle to an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for paint touch-up or paint repairs.

•

Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.

•

Always read the instructions before using the products.

16.12.9 Alloy Wheels and Wheel Covers (If Equipped)

Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat of paint finish. In order to maintain their shine:

•

Clean weekly with wheel and Tyre cleaner, which is available at Authorized Mahindra Service Center. Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water.

•

Never apply any cleaning chemicals to hot or warm wheel rims or covers.

•

Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergents.

16.12.10 Plastic (Non-painted) Exterior Parts

Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are available at Authorized Mahindra Service Center. You can use these cleaners:

1. For routine cleaning of plastic parts

2. For tar or grease spots

3. For plastic head lamp lenses

16.12.11 Windows and Wiper Blades

The front/rear windshield, side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield.

To clean these items, follow these tips:

•

The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, available at Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

•

The wiper blades can be cleaned with alcohol or Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate, available at your Authorized Mahindra Service Center. This washer fluid contains a special solution in addition to alcohol which helps remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly.

•

Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.

•

Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any glass parts.

If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water.

Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to remove decals, as it may cause damage to the glass or rear windshield heater grid lines (if equipped).

16.12.12 Interior Maintenance

For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats:

•

Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.

•

Remove light stains and soil with carpet and upholstery cleaner.

•

If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with a stain remover.

•

Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame- retardant abilities of the seat materials.

•

Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.

16.12.13 Display Maintenance & Cleaning

CID/DID Display Maintenance:

CID/DID display is a precise electrical product and the surface is covered with soft optical film/coating. Therefore user should take necessary precaution and care for cleaning the display visible surface.

Cleaning the display area:

•

It is recommended to use soft and micro-fiber lint free cloth to clean the display visible surface.

•

Wipe gently. Do not rub, as the optical film is sensitive to scratch formation.

•

Be careful for scratch by hard matter like finger nail or steel wool.

•

Do not try to peel off the optical film or coating on the screen, since it is attached strongly.

•

Do not add another commercial optical film on to the display visible area.

•

Do not touch the screen with oily/dirty/wet moisturized fingers as the optical film is very sensitive to stains. Incase of such an event please clean with soft cloth immediately.

•

The display visible surface must not come in contact with sharp objects or regular day to day ornaments like finger rings, watches, bracelets, bangles, car keys etc.

•

When you find a scratch on the screen, do not wipe it strongly. Otherwise it will worsen.

•

Antiseptic solution must not be used for cleaning, since it is not pure alcohol. This may cause stains and/ or discoloration.

Display care: Your XUV7XO has an exquisite display integrated with high-end technology. To keep the display looking new and pristine, wipe the display with a clean soft cloth.

CONTINUED USAGE OF DISPLAY WITH DUST OR DIRT CAN CREATE MICRO-SCRATCHES DO NOT WIPE DUST OR DIRT WITH DRY ROUGH CLOTH OR BY HAND.

16.12.14 Instrument Panel/Interior Trim

Use only soft microfiber, dry cloth to clean Instrument Panel/Interior Trim.

Clean the instrument panel/Interior trim areas with neutral PH soap and water using soft microfiber / cotton cloth / sponge, then with a clean and dry white cotton cloth; you may also use Dash and Vinyl Cleaner on the instrument panel and interior trim areas.

•

Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection.

•

Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument pane and interior trim.

If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on the interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:

•

Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth.

•

Apply vinyl cleaner to the wiped area and spread around evenly.

•

Apply cleaner to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area and allow this to set in at room temperature for 30 minute.

•

Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to clean the area with a rubbing motion for 60 second.

•

Following this, wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth.

Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel.

16.12.15 Leather Seats (Where Applicable)

Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the leather:

•

To clean, use a soft microfiber / cotton / sponge cloth with a leather and vinyl with approved cleaners. Dry the area with a soft cloth.

•

To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the leather care kit, available from a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.

•

Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of the clear, protective coating.

In some instances, a color or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing meets leather upholstery. If this occurs, clean the leather immediately to avoid permanent staining.

16.12.16 Underbody

Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt. You can also use an anti-corrosion spray for the underbody to avoid rusting and corrosion especially for vehicles in coastal places.

16.13 Air Conditioning System Maintenance

Your vehicle’s air-conditioning is a sealed system. Any major maintenance, such as recharging should be done by a qualified technician. However, you can do a few things by yourself to make sure the air conditioning works efficiently.

Run the air-conditioning system at least once a week, even during the cold weather months. Run it for at least ten minute with the engine running at normal operating temperature. This circulates the lubricating oil contained in the refrigerant.

Whenever you get the air-conditioning system serviced, make sure the service facility uses a refrigerant recycling system. This system captures the refrigerant for re-use. Releasing the refrigerant into the atmosphere may cause damage to the environment.

16.14 Vehicle Storage

If you are leaving your vehicle for more than 2 weeks you may want to take stopping to protect your battery. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minute in the fresh air mode and high blower speed setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

It is recommended storing the vehicle in a covered, clean, dry, well levelled, ventilated and closed place.

16.15 Winter Care

Dealing with Ice: Make sure you have window ice scrapers and de-icers for the locks. When you’re stuck, having a small shovel is useful to dig out of the snow. The weight of a bag of sand in the trunk will give added traction in rear-wheel drive vehicles and can be used to sprinkle on the snow and ice to gain better traction. Don’t forget personal protection such as a warm coat, hat, gloves and a blanket, in case you get stuck in a storm.

Keep Enough Fuel in the Tank: Never let the fuel level in the tank drop below the half-full mark. A sudden storm with unexpected heavy rains could leave you stranded for hours. Having adequate fuel supply will allow you to idle the engine from time to time to keep warm.

Do not: Tap the ice on the window to crack it or chip it for a good place to start scraping. You could end up cracking more than the ice and end up with a cracked or shattered windshield/window

Pour warm or hot water on the windshield to melt ice. This will crack your windshield.

During Winter Storage: Start the engine occasionally, here are a few pointers to keep in mind:

•

Run it in a well-ventilated area. Carbon monoxide can build up quickly.

•

Run for a minimum of 20 minute to allow the engine to come up to the normal operating temperature. This will allow the oil to circulate and will also open up the thermostat so that your radiator anti-freeze circulates as well.

•

Start up the air conditioner and/or heater and run both for about 10 minute. Again, circulating fluids is essential for good life of the system.

Exterior: Wash and wax your car to provide an extra layer of protection to your paint.

Vinyl and Rubber: Use a good conditioner on all vinyl and rubber parts to prevent from drying out.

Interior: Clean the glass, shampoo the carpets, dig in between the seats to see what’s there, clean the upholstery in all nooks and corners.

Engine: Check all hoses and wires to make sure everything is in good condition and replace any that need to be. The last thing to do is to make sure the internal components of the engine remain lubricated and don’t corrode.

If the engine is being started after a very long period of non-use, warm up the engine at an idle speed for 2-3 minute before driving the vehicle.